Howo Max

HOWO MAX series cars (national VI)
Driver's manual
(First edition)
Sinotruk Jining Commercial Vehicle Corporation

Foreword
This manual introduces information on the operating methods and maintenance of HOWO MAX series vehicles (National VI).
Be sure to read this manual carefully before you set off in your first drive. The provisions of this manual shall be strictly observed during the
operation and maintenance of the vehicle.
Due to the large number of models, the vehicle pictures in this manual are only examples, which may not be completely consistent with the
model you purchased. We reserve the right to make product changes at any time without prior notice. If the technical data involved in this
manual conflicts with the parameters in the announcement, the parameters in the announcement shall prevail.
This manual, Driver Overview Manual for HOWO MAX Series Vehicles (National VI) and warranty manual are all parts of the vehicle. Please
bring them with you.
The warning symbols used in this manual are specified as follows:
DANGER: It involvs personal and vehicle safety, violation will cause casualties or serious injuries, and scrapping or serious damage to
the vehicle.
Warning: It involvs personal and vehicle safety, violation will cause personal injuries and vehicle damage.
Caution: suggestive additional explanatory information.

This Manual is prepared by Applied Engineering Development Center of China National Heavy Duty Truck Group Co., Ltd.
China National Heavy Duty Truck Group Co., Ltd.

2021.06
No reprinting, copying, translation or extracting is allowed without the written consent from SINOTRUK. This manual is strictly protected by copyright
law and all copyrights belong to China National Heavy Duty Truck Group Co., Ltd.
I
Warning
Warning!
- The oils used for the vehicle shall be those specified in this manual, and the vehicle shall be driven to SINOTRUK
service station for oil change and filter element replacement, as well as first maintenance and periodical maintenance.
Otherwise, it will cause damage to the vehicle and SINOTRUK only provide paid service!
-The setting of the intelligent auxiliary system depends on the system configuration of the OEM vehicle, including but
not limited to the engine, gearbox, retarder, braking system, electric system and other major assemblies. Users are not
allowed to refit the OEM vehicle, including but not limited to changing the assembly and upperstructure restructuring of
the original vehicle, otherwise the performance of the system will be seriously affected, resulting in serious
consequences!
- SINOTRUK special air filter element, diesel filter element, oil filter element and other filter components shall be used to
ensure the cleanliness of engine air inlet, fuel and engine oil. Otherwise, it will cause early wear of the engine and cause
damage to the diesel particulate filter plug of the post-processing system. Sinotruk provide only paid service!
-Regular diesel meeting GB 19147 national VI standard should be used. Otherwise, components and parts of the
high-pressure common rail system such as high-pressure oil pump and fuel injector will be damaged, and the fuel
injection unit will be also damaged, leading to poisoning failure of post-processing oxidation catalytic converter and
blocking failure of diesel particulate filter, which will eventually result in excessive exhaust emission!
- The exhaust temperature is higher during active regeneration, so regeneration in flammable & explosive places is
prohibited. - The exhaust temperature is very high during the regeneration, so it is strictly forbidden to be close to the
muffler, and to stand or stack articles at the downstream of the exhaust pipe outlet!
-The adblue solution meeting GB 29518 standards shall be used and the cleanliness inside the adblue box shall be
ensured. Otherwise, the adblue pump and adblue nozzle will be blocked or even damaged, resulting in crystallization or
even blocking of the selective catalytic reductor, which may result in exceeding the emission standard!
II
Vehicle identification
Vehicle nameplate
The vehicle nameplate is inside the copilot side door (visible when the door is
opened). The vehicle model, main mass parameters and engine model are
marked on the nameplate.
The VIN is located on the outside of the frame right girder web at the front axle
centerline and on the vehicle nameplate.
Please carefully check whether the VIN is consistent with the VIN on the
certificate.
III
Engine nameplate
MC07/MC07H engine nameplate ① is installed on the cylinder block. It is
located at the air inlet side of the engine, the rear end of the high-pressure oil
1 pump.
The engine nameplate indicates the engine model, maximum net power/speed,
order number, emission level and other information.
MC11/MC11H/MC13/MC13H/MT13 engine nameplate ② is located on the

cylinder block at the rear end of the electric generator on the air inlet side of
the engine.
order number, emission level and other information.
IV
MT07/MT07H engine nameplate ③ is located on the upper surface of the

flywheel cover on the air inlet side of the engine.
order number, emission level and other information. 3
WP7/WP8 Weichai engine nameplate ④ is installed on the cylinder head

cover.
4
The engine nameplate is marked with the following information: engine model,
rated power/speed, ex-factory serial number, ex-factory date, etc.
V
WP9/WP10/WP10.5/WP12/WP13 Weichai engine nameplate ⑤ is located

and installed on the cylinder head cover.
The information marked on the engine nameplate includes: engine model,
maximum net power/speed, ex-factory serial number, ex-factory date, etc.
WP4.6N Weichai engine nameplate ⑥ is installed on the cylinder head cover.

6 rated power/speed, ex-factory serial number, ex-factory date, etc.
VI
WP6H Weichai engine nameplate ⑦ is located and installed on the cylinder

head cover.
rated power/speed, ex-factory serial number, ex-factory date, etc.
VII
Service life
The service life of this series of models shall be implemented according to the
National Standard for Compulsory Scrapping of Motor Vehicles.
VIII
Contents
Foreword ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... I
Warning .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... II
Vehicle identification ...................................................................................................................................................................................... III
Service life.................................................................................................................................................................................................. VIII
Contents ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IX
Chapter I Vehicle Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Operation of door ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Rearview mirror adjustment .......................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Front windshield ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Storage box .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
Tool kit .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Instrument panel........................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
Solar protection device ................................................................................................................................................................................. 28
Flow guide system ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
Skylight ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 32
Seat adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
Steering wheel adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Seat belt ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 41
Sleeping berth .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 44
Overview of the inside of the cab .................................................................................................................................................................. 46
Instrument panel........................................................................................................................................................................................... 48
Switches and buttons ................................................................................................................................................................................... 58
Rocker switch and buttons............................................................................................................................................................................ 58
IX
Detector lamp and alarm lamp ...................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Driver display and detector lamp panel ......................................................................................................................................................... 65
Information displayed on the driver display and detector lamp panel............................................................................................................. 71
Left combination switch ................................................................................................................................................................................ 84
Right combination switch .............................................................................................................................................................................. 85
Buttons on steering wheel ............................................................................................................................................................................ 88
Key switch .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 90
Electric horn/air horn .................................................................................................................................................................................... 92
24 V cigarette lighter/ashtray/24 V power socket .......................................................................................................................................... 93
USB interface ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 94
220 V power socket ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 95
Lighting......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 97
Telematics .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 102
Image of four directions .............................................................................................................................................................................. 103
Intelligent auxiliary system .......................................................................................................................................................................... 104
Braking system ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Air conditioning system ............................................................................................................................................................................... 130
Independent heater system ........................................................................................................................................................................ 139
Parking air conditioning system .................................................................................................................................................................. 143
Cab tilting mechanism ................................................................................................................................................................................ 149
Chapter II Preparation for Driving ............................................................................................................................................................... 154
Overview of inspection and maintenance .................................................................................................................................................... 155
Inspection and maintenance before starting the engine .............................................................................................................................. 157
Inspection after starting engine ................................................................................................................................................................... 171
Chapter III Driving Vehicles......................................................................................................................................................................... 175
X
Driving/run-in .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 176
Use the vehicle economically ..................................................................................................................................................................... 177
Vehicle load ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 179
Winter vehicles ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 180
Start the engine .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 182
Shut off the engine ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 186
Clutch ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 187
Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 188
Retarder ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 212
Differential lock ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 218
Suspension ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 222
Semitrailer operation .................................................................................................................................................................................. 236
Chapter IV Practical Suggestions ............................................................................................................................................................... 241
Tire replacement ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 242
Traction and traction start ........................................................................................................................................................................... 249
Jump start/auxiliary start ............................................................................................................................................................................. 253
Energy storage spring brake chamber-emergency release ......................................................................................................................... 255
Fuel system ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 257
Vehicle LNG supply system ........................................................................................................................................................................ 265
CNG supply system for vehicles ................................................................................................................................................................. 272
Air filter ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 277
Electrical system ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 283
Lighting ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 285
Cleaning and maintenance of vehicles ....................................................................................................................................................... 287
XI
Chapter V Vehicle Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................................. 291
Engine ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 292
Clutch ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 403
Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 408
Retarder ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 449
Steering system .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 464
Driven axle ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 466
Drive axle ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 474
Transmission shaft...................................................................................................................................................................................... 510
Suspension................................................................................................................................................................................................. 514
Bolster ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 518
Vehicle maintenance .................................................................................................................................................................................. 519
Chapter VI Safety and Environmental Protection ........................................................................................................................................ 537
Safety instruction ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 538
Environmental Protection ............................................................................................................................................................................ 552
Chapter VII Technical Parameters .............................................................................................................................................................. 553
Engine parameters ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 554
Transmission parameters ........................................................................................................................................................................... 564
Retarder parameters................................................................................................................................................................................... 567
Driven axle parameters ............................................................................................................................................................................... 569
Suspension parameters .............................................................................................................................................................................. 571
Tire parameters .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 574
Vehicle parameters ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 577
XII
Chapter I Vehicle Operation
13
Operation of door
Operation of door
Warning!
Do not drive the vehicle until the doors are closed normally.
Operation f door (from outside)

Open the door
2 1 • Method 1: insert the key ① into the lockhole, turn the key counterclockwise
(clockwise on copilot side) to open the door lock, and pull the handle ② to
open the door.
• Method 2: Use the remote key, press the unlock key ③ to open all door
locks, press the unlock button ③, and pull the handle ② to open the door.
Lock the door
• Method 1: close the door with moderate force, insert the key ① into the
lockhole, and turn the key clockwise (counterclockwise on copilot side) to
lock all doors.
• Method 2: close the doors with moderate force, and press lock key ④ to
lock all doors.
4
3
14
Operation of door
Operation of door (from inside)

Open the door (driver's side, door unlocked)
• Pull the inner wedging block ① of the door to push the door open.
Open the door (driver's side, door locked)

• Press the key "B" on the rocker switch ② to unlock the door, and pull the A
interior wedging block ① to push the door open. 2
15
Operation of door
Lock the door (driver's side)

A • Close the door with moderate force and press the "A" key on the rocker
2 switch ②.
Open the door (copilot's side)

• When the door is not locked, pull the inner wedging block ① of the door to
push the door open.
16
Operation of door
Power window (driver side)

Partially or completely open the windows 2 C
• Turn on the key switch and place it in the ON position.
• Press the end "C" of rocker switch ① (controlling the right window) or ②
(controlling the left window).
• When the rocker switch is pressed, the window glass will be lowered
electrically, and when the switch is released, the window glass will stop
lowering.
Partially or completely close the windows
1
• Pull the end "C" of rocker switch ① (controlling the right window) or ②
(controlling the left window).
• When the rocker switch is pulled, the window glass rises, and when the
rocker switch is released, the window glass stops rising.
• The rocker switch on the driver side can control the lifting and lowering of the
door glass on both sides at the same time.
17
Operation of door
Power window (copilot side)

The operation method is the same as that for the window on the driver's side.
The rocker switch on the front passenger side ① can control only the lifting
and lowering of the door glass on this side.
Warning!
-Beware of danger of injury.
-Make sure no one is clamped when closing the window.
-In order to prevent the doors, windows and door lock motors
from overheating due to frequent actions, the control system
1 protects the doors, windows and door lock motors from
overheating.
Key bar code

According to different configurations, keys are divided into remote key and
ordinary keys. The plastic pendant of the key is provided with the barcode E
required for new key duplication (please keep it properly). With this code, an
ordinary key can be duplicated at the service station. The remote key shall be
duplicated according to the information of the central control door lock
controller in the vehicle.
E
18
Operation of door
Remote control window glass

Warning!
-Beware of danger of injury.
-Make sure no one is clamped when closing the window.
-In order to prevent the doors, windows and door lock motors
from overheating due to frequent actions, the control system
protects the doors, windows and door lock motors from
overheating.
3
4
When the master power switch is on and the ignition key is in LOCK position:
• Press and hold the lock key ③ of the remote key for 2 seconds. After the
door lock completes the locking action, the left and right door windows
glasses will be automatically closed completely.
• Press and hold the unlocking button ④ of the remote key for 2 seconds.
After the door lock completes the unlocking action, the left and right door 2
windows glasses will be automatically opened completely.
• In the process of glass lifting, the ignition switch changes from LOCK gear to
ON gear to interrupt the lifting of glass on both sides. Operating the
driver-side rocker switches ① and ② can interrupt lifting of the door glass
on the same side, and operating the rocker switch on the front passenger
side can interrupt lifting of the door glass on this side.
19
Operation of door
Power window (berth control switch)

When the master power switch is turned on, operate the rocker switch ① (to
control the window on driver's side) or ② (to control the window on the front
passenger side):
-Press or pull the rocker switch, and the window glass will inch up and down.
2 1
20
Rearview mirror adjustment

Rearview mirror adjustment (manual)
• The adjustment of the manual rearview mirror shall be carried out in the parking
3 state. Confirm that the door is locked before rearview mirror adjustment. Lower
the window glass and obtain the proper lens angle by pressing the periphery of
the left and right rearview mirror lenses.
1
• Close-proximity mirror: close-proximity mirror ① is not adjustable.
• Front bottom view mirror: hold the front bottom view mirror ② by hand, and
4 rotate it with moderate force to the desired viewing angle at will.
• Main rear view mirror: hold the periphery of the main rear view mirror ③, with
moderate force to rotate the mirror up and down or leftward and rightward along
2 the rotating linkage ball, until the angle of view is adjusted to that required.
• Wide-angle rearview mirror: hold the periphery of the wide-angle rearview mirror
4 ④, with moderate force to rotate the mirror up and down or leftward and
rightward along the rotating linkage ball, until the angle of view is adjusted to that
required.
21
Rearview mirror adjustment (electric)

Caution!
A B
○
i -The rearview mirror can only be adjusted when the key switch
is in the ON gear!
- Ensure that the driver seat is in a comfortable driving
position!
-In order to prevent the motor from overheating due to
frequent switch actions, the control system protects the
motors from overheating.
Protection! After the rearview mirror motor has been started
and stopped for 10 consecutive times within 5 seconds, the 1
C
rearview mirror no longer responds to any command for its
operation within 3 minutes.
D
- Rearview mirror must not be adjusted during driving!
Check the settings of the rearview mirror and adjust them as needed. Clean the
rearview mirror if necessary.
Rearview mirror adjustment switch function
• Select the mirror to be adjusted through rocker switches A, B, C and D.
• Adjust the front, back, left and right positions of the mirror by pressing the control
button ①.
• When the operation of pressing the adjustment switch is withdrawn, the switch
will automatically return to the initial position.
• The rearview mirror stops moving when any of the following conditions are met:
Release the control switch ① or the ignition switch is no longer in the ON
position.
22
Turn on the rearview mirror heating device

Caution!
○
i - The rearview mirror heating device works only when the key
switch is on.
-When the rearview mirror is frozen or frosted, please turn on the
rearview mirror heating device.
-If the voltage is lower than 23 V, the rearview mirror heating
device will fail; The rearview mirror heating device will not
automatically be turned on when the voltage returns to normal;
The key switch is set to position ON again, and the voltage returns
2 to normal, the rearview mirror heating device will return to normal.
• Turn on the key switch.

• Press the rocker switch ② to turn on the rearview mirror heating device, and the
heating indicator on the rocker switch will light up.
Turn off the rearview mirror heating device
• When the rearview mirror defroster is working, operate the rocker switch ②
again.
• The heating device will be automatically turned off 15 minutes after the defrost
function of the rearview mirror is activated.
• The key switch is no longer in the ON position
23
Front windshield
Front windshield
Front windshield heating
• The air outlet of the front windshield is shown with arrows
• To defrost the front windshield, select heat mode/defrosting mode/maximum
airflow rate. See "air conditioning system".
• To defrost the front windshield, select heat mode/defrosting mode/maximum
airflow rate. See "air conditioning system".
Microwave window
• The microwave window (motor vehicle electronic identification) is set on the right
side of the middle upper part of the front windshield, and the position of the
microwave window shall not affect the driver's vision.
Axle wire of front windshield
Right side of front windshield
24
Storage box
Storage box
• The storage box can be used to store clothing and other household items on
the vehicle, but heavy items should be avoided.
• The position after the storage box is opened is shown in the figure.
25
Tool kit
Tool kit
There is a tool kit on the right side of the cab.
Open tool kit cover
• The opening handle ① of the tool kit is located behind the seat. Pull the handle
to open the tool kit lock.
• Open tool kit cover ②, the tool kit cover can be opened about 90 degrees.
Close tool kit cover
• Close the tool kit cover ② and press it carefully. The tool kit is locked when a
"snap" lock sound is heard.
2
26
Instrument panel
Instrument panel
• Driver side: vehicle control and information display.
• Middle and front passenger side: storage area:

Storage compartment and locker can store all kinds of living things, and the
cup holder is easy to use.
The pop-up ashtray facilitates the use by the driver and copilot.
27
Solar protection device

Adjustment of the sun visor
Under the storage box in the cab, there is a sun-blind on the left and right
sides respectively (the retraction/extension method is the same).
• The figure shows the front sun-blind in stowed state.
• The driver can pull the pull ring ① to place the front sun-blind ② in the
desired position.
Retraction of the sun visor

• The driver can pull the pull strap ③ to retract the front sun-blind ② as
required.
2
1
3
28
All-around curtain
The all-around curtain can be used when the driver is at rest.
• After the curtain ① is retracted, it shall be tied and fixed on both sides respectively.
• The figure shows the wrap-around curtain in stowed state.
• When the curtain is spread, it can be slowly spread along the curtain guide rail ②.
2
1
Removal and installation of curtain

• Detach the hook from the ball ③ to remove the curtain.
• Operate reversely to install the curtain.
29
Flow guide system
Flow guide system

The flow guide system (optional) consists of roof deflector hood and side
deflector.
The correct installation of roof deflector hood and side deflectors can reduce
2 3 fuel consumption.
1
① Height-adjustable roof deflector hood ② left deflector ③ right deflector
Adjustment of flow guide system

Warning!
- Beware of accidents!
- When adjusting the roof deflector hood, please make sure to
stand on a suitable platform and have sufficient adhesion.
- The height of the adjusted roof deflector hood shall not
exceed the vehicle height allowed by regulations.
-If low-chassis flat-bed wagons or rail transport vehicles are
used, the vehicle transport heights shall not exceeded heights
allowed by laws and regulations.
-When driving on international routes, the laws and regulations
of relevant countries shall be observed, and the flow guide
system shall be readjusted if necessary.
-Ensure that the heights of the flow guide systems on the left
and right sides are consistent.
30
Flow guide system
• According to the height of the vehicle, the height and angle of the diffuser ①
can be adjusted by adjusting the fixed positions of the upper and lower
mounting holes of the diffuser bracket ④.
2 3
1
31
Skylight
Skylight
Pinch handle ① and drag it back and forth to open or close sunshade net ②.
The left figure shows the sunshade net which is fully closed.
1 2
The picture on the left shows a sunshade net which is fully opened . The
sunshade net can only be fully opened or closed.
32
Skylight
Open the skylight (cocked)

Close the sunshade net, open the skylight control crank ① to 180 degrees,
pinch the knob ② and rotate it counterclockwise along the fixing screw ③,
the back of the skylight slowly cocks until a "click" sound is heard. When the
skylight is cocked to the maximum angle, continue to rotate the knob until the
skylight no longer cocks.
1
Close the skylight

Hold the knob ② and turn it clockwise along the set screw ③. The rear of
skylight will be lowered slowly untill "click" sound is heard, indicating that the
skylight is closed fully.
33
Seat adjustment
Seat adjustment
Air suspension seat (driver's seat)
1 Warning!
-The seat can be adjusted only when the vehicle is stationary,
and must not be adjusted during driving.
-Make sure that you can hear the sound of engaging the seat
lock device.
- It is not suitable to fix the child safety seat on the driver seat
and the front passenger seat.
-The safety belt shall be fastened before driving, see "seat belt
".
① Three-point height adjustable seat belt ② Forward and backward

adjustment of seat cushion ③ Forward and backward adjustment of seat
④ Rapid decline device (facilitate passengers to get on and off) ⑤
Adjustable damping ⑥ Inclination angle adjustment
10 ⑦ Seat height adjustment ⑧ Ventilation, heating and massage control ⑨
Seat backrest angle adjustment ⑩ Waist airbag adjustment
9
8
2
7
6
5
4
34
Seat adjustment
Three-point height adjustable seat belt

Press the upper button of the safety belt height adjuster ① to push the
adjuster upward or downward to adjust the safety belt to a proper height, and 1
release the button.
Seat cushion angle adjustment
Pull the handle② up, adjust the seat cushion to the appropriate position as
needed, lower the handle, and lock the seat cushion.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Pull the handle③ up, slide the seat forward/backward to the appropriate
position, and lower the handle; Push the seat forward or backward until you
hear that the seat is locked in place.
Rapid decline device (facilitate passengers to get on and off the vehicle)
• After getting in the vehicle, press the button ④ (the button pops up), and
the seat rises to the driving position.
• Before getting off the vehicle, press button ④ (button pressed in), and the
seat will be lowered to the exit position.
Adjustable damping
• Adjusting button ⑤ upward or downward can adjust the seat for shock 10
absorption and seat comfort.
Inclination adjustment 9
• Pull Button ⑥ upward to adjust the seat surface inclination. 8
2
7
6
5
4
35
Seat adjustment
Seat height adjustment

• Sit on the seat, pull the handle ⑦ upward, and release the handle when the
1 seat is raised to a suitable height;
• Sit on the seat, pull down the handle ⑦, and release the handle when the
seat is lowered to a suitable height.
Ventilation/heating/massage control button
• Adjust Knob ⑧ to adjust the ventilation volume from the seat.
Seat backrest angle adjustment
• Lean gently against the backrest and pull Handle ⑨ upward to adjust the
backrest to the desired position, and then release the handle to lock the
backrest.
Lumbar support and lateral support
• Press the button ⑩ to inflate or deflate the airbag.
"+": airbag inflation;
"-": airbag deflation.
10
9
8
2
7
6
5
4
36
Seat adjustment
Light weight seat

Warning!
-The seat can be adjusted only when the vehicle is stationary,
and must not be adjusted during driving.
-Make sure that you can hear the sound of engaging the seat
lock device.
- It is not suitable to fix the child safety seat on the driver seat
and the front passenger seat.
-The safety belt shall be fastened before driving, see "seat belt
".
① Seat backrest angle adjustment

② Seat cushion folding adjustment
③ Front and rear adjustment of the seat
37
Seat adjustment
Seat backrest angle adjustment

• Lean back and nudge the seat backrest.
• Pull up the handle ① to unlock the backrest.
2
• Adjust the backrest to the desired position.
• Release the handle.
Seat folding adjustment
• Turn up the seat cushion ②, and stop pressing when you hear the lock
sound of the seat cushion so as to make the seat cushion in the folded state.
• Push the seat cushion ② in the direction shown in the figure, turn the seat
cushion down when the unlocking sound of the seat cushion is heard, and
restore the seat cushion to the use state.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
• Pull the handle ③ upward and slide the seat cushion forward/backward.
• Release the handle.
• Push the seat forward or backward until until you hear that the seat is locked
in place.
38
Seat adjustment
Adjustment of the front and rear position of the seat and the state of the
seat backrest angle
• The front and rear position of the seat may be adjusted according to the
occupant's body shape (the front and rear position of the cushion cannot be
adjusted); Rotate forward
by 30° Rotate
• When the seat backrest is 12 °from the vertical direction, the seat is in the backward by
seat backrest angle. 46°
Torso
-line
Seat backrest angle adjustment range

• Based on the 12 °angle between the backrest and the vertical direction, the
backrest can be adjusted forward/backward by 30 °/46 °.
39
Steering wheel adjustment
Steering wheel adjustment

In order to meet the driving habits of different drivers, the position of steering
wheel ① can be adjusted up and down, back and forth, with the adjusted
height of about ±33 mm and the angle of about 12°.
When adjusting the steering wheel, there shall be sufficient air pressure in the
compressed air system.
• Press the upper part of the rocker switch ② to keep the rocker switch in the
unlocking position, pull it up or down, push it forward or pull it back to adjust
the steering wheel to a proper driving position.
• Release the rocker switch ② and the steering wheel position will be
locked.
Moving the steering wheel forward not only facilitates people entering or
leaving the vehicle, but also helps to move towards the copilot side.
1
2
DANGER!
It is strictly forbidden to adjust the position of the steering
wheel when the vehicle is running. The steering wheel can only
be adjusted when the vehicle is at a standstill and the parking
brake is applied!
40
Seat belt
Seat belt
Warning!
-Fasten the safety belt before each driving.
-One safety belt for one person.
-It is strictly forbidden to wrap the safety belt , make sure the seat
belt fits your body.
-The safety belt can provide you with the best protection only when
the seat backrest is almost at the vertical position, see "Seat
adjustment".
-The back shall stick to the seat backrest, and the safety belt shall
be appressed to the neck and shoulder.
- The safety belt shall be located at the middle of the shoulder and
not at the throat.
-The safety belt shall be moderately tight at the thigh,and shall
pass across the lower abdomen as far as possible,not across the
stomach.
-Do not adjust the seat to the position where the seat belt does not
fit your body.
-During driving, the tightness of the seat belt should be adjusted
frequently by pulling the shoulder safety belt.
- Do not allow safety belts to pass over pockets with hard or fragile
objects (e.g. pens, glasses, etc.).
- The installation of new safety belts, the replacement of damaged
or severely deformed safety belts in the accident and the fixed spot
check of safety belts should all be carried out at SINOTRUK service
station.
-Don't refit the seat belts.
41
Seat belt
Please fasten the safety belt.

Before fastening safety belt ①, adjust the seat according to your body shape.
See "seat adjustment".
• The shoulder section of the safety belt shall pass through the middle of your
shoulder mostly, and the safety belt is not allowed to pass through your
throat.
• Grasp the safety belt buckle ② and pull the seat belt through the shoulder
and thigh.
• Insert the safety belt buckle into the safety belt grip ③ until you hear that the
buckle is engaged.
• The tightness of the safety belt on the upper body and thighs should be
appropriate.
Warning!
You should fasten the safety belt.
2
1
3 Inspect seat belt lock (daily)
• Pull the safety belt violently and the safety belt reel shall be locked.
Release
• Press the red button on the safety belt grip ③ in the direction of the arrow.
• Hold the safety belt buckle until the safety belt is retracted automatically.
42
Seat belt
Inertia retractor
Inertia retractor ④ is behind the seat.
The retractor shall lock the safety belt to prevent the safety belt from being
pulled out under the following conditions:
• A sudden deceleration of the vehicle in any direction.
• When the safety belt is pulled out quickly.
By quickly pulling out the safety belt, the lock function of the inertia retractor
can be detected.
5
Safety belt height adjustment

Press the upper button of the safety belt height adjuster ⑤ to push the
adjuster upward or downward to adjust the safety belt to a proper height, and 4
release the button.
43
Sleeping berth
Sleeping berth
Lower berth
Warning!
-Do not step on the middle support plate of the sleeping
berth.
-When the vehicle is running, no objects are allowed to be
placed on the berth.
• The middle support plate ① of sleeping berth cannot be removed.
44
Sleeping berth
Upper berth (raised roof driving cab)

Warning!
-During driving, the upper berth must be turned up and limited.
No objects are allowed to be placed on the berth, and no one is
allowed to sit on the upper berth.
- Adjust the seat so that there is enough space for the upper
sleeping berth (see "Seat adjustment").
-The upper berth can only be used when the vehicle is parked.
Upper berth laid down

•Remove the rod ① from the plastic clip ② with force, and gently release
the rod to turn the upper berth downward;
•AFTER THE ROD REACHES THE LIMITING POSITION, THE SLEEPING
BERTH IS IN A FLAT STATE
•OPEN CLIP ③, PULL THE PROTECTIVE NET ④ TO THE HIGHEST
POSITION, AND PRESS THE CLIP. 3
Upper berth packed up
1
•TO STOW THE UPPER BERTH, PERFORM THE OPERATION STEPS
OPPOSITE TO THAT FOR DEPLOYING THE UPPER BERTH.
4 2
45
Overview of the inside of the cab
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
46

1 Rocker switches for adjusting glass lifting, door lock and rearview mirror
2 Movable ashtray bracket 3 Steering wheel
4 electric horn/air horn switch 5 Instrument panel
6 Right combination switch 7 Hand brake handle
8 Hand brake handle 9 for trailers MP5
10 A/C panel 11 Air outlet
12 USB interface 13 24 V power socket
14 Storage box 15 Cigarette lighter
16 Gear shifting handle 17 Accelerator pedal
18 Brake pedal 19 Key switch
20 Clutch pedal 21 Steering wheel lock switch
22 Left combination switch
47
Instrument panel
22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
48
Instrument panel
Instrument panel
Instrument panel (fuel)
1 Speedometer 12 Total average fuel consumption
2 Indication of safety belt unfastened 13 Back key
3 Adblue liquid level percentage 14 Right key
4 Work indicator/alarm area 15 Left button
5 DPF carbon load percentage 16 OK key
6 Time/alarm icon 17 Total mileage
7 Tachometer 18 Subtotal mileage
8 Voltmeter 19 Brake pressure 2
9 Engine water thermometer 20 Fuel level gauge
10 Engine oil pressure gauge 21 Brake pressure 1
11 Instantaneous fuel consumption 22 Speaker grill
49
Instrument panel
22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
50
Instrument panel
Instrument panel (LNG)

3 Work indicator/Alarm area 14 Right click
4 Gear 15 Left key
5 Remaining amount of liquefied natural gas 16 OK key
51
Instrument panel
22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
52
Instrument panel
Instrument panel (CNG)

3 Work indicator/Alarm area 14 Right click
4 Gear 15 Left key
5 Storage pressure 16 OK key
53
Instrument panel
Engine tachometer
The engine speed is displayed, and the indication range is 0 ~ 3200
r/min, 100 r/min per small scale and 500 r/min per large scale.
The green area is the economic engine speed area, and the red area is
the high engine speed area.
Water thermometer
The temperature of the engine coolant is displayed. When the pointer is
in the red area, it indicates that the temperature of the engine coolant is
too high, and the indicator ① is on.
54
Instrument panel
Oil pressure gauge

The oil pressure value is displayed. When the oil pressure is too low, the
indicator ② lights up.
Barometer
When the air pressure value of brake circuit I or II is displayed, the air pressure
is lower than 5.5 × 0.1 MPa, and the air pressure low alarm indicator ③ or ④
at the instrument panel lights up.
3
4
55
Instrument panel
Fuel gauge
It is used to display the remaining fuel quantity in the vehicle fuel tank.
The fuel quantity at 0 is empty, and the fuel quantity at 1 is full.
When little fule is remaining in the fuel tank, the fuel oil level at ⑤ is low
and the indicator lights up, reminding the driver to refuel in time.
Speedometer
It is used to indicate the vehicle speed, and the indication range is 0~140 km/h,
5 km/h per small scale and 10 km/h per large scale.
56
Instrument panel
Voltmeter
The vehicle voltage is displayed. When the vehicle voltage is too low or too
high, the indicator light at ⑥ on the driver display screen will light up.
6
Odometer
The driver display ⑧ shows the total driving mileage of the vehicle, and ⑦
shows the subtotal mileage.
Press and hold ⑨ ESC key for 2 s to clear subtotal mileage.
57
Switches and buttons
Rocker switch and buttons

1 Rotate light switch (AUTO/non-photosensitive sensor): rotate the light switch to
corresponding position to light up corresponding light.
2 Headlamp adjustment switch: the switch is used to adjust the low beam height.
The switch is roller with gears 0, 1, 2 and 3. The gear number indicated during
operation turns green. Gear 0 is the initial gear and is the highest position of the
2
beam. As the gear increases, the headlamp height decreases step by step. 3
3 SOS rocker switch: (international) SOS.
4 Cab turnover rocker switch: press the switch to place the lifting oil pump in the 1
ascending or descending state, and press the lifting button outside the cab to
realize the electric lifting or lowering of the cab.
5 Work light rocker switch: when the position lamp is switched on, press the switch
to turn on the work light behind the cab. 4 5
6 Crisis alarm switch: press the switch, and all turning signals will flash, the
steering indicator on the instrument will flash at the same time.
58
7. The rocker switch of inter-axle differential lock: press the switch to engage
the inter-axle differential lock.
8. The rocker switch of inter-wheel differential lock: press the switch to
engage the inter-wheel differential lock.
9 rocker switch for disabling/enablint LDW and FCW:
7 9
10. The rocker switch of power takeoff : press the switch to engage the power
takeoff.
11 Rocker switch for speaker switching: when the switch doesn't work, press
8 the speaker key on the left combination switch to sound the electric horn;
After pressing the switch, press the speaker key on the left combination
switch to sound the air horn.
12 Electromagnetic power rocker switch: press the switch to disconnect and
turn on the battery power.
12
10 11
59
13 Rocker switch for DPF parking regeneration/ DPF parking regeneration

prohibition: used to activate parking regeneration/ disable DPF active regeneration
and parking regeneration.
14 Lift shaft lifting switch: press the switch, and the lift shaft will automatically and
continuously inflate/ deflate to the corresponding position. The lift shaft cannot be
left in the middle position through the switch. Press this switch again to lower the
lift shaft.
15 Rocker switch for switching between the dual oil tanks: press the switch to use
the fuel in the auxiliary fuel tank, and the fuel gauge displays the fuel quantity of
the auxiliary fuel tank.
16 Diagnosis connector: a special diagnostic tool for heavy trucks can be

connected to the diagnosis connector. Enter the engine diagnosis interface, click 14 15
Parameter Configuration, and read all to obtain the frame number. 13
16
60
Detector lamp and alarm lamp
1 4 5 43 44 47
51 50 49 48
61
1 Low fuel level alarm 17 Left tur n signal lamp of trailer
2 ECS 18 Hig h beam
3 Safet y belt not fastened alarm 19 Low beam
4 Over speed warning light 20 Front fog lamp
5 Left steering indicator of main vehicle

21 Rear fog lamp
6 Par king brake

22 Right tu rn signal of the trailer
7 Brak e fault warning lamp
8 Seri ous warning light (red)
9 Batter y charging and discharging indicator
10 Main r ight steering working indicator
11 High tir e temperature
12 Air fi lter clogged caution light
13 Oil-wat er separation lamp
14 High DPF temperature indicator
15 DPF regeneration off
16 ECAS
62
23 Posit ion lamp 39 Reta rder fault indicator
24 Power takeoff lamp 40 Workin g indicator of retarder
25 Cab lock indicator 41 Gear box fault indicator
42 Adblu e level indicator

26 Low c oolant level Indicator
43 DPF% carbon load percentage
27 Drive r caution light
28 Wor k light
29 Fault of the SVS control system
30 Prehe at lamp
31 ASR indicator
32 ABS in dicator of main vehicle
33 Trai ler ABS indicator
34 Low g ear indicator
35 Lane offset warning light
36 AE BS alarm
37 Front brake pad wear indicator
38 Rear b rake pad wear indicator

63
44 Exhau st brake indicator
45 OBD indicator
46 High engine speed indicator
47 High c oolant temperature indicator
48 Batte ry voltage indicator
49 Engin e oil pressure indicator
50 Baromete r 2 Air pressure low warning light
51 Baromete r 1 Air pressure low warning light
52 Lifti ng axle indicator
53 Low LNG indicator
54 Low CNG indicator
64
Driver display and detector lamp panel

The driver display ① and the detector lamp panel ② indicate the operating 2
status of the vehicle for the driver.
When the alarm conditions are met, the alarm symbol will be shown on the
display.
65
Main interface
Driving data
Subtotal average fuel
Pressing the OK button on the main interface to enter the menu list;
consumption Press up key or down key to select "1. driving data";
Engine speed Press the OK key to confirm entry, and the data content replaced is as
shown in the figure below;
Subtotal fuel consumption Press ESC key to return to previous menu.
Total fuel consumption
Engine coolant
temperature
Engine working hours
66
Tire pressure data
Pressing the OK button on the main interface to enter the menu list;
Press up key or down key to select "2. tire pressure data";
Press the OK key to confirm entry;
Press ESC key to return to previous menu.
Fault information
Pressing the OK button to enter the menu list;
Press up key or down key to select "3. fault information";
Press the OK key to confirm entering the list of faulty modules;
Press up key or down key to select the faulty module;
Press the OK key to enter the fault module
Press ESC key to return to the previous menu;
The fault code is displayed in form of SPN + FMI.
67
Comprehensive information
Press up key or down key to select "4. comprehensive information";
Speed K value Press ESC key to return to the previous menu;
This page mainly contains K value information, instrument software and
Vehicle speed K value hardware versions.
Number of pulses of
speed sensor
Software version
Hardware version
68
Pin state Name State Name State Name State

Press up key or down key to select "5. pin status";
Press up key or down key to switch the definition status of A blue plug-in pin or
B green plug-in pin;
Press ESC key to return to previous menu.
Exit
Name State Name State Name State
Exit
69
Language settings System setting

Language settings
Press up key or down key to select "2. language setting", and press OK
to confirm entry;
1. Chinese Press the up key or down key to select the corresponding language
(Chinese, English, Russian, Spanish);
2. English Press OK to confirm;
3. Russian Press ESC key to return to previous menu.
4. Spain
Confi Exit
rm
System setting Enter system settings

Press up key or down key to select time setting or language;
Time setting is divided into manual setting or automatic setting; Enter the
manual setting, the first time digit flashes, press the up or down key to
adjust the digit value, and press the OK key to set it in turn; Press OK to
complete the setting; Enter the automatic setting and press the OK key,
that is, the automatic timing is successful.
1. Time setting Press ESC key to return to previous level.
2. Language
settings
Confi Exit
rm
70
Information displayed on the driver display and detector lamp panel

Information Sound
Detector lamp panel Meaning Comments/further measures
description signal
Message - The current vehicle is

Gear D White
in D gear

Gear N White
in N gear

Gear P
in P gear adn in parking state
Message -The current vehicle is

Gear R Red
in R gear
Voice Function - safety belt control:

The driver must fasten the safety
Safety belt fault Red broadcast: The driver does not fasten the belt.
dripping safety belt.
Information - the yellow signal

Power takeoff 1 Green Yes light will light up when the power
takeoff is working. At this time, if
the vehicle speed is greater than Reduce vehicle speed and rotation
30 km/h and the speed is greater speed.
than 1900 r/min, the red signal
Power takeoff 2 Green Yes light will flash and there will be
an audible alarm prompt.
71
Information Sound
description signal
Maintenance depot-electrically
controlled air suspension (ECAS) • Please drive CAREFULLY AND
If the frame is lowered: the braking SLOWLY.
ECAS fault warning Yellow No effect will be reduced. • ASK FOR HELP FROM
If the frame is lifted above the driving SINOTRUK service stations
position: there is a danger of immediately.
damaging to the shock absorber.
Left steering indicator of Information-left steering indicator of

Green Yes
trailer trailer
Right steering indicator Information-right steering indicator of

Green Yes
of trailer trailer
Ask for help from SINOTRUK service

Excessive emission Yellow No Information-excessive emission
stations immediately.
High temperature alarm

Red No •
of retarder
Severe fault of the Information-Severe fault of the Ask for help from SINOTRUK service
Yellow No
retarder retarder stations immediately.
72
Information Sound
description signal
• Check the engine oil level and fill or

Safety - engine oil pressure: drain a portion of the engine oil as
Oil pressure alarm needed.
Red Yes The engine oil pressure is too
indicator
low or too high. • Ask for help from SINOTRUK service
stations immediately.
• Please sTART CAREFULLY.

ASR operation
Yellow No Information-ASR • ASK FOR HELP FROM SINOTRUK
indication
service stations immediately.
• CHECK WHETHER THE VEHICLE IS

AT A CERTAIN SPEED.
Cruise White No Message - vehicle in cruise
• CHECK WHETHER THE VEHICLE
SPEED IS STABle.
• Check whether the front, rear, left and

Position lamp Green No Information - position lamp on
right clearance lamps are ON.
• Check whether the vehicle has been

Lifting axle Yellow No Information-lifting axle lifted
liftED.
73
Information Sound
description signal
Barometer 1 indication White Safety

symbol No Air pressure indication of
Brake Circuit 1
Barometer 2 indication White Safety

symbol No Air pressure indication of
Brake Circuit 2
Left steering indicator of Information-left turn

Green Yes
the main vehicle indicator of main vehicle
Right steering indicator Information- right steering

Green Yes
of the main vehicle indicator of the main vehicle
Low fuel level Yellow No Information- low fuel level Fill fuel.
Safety-cab lock:
The cab is not completely
Cab unlocked Red Yes locked. At least one of the Lock the cab properly.
contact sensors of the cab
locking system is in an open
circuit.
74
Information Sound
description signal
The vehicle is not ready for driving!

• Stop immedIATELY AND CAUTION
THE TRAFFIC!
• KEEP THE ENGINE TO IDLE AT A
Safety- low air pressure HIGH SPEED UNTIL THE AIR
circuits exist in the four PRESSURE REACHES THE RATED
Braking system fault Red Yes VALUE (THE DISPLAY
circuits of the braking
system. DISAPPEARS).
• IF THE AIR PRESSURE OF THE
BRAKE CIRCUIT CANNOT REACH
THE RATED VALUE: Do not move the
vehicle and ask SINOTRUK service
station for assistance.
Information-parking brake
works; When the speed of
• Check the air route and sensor
the vehicle is greater than 5
Parking brake Red Yes immediately when the light is not on
km/h and the parking is not
after the parking brake is pulLED.
released, there will be an
audible alarm prompt.
• Please driVE CAREFULLY AND

SVS control system Information - general failure SLOWLY.
Yellow Yes
failure of the engine system • ASK FOR HELP FROM SINOTRUK
Please drive the vehicle slowly and

carefully!
• The trend of WHEEL LOCKING IS
Message-ABS system
ABS fault Yellow No INCREASING, PLEASE BRAKE
failure
CAREFULLY.
• ASK FOR HELP FROM SINOTRUK
75
Information Sound
description signal
• Check whether the ABS fuse is burnt

ouT.
Main vehicle ABS/EBS Red • CHECK WHETHER ABS FAILS IN
THE AIR ROUTE .
Function - Vehicle speed

Speed limit Yellow No Reduce driving speed!
exceeds set value.
Check whether the rear fog lamp on

Rear fog lamp Yellow No Information - rear fog lamp on
the taillight is on
Low beam Green No Information - low beam on
High beam Blue No Information - high beam on
Front fog lamp Green No Information - front fog lamp on
76
Information Sound
description signal
Information - daytime Start the engine to check if the front

Daytime running lamp White No
running lamp on daytime running lights are on
Information-gearbox in low
Low gear Blue No
gear range
Please drive the vehicle slowly and

carefully!
• The trend of wheeL LOCKING IS
INCREASING, PLEASE BRAKE
CAREFULLY.
• CHECK THE PLUG CONNECTION
BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND
TRAILER; IF NECESSARY, CLEAN
Trailer ABS alarm Yellow No Message - trailer ABS fault
THE PLUG TO ENSURE A RELIABLE
CONNECTION.
• CHECK THE CONNECTING CABLE
BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND
TRAILER, AND REPLACE IT WITH A
NEW ONE IF NECESSARY.
• ASK FOR HELP FROM SINOTRUK
SErvice stations immediately.
Information - low engine

Low coolant level Red Yes Please add the coolant in time.
coolant level
Information- adblue box

Low adblue level alarm White No Fill adblue.
level below 10%
77
Information Sound
description signal
• Shift iNTO LOW GEAR TO IMPROVE

Maintenance depot - engine ENGINE COOLING.
High coolant
Red No coolant temperature is too • CHECK THE LIQUID LEVEL OF THE
temperature
high COOLANT AND ADD THE COOLANT
If necessary.
Charging system
Service station - charge Ask for help from SINOTRUK service
indication and abnormal Red Yes
control stations immediately.
voltage alarm
Function - engine
Shift into high gear or reduce the vehicle
Engine overspeed Red Yes Engine speed exceeds the speed!
set value.
• Please DRIVE CAREFULLY AND

General fault warning Information - illuminated SLOWLY.
Yellow No
symbol with other fault lights • ASK FOR HELP FROM SINOTRUK
Security - Accompanied by • Stop imMEDIATELY AND CAUTION

Serious fault warning other fault lights on, or THE TRAFFIC!
Red Yes
symbol accompanied by abnormal • ASK FOR HELP FROM SINOTRUK
instrument sensors service stations immediately.
78
Information description Detector lamp panel Sound signal Meaning Comments/further measures
Maintain the air filter. For more details,

Air filter clogged White No Information-air filter blocked refer to "Air
filter" .
Information-exhaust brake is Test whether the vehicle exhaust

Exhaust brake Yellow No
working brake works
Information-air inlet Check whether the air inlet pipe is

Preheat Yellow No
preheating heated
Drain the water from the fuel coarse

Moisture in fuel White No Information-moisture in fuel
filter.
Retarder works Green No Information-retarder work
79
Information description Detector lamp panel Sound signal Meaning Comments/further measures
Under the premise that the vehicle

speed is greater than 60 km/h and the
driver does not turn the indicator control
on, if the vehicle is about to deviate from
LDW alarm Yellow Yes Information-Lane Deviation
the lane, the lane department warning
system will give audible and visual alarm
automatically to remind the driver of
driving safety.
Front axle brake wear

Yellow No Information Replace the front axle brake pad in time.
alarm
Rear axle brake wear

Yellow No Information Replace the rear axle brake pad in time.
alarm
ESC valid Yellow No Information - ESC on
80
Information Sound
description signal
Information - high or low tire

Tire pressure alarm Yellow No Check the tire pressure.
pressure
ESC off White No INFO-ESC OFF
DPF regeneration Displays carbon deposits. For more

Yellow No Information
reminder details, refer to "Engine Maintenance".
When the regeneration is activated, it

High DPF temperature flashes to indicate that the exhaust
Yellow No Information
indicator pipe temperature is very high and
beware of safe driving operation.
Stop the vehicle immediately and ask

Driver caution light Red Information - engine fault for help from SINOTRUK service
stations.
LNG gas cylinder sensor Check whether the sensor harness on

NC Yellow
disconnected the gas cylinder is disconnected
Info - Inter-wheel differential Check whether the speed of the rear

Inter-wheel differential White
locked wheel is synchronized
81
Information Sound
description signal
Information-lock the duel

2nd inter-wheel Check whether the speed of the rear
White driving wheel inter-wheel
differential wheel is synchronized
differential lock
Information-lock the Check whether the speed of the rear

Inter-axle differential White
inter-axle differential lock wheel is synchronized
Best traction White
Traction assistance White
Information-Doors Not
Door open Red Close the door
Closed
Cargo tank lifting Red Information-cargo tank lifted Check if the cargo tank is lifted
Information-turn off the DPF

DPF regeneration off White
regeneration function
82
Information Sound
description signal
Information-vehicle collision
FCW collision warning Red Brake immediately
is about to occur
When the forward collision warning

Information - forward system detects the risk of collision with
FCW collision warning Yellow
collision warning system the vehicle in front, it reminds the
driver with audible and visual alarms.
High tire temperature Red Park the vehicle to check the tire
High-grade section Green
Information-safety • Stop immediately and caution the

Low air pressure alarm Air pressure indication of traffic!
Red No
on Barometer 1 Brake Circuit 1 • Keep the engine idling at a high
speed until the air pressure reaches
the rated value (the display
information disappears).
Information-safety ·If the air pressure of the brake circuit
Low air pressure alarm
Red No Air pressure indication of cannot reach the rated value: do not
on Barometer 2
Brake Circuit 2 move the vehicle and ask SINOTRUK
service station for assistance.
Work light White
83
Left combination switch
Left combination switch

The left combination switch is located at the left side of steering column under
steering wheel, and its main functions include left and right steering indication,
windshield wiper control and windshield washer control.
Left and right steering indication
Move the left combination switch backward (close to the driver)/forward (away
from the driver), and the left/right steering indicator on the instrument pan el
f lashes. If a trailer is connected, the trailer's indicator on the same
sid e will also flash. When the steering wheel returns to the straight position,
the left combination switch will automatically spring back to position 0.
Windshield wiper
When the handle arrow ① is at the position shown in the figure, it means "close
the windshield wiper", and when it is turned upward, it means "pulsating wiping",
"normal wiping" and "quick wiping" in sequence; Turn down to "mist" mode.
Windshield washing
• Press the button ② to the bottom once for a short time (at most 1 s), and the 2
windshield washing system will spray washing fluid once and conduct wiping for
one cycle;
• Press the button ② once for a short time (more than 1 s), and the windshield
washer system will spray washing fluid to the windshield for three times and
conduct wipings for three cycles.
• Press the button ② to the bottom and hold it, and the windshield washer system
will continuously spray washing fluid and wipe cyclically.
84
Right combination switch

The right combination switch is located at the right side of steering column
under the steering wheel, and includes 6 function switches:
- Lift handle to set RES/+ : increase speed or idle.
- Press handle to set RES/-: decrease speed or idle.
-MEM (MEM): press the button according to the MEM arrow to restore the
previously stored vehicle speed or idle speed.
-OFF (OFF): press the button according to the OFF arrow to cancel the
previously stored vehicle speed or idle speed.
- Exhaust brake switch: rotate gear 1 and 2 of exhaust brake, and the vehicle 1
enters the exhaust brake mode.
- Screen switching key on the instrument: push the screen switching key on 2
the instrument to the left, and the instrument will automatically switch between
screens.
Vehicle cruise control adjustment function
The vehicle cruise control function allows the vehicle to proceed at a constant
speed without the driver stepping on the accelerator, on the condition that the
following conditions are met:
-The vehicle speed is higher than 30 km/h;
- The engine is not in external torque control mode;
- The gearbox is in a non-neutral state;
-The clutch pedal and brake pedal are not depressed.
85
The driver can set the cruise speed by lifting the right combination switch to
set RES/+ (RES/+) or pressing the right combination switch to set SET/-
(SET/-), so that the vehicle enters the cruise mode; When the driver
releases the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will drive according to the set
cruise speed.
During cruising, the driver can change the target cruising speed by lifting the
right combination switch to set RES/+ (RES/+) or pressing the right
combination switch to set SET/- (SET/-).
When any of the above conditions is not met or the driver presses the OFF
button as arrowed, the vehicle will automatically exit the cruise mode.
When the conditions are met again, the driver can press the MEM button
indicated by the arrow to make the vehicle re-enter the cruise state, and the
target cruise speed is the cruise target speed set last time.
Function for adjusting the idling speed of the engine
When the engine is running at idling speed, press MEM for more than 1 s to
adjust the idling speed of engine. You can change the engine speed by
lifting the RES/+ on the right combination switch or pressing down the SET/-
on the right combination switch, and the speed changes by 50rpm with each
action. The speed can be changed continuously if the switch is lifted for a
long time (no more than 15 s). Press gear 0 to exit the regulation of idling
speed of engine.
86
Engine exhaust brake function

Refer to "Braking system" for the operation method.
87
Buttons on steering wheel

Steering wheel key a (middle): short press, speaker.
Steering wheel key b (left)
Function key for adjustment of multimedia entertainment: a
• Key ⑴: short press, mute.
• Key ⑵: short press it to answer a bluetooth call.
• Key ⑶: short press it to hang up a bluetooth call.
• Key ⑷: short press, previous track.
• Key (5): short press, next track. c
• Key (6): press briefly to decrease the volume. b
• Key (7): press briefly to increase the volume.
2
7
3
6
4
5
88
Steering wheel key c (right)

• Key (8): cruise memory and recovery.
• Key (9): cruise OFF key.
• Key ⑽: key to reduce cruising speed.
• Key ⑾: key to increase cruising speed.
8
11
10
9
89
Key switch
Key switch
Key switch ① is located on the right side of the steering column.
• When the key is placed in the "LOCK" position, the whole vehicle is powered
off, and the key can be pulled out.
• When the key is placed in the "ACC" position, electrical equipment which is
working when the vehicle is parked is turned on.
• The key is placed in the "ON" position, the driving position.
• The key is placed in the "START" position, the position for engine start.
90
Key switch
DANGER!
- During driving, do not turn the key switch to the "LOCK"
position, otherwise the key switch will lock the steering wheel
and the vehicle will not be able to turn!
- When you leave the vehicle, even for a short time, you should
also remove the key from the key switch. Otherwise, children or
unauthorized persons may start the engine and may drive the
vehicle.
Caution!
○
i -When starting the vehicle, turn the key to the "START" position.
After releasing the key, it will automatically return to the "ON"
position.
-If you want to turn the key to the "START" position to start the
engine again, you should turn the key to the "LOCK" position and
then to the "START" position to start the engine.
91
Electric horn/air horn
Electric horn/air horn

Electric horn
Press the speaker key ① on the left combination switch to turn on the 1 1
electric horn.
Air horn
Press the horn change-over switch ② on the instrument panel and the horn key 2
① on the left combination switch to turn on the air horn.
92
24 V cigarette lighter/ashtray/24 V power socket
24 V cigarette lighter/ashtray/24 V power socket

Cigarette lighter
• The ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
• Push cigarette lighter ① inward until lock sound is heard; When the
resistance wire at the end of the cigarette lighter is red and hot, the cigarette
lighter will pop up automatically.
Ashtray
• The ashtray is placed on the movable ashtray bracket.
Power socket
1 2
• Power socket ② can be used to supply power to DC/24 V equipment with a
rated load of 300 W.
Warning!
- The socket of cigarette lighter can only be power devices with
a maximum power of 240 W (24 V/10 A). -The heated cigarette
lighter may cause scalding, so you can hold only the handle
part of the cigarette lighter.
- If accompanied by children, the cigarette lighter shall be
removed from the cigarette lighter seat to avoid scalding or
fire.
-Your first priority is to caution road vehicles and traffic
conditions and use a cigarette lighter only when the traffic
permits.
93
USB interface
USB interface
USB interface ① supports the charging of smartphone, tablet PC and other smart
mobile device, and cannot carry out data transmission.
Output voltage: 5 V, Output current: 2.1 A.
1
1
94
220 V power socket
220 V power socket

The 220 V power socket ① is installed on the vertical plane of the sleeping
berth and can be used to supply power to 220 V equipment with a rated load
of 1,000 W.
It supports Chinese two-pin plugs and Chinese three-pin plugs, and can be
used for power supply of household appliances within 1000 W.
Warning!
- When the key is in the "OFF" state, it is recommended that the
inverter be used for <0.5 hours, otherwise the car may not be
ignited and started due to the undervoltage of the battery. 1
- Please place liquids and other items away from sockets, and
do not use them in humid, high temperature (greater than 70°C),
salt spray, dust and unventilated environments.
-The power of electrical appliances shall not exceed 1000 W for
lone-time use, and can be 1500 W for short-time use, with the
service time controlled within 10 minutes.
95
220 V power socket
Warning!
- Please pay attention to the safety of electricity use, do
not allow children to touch the socket, and pay attention
to danger caused by high voltage.
-Do not insert fingers or conductive objects into the
socket jack and beware of high-voltage electric shock.
-Don't insert conductive objects into the socket and
output connectors.
-Do not place heat-resistant or flammable materials, such
as clothes, on the inverter body. This may affect the heat
dissipation of the inverter or cause a fire.
96
Lighting
Lighting
Rotary light switch (light switch) 1 2
① Turn off the lighting lamp
3
② Automatic sensing gear of the low beam
③ Clearance lamp ON gear
④ ON gear of the low beam
⑤ Rear fog lamp indicator (yellow) 6
⑥ Front fog lamp indicator (green)
Automatic sensing of the low beam 4
• The ignition key is in the "ON" position. 5
• Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to low beam automatic sensing
gear ②, the low beam is automatically turned on, and the low beam symbol
on the instrument panel will light up at the same time.
1 2
97
Lighting
Turn on the clearance lamp

1 • The ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
3 • Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to the clearance lamp on gear
③, and the clearance lamp and side marker lamp will be on.
Turn on the low-beam headlamp

1 • The ignition key is in the "ON" position.
• Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to low beam on gear ④, place
the left combination switch in gear 0, and the low-beam headlamp will light
4 up, and the low beam symbol on the instrument panel will light up at the
same time.
98
Lighting
Turn on the high-beam headlamp

• The ignition key is in the "ON" position. 1
• Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to low beam on gear ④, turn
the left combination switch down, the high beam headlamp will light up, and
the high beam symbol on the instrument panel will light up at the same time. 4
High-beam passing light
• The ignition key is in the "ON" position.
• Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to the low beam on gear ④,
turn the left combination switch up, and the headlamp will flash.
• Release the left combination switch and it automatically returns to the 0 gear.
99
Lighting
Turn on the front fog lamp

1 • The ignition key is in the "ON" position.
• Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to low beam on gear ④, press
the rotary light switch once to turn on the front fog lamp, the front fog lamp
4 indicator ⑥ will light up, and the front fog lamp symbol on the instrument
panel will light up at the same time; Press the rotary light switch again, the
6 front fog lamp is turned off and the front fog lamp indicator ⑦ goes off.
Turn on the rear fog lamp

• The ignition key is in the "ON" position.
1
• Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to the low beam on gear ④, pull
the rotary light switch out once, and turn on the rear fog lamp, the rear fog
lamp indicator ⑤ lights up, and the rear fog lamp symbol on the instrument
4
panel lights up at the same time. Pull out the rotary light switch again, the
rear fog lamp is turned off and the rear fog lamp indicator ⑤ goes off.
100
Lighting
Instrument backlighting and switch position indicator

Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to low beam automatic sensing 1 2
gear ② or clearance lamp ON gear ③ or low beam ON gear ④, and the 3
instrument backlighting and the switch position indicator are turned on.
4
Interior light
Press the reading light switch ⑦ to light up the interior light.
Press the switch ⑦ again to turn off the interior light.
101
Telematics
Telematics
SINOTRUK Telematics has functions such as tachograph, cassette radio, fleet
management, vehicle monitoring, driving behavior analysis, and fuel consumption
management (the specific functions may vary according to different order
configurations).
Please refer to the supplier's instruction manual for the operation method.
102
Image of four directions
Image of four directions

The quadrangular image is optional.
The quadrangular image has the function of providing the high-definition
reversing camera and omni-directional driving recorder, and can store videos.
Please refer to the supplier's instruction manual for the operation method.
103
Intelligent auxiliary system

Intelligent auxiliary system is optional. 1
Lane Department Warning System
When the driver unconsciously makes the vehicle deviate from the current
driving lane, the Lane Department Warning System can automatically alarm to
remind the driver to concentrate and keep driving in the current lane to ensure
driving safety.
Under the premise that the vehicle speed is greater than 60 km/h and the
driver does not turn the indicator control on, if the vehicle is about to deviate
from the lane, the lane department warning system will give audible and visual
alarm automatically to remind the driver of driving safety. When alarming, the
indicator ① will flash. At the same time, the left and right speakers will
generate the audible alarm respectively.
When the vehicle is powered on, the lane department warning system is
turned on by default. In this drive cycle, the driver can operate rocker switch
② to turn off the system function, and at the same time, the Indicator ① on
instrument lights up for 3 s; When the driver wants to restore the early warning
function, it only needs the driver to operate the rocker switch ② again.
When the driver turns on the indicator control, the system will not alarm even if
the vehicle deviates from the driving lane.
The lane department warning system may not operate under the following
conditions:
-When the camera hardware fails;
2
-When the visibility is very low, such as dark light or rain, snow, fog and other
bad weather;
104
-When there's strong light radiation, such as direct opposite vehicle light and
sunlight or the reflection against the wet road surface;
- When there is mud, water mist, damage or obstruction at the installation position
of the windshield camera;
- When the lane line is missing or blurred, such as the lane line near the
construction area;
- When the lane line is covered by rain, snow, mud, etc;
-When the lane line is blocked due to being too close to the vehicle in front;
-Rapid changes in lane lines, such as when lane lines branch, intersect, or
converge;
-When the lane line is a non-standard one;
- When the turning radius of the road is too small or the lane line winds around;
- When the shadow changes drastically on the road.
Warning!
-This function should be used on highways or roads with clear lane
lines.
-The Lane Department Warning System is just a driving assistance
system, and the system itself will not control the vehicle. The
driver is fully responsible for the driving safety of the vehicle.
When the warning lamp of the lane department warning system is
always on (the driver does not actively turn off the system), it
means that the system fails, the SINOTRUK service station should
be contacted for handling.
105
Forward collision warning system

The forward collision warning system can detect the distance of the vehicle in front.
When there is a risk of rear-end collision, the system will remind the driver through
automatic warning so as to improve driving safety and reduce traffic accident 3
occurrence rate and casualty rate.
When the vehicle is powered on, the forward collision warning system is turned on
by default. The forward collision warning system can be activated only when the
vehicle speed is not lower than 15 km/h. In this drive cycle, the driver can turn off
the forward collision warning function by rocker switch ③, and the icon ④ on
Instrument will be displayed in yellow; Operate the rocker switch again to turn the
function on again.
106
When the forward collision warning system detects the risk of collision with the
vehicle in front, it reminds the driver with audible and visual alarms.
The following actions by the driver in a short time can inhibit the function of the
forward collision warning system:
-Turn on the indicator control;
- Step on the accelerator pedal quickly and deeply;
- Turning off the system enables rocker switch;
-Turn the steering wheel quickly;
- Step on the brake pedal;
-The cooling time of the system is short (the function is triggered continuously for a
short time);
107
The forward collision warning system may give no response in the following driving
scenarios (including but not limited to). In this case,
the driver should beware of driving safety all the time:
-At the corner of a curve;
-When the vehicle ahead is driving on the verge or entering a ramp;
-When there is a vehicle crossing the junction ahead;
-When other vehicles change lane;
-When the vehicle ahead turns and leaves;
-When on winding and stretching roads;
-When the vehicle overtakes;
-When a stationary obstacle or vehicle suddenly appears in front of the vehicle
after the vehicle ahead leaves;
-When the vehicle approaches a stationary obstacle or vehicle.
Caution!
○
i -The forward collision warning system responds only to vehicles
moving in the same direction, and gives poor or no response to
targets such as people and animals, narrow vehicles such as
motorcycles and bicycles, and vehicles traveling in opposite
directions.
- The system verification of the forward collision warning system
is a professional test, which requires professional technicians to
conduct the professional test in a professional test field, and
users are not allowed to conduct the test. The risks arising
therefrom shall be borne by yourself.
108
When the icon ④ on the instrument turns yellow and is always on (the driver does
not actively turn off the system), the SINOTRUK service station should be
contacted for handling.
Warning!
4
It is forbidden to disassemble the radar controller without
permission. Do not spray or install any appurtenance, such as
anti-collision beam, in front of the radar, otherwise the radar
performance may be affected and the system function may fail.
Warning!
- Forward collision warning system is an important driving
assistance system, please do not turn it off or suppress it at will!
- The forward collision warning system cannot understand the
current traffic and weather conditions, so the driver shall be fully
responsible for the driving safety of the vehicle. It is totally wrong
to rely only on the forward collision warning system to ensure
driving safety!
109
Hill-start Assist System

The hill-start assist system can generate the driving brake force before the vehicle
starts to brake the wheels to prevent the vehicle from sliding when starting on the
ramp.
The driver can activate the hill-start assist system by following these steps: 5
-Confirm that the following conditions are met:
Engine started/no air pressure alarm on instrument/vehicle stationary/parking
brake released.
- Depress the brake pedal;
-Press the hill-start enable switch ⑤, the hill-start assist function is activated, and
the indicator ⑥ lights up;
-Release the brake pedal, the hill-start assist system will automatically keep the
brake pressure at the same value when the driver stepped on the brake pedal, and
the vehicle will remain stationary;
- Step on the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will start smoothly.
When the hill-start assist system is activated, after the driver releases the brake
pedal, the brake pressure will be held for a maximum of 2.2 s , after which the
brake pressure will be gradually released.
Engine oil pressure (x0.16

MPa)
Air pressure (x0.1 MPa)
110
The hill-start assist function will exit if any of the following situations exists:
- Engine flameout;
-Power off the vehicle;
-Air pressure alarm on the Instrument;
-The vehicle is not stationary;
- Apply the parking brake;
-Turn off the enable switch of the hill-start assist system;
-It takes the driver a long time to wait for the vehicle to start after the brake pedal is
released.
After the vehicle is powered on, the hill-start assist system is turned off by default, and
you can activate this function by operating the rocker switch . It is automatically turned
off after the current operation is completed, and needs to be activated by pressing the
switch again next time. Before the brake pressure is gradually released, the ramp start
assistance symbol displayed on the instrument will flash, accompanied by a "tick-tick"
alarm sound.
Warning!
-On icy and snowy roads, the vehicle may be sliding even if the driver
activates the hill-start assist system. Therefore, the use of a hill-start
assist system on ice and snow roads is strictly prohibited.
-The hill-start assist system is only a driver assistance system. Before
the vehicle starts, the driver should fully understand the surroundings
of the vehicle and take full responsibility for the safety of the vehicle.
111
Warning!
The setting of intelligent driving assistance system depends on
the system configuration of the OEM vehicle, including but not
limited to the engine, gearbox, retarder, braking system,
electric system and other major assemblies. Users are not
allowed to refit the OEM vehicle, including but not limited to
changing the assembly and upperstructure restructuring of the
original vehicle, otherwise the performance of the system will
be seriously affected, resulting in serious consequences!
112
Braking system
Braking system
Brake placard
The brake plate is located at the side door frame on the copilot side, under the
vehicle nameplate. The label indicates the rated operating pressure and
braking response time of the air cylinder, A is 0.55 s, B is 0.35 s.
Rated operating pressure of

air reservoir
113
Braking system
Braking system function:

- Service braking
-Parking brake and emergency braking
- Auxiliary braking
-Trailer braking (for tractors)
The service braking is a two-circuit air pressure brake, and is independent of
the parking brake control device. The parking brake enables the vehicle to park
securely on a certain ramp even without a driver. The emergency braking and
the parking brake control devices can be shared.
Warning!
Drivers should drive carefully. You should constantly adjust
your driving to adapt to different road conditions and traffic
conditions, especially when you drive on slippery or
extremely poor road sections.
114
Braking system
Braking system function check

When the key switch is turned on, the functions of the braking system are
automatically activated.
Braking system fault display
When the braking system fails, the fault alarm light of the braking system on
the instrument panel lights up, accompanied by buzzer.
Warning!
-When the braking system fails, the driving and braking
performance of the vehicle will change. Service braking or
emergency braking should be used to stop the vehicle safely,
and seek help from the SINOTRUK service station. The vehicle
can continue driving after troubleshooting.
115
Braking system
Air pressure display

The barometer shows the air pressure of brake circuit ① and brake circuit ②
respectively.
Warning!
-If the air pressure is too low (lower than 0.55 MPa), the alarm
lamp will be on. The vehicle can not be started until the
warning lamp goes out and the warning message disappears.
-After starting, test the braking function (service braking and
parking brake) as soon as possible on a dry road in good
conditions!
-Ensure that there is no foreign matter in the pedal control
area.
1 2
116
Braking system
Antilock Braking System (ABS) Electronic

controller
ABS is the abbreviation of "Antilock Braking System" in English, which means
a system that can prevent the wheel from locking up during braking.
Gear ring and
Even during emergency braking, ABS can still maintain the steering ability and sensors-
directional stability of the vehicle. Regardless of the road conditions, the brake ABS solenoid
pedal should be pressed to the bottom to ensure the shortest braking valve
distance.
Warning!
-ABS does not work when driving at low speed.
-ABS cannot compensate for driving errors (if the safe
distance from the front vehicle is too short, the speed is too
high or turning without slowing down, etc.), so be careful
when driving.
Brake
-When the ABS fails, the wheel may lock up during braking
and the brake force may become smaller.
When the key switch is turned on, the ABS starts automatically.
When the ABS indicator of the main vehicle is always on, it indicates that the
ABS is faulty and SINOTRUK service station should be contacted for handling.
For ABS inspection and maintenance, please refer to the ABS supplier's
technical data.
117
Braking system
When towing semitrailers with ABS

When the key switch is turned on, the trailer ABS starts automatically.
The ABS of the trailer has independent ECU, powered by the main vehicle,
and displays the status of the trailer ABS through the instrument display of the
main vehicle .
When the ABS indicator of the trailer is on, it indicates that the ABS of the
trailer is faulty. See "Information Displayed on the Driver Display and Detector
Lamp Panel" for details.
118
Braking system
Parking brake
Parking brake plus emergency braking function. Make the energy storage
spring brake chamber function by manipulating the hand brake valve handle
① to realize the parking brake. When the service braking system has leakage
and other faults, the parking brake can be used to achieve emergency braking.
The hand brake valve is installed at the instrument panel. Only when the
braking system pressure is higher than 0.55 MPa and the parking brake signal
light is extinguished, the parking brake can be fully release and the vehicle can
start by operating the hand brake valve.
Warning!
1
- Be sure to apply the parking brake when parking! If
necessary, a parking wedge can be used to prevent sliding.
-Never drive the car until the parking brake signal light goes
out!
-Before starting the engine, the hand brake valve handle shall
be placed in the braking position. Otherwise, the original
parking brake will be released when the brake pressure is
raised!
119
Braking system
Apply the parking brake

Pull the handle ① back until it is locked, and the parking brake indicator ②
lights up. The parking brake is now fully locked.
Partial braking
Pull the handle back gradually and keep it in the desired position, otherwise it
will automatically spring back to the release position. At this time, the parking
brake Indicator ② on the instrument panel lights up.
If the parking brake control handle is not placed in the complete braking
position, the control handle may automatically return to the release position. In
this case, the vehicle may be partial braked and slippage may occur.
1
Release the parking brake

Release the handle buckle latch, and the handle will automatically return to the
2 release position, and the parking brake Indicator ② will go out.
The air cylinder pressure shall be at least 0.55 MPa to ensure the parking
brake is completely released. If the air pressure is lower than this value, the
low air pressure fault indicator on the instrument panel will light up.
120
Braking system
Parking brake test position

The test position is used to test whether the brake force of the energy storage
spring brake chamber of the tractor is sufficient to park the traction train on the
slope.
Test methods
• Pull up the parking braking handle ①.
• Continue to pull back the handle ① to the test position. The trailer braking
handle ② is placed in the release position, and the train only relies on the
brake force of the energy storage spring brake chamber of the tractor for
parking brake.
2
1
Warning!
- The traction train may be sliding during the test.
- If not considering the above clauses, a parking wedge is
ususlaly used to block the wheel under regulatory
requirements.
-Before reliably blocking the wheels of the traction train with
wedges, there is a danger of accidents when checking the
braking performance of the energy storage spring brake
chamber!
121
Braking system
Auxiliary braking device

Exhaust brake
Rotate the exhaust brake switch ① , when the following conditions are met,
the vehicle will implement exhaust brake:
1
-The clutch pedal is not depressed;
- Release the accelerator pedal; Non-neutral
- The engine speed is above 1700 rpm.
- Only the Weichai engine above 9 liters has larger brake force when the
in-cylinder braking is implemented at the II gear, and the braking effects of the
exhaust brake switch of other engine models are the same at gears I and II.
Exhaust brake is available to slow down in advance while meeting, passing
poor road sections, etc. The use of exhaust brake can reduce the use of
service braking, reduce the wear and heat of the tire and wheel brake, reduce
fuel consumption, and improve driving safety.
Warning!
- Use exhaust brake with caution on wet, dirty, or icy roads, and
the vehicle has the danger of driving slippage!
- When going down a long slope, exhaust brake should be used
in gear position, and neutral position can't play an auxiliary
braking role.
- The engine speed shall not be higher than 2400 rpm when
using the exhaust brake.
- Exhaust brake is an auxiliary braking device, not a braking
device of the vehicle. So it cannot replace the service braking
system of the vehicle. To stop the vehicle completely, the
service braking, that is, foot brake, shall be applied.
122
Braking system
Trailer braking (for tractors)

Pull back the trailer braking handle ② slowly, and the trailer braking will work.
When the handle is released, the handle will automatically spring back to the
initial position and trailer braking will be released.
DANGER!
- Be very careful when using trailer braking!
- If the trailer used does not have ABS, its wheels will lock up,
resulting in loss of directional stability.
- If you only use trailer braking, the trailer braking may
2
overheat. The brake power may be reduced and cause serious
accidents.
123
Braking system
Daily precautions for the braking system

Gas charging adapter
Gas charging adapter ① is located at the air cylinder and is used to connect
the air pressure in the detection brake line of the external test instrument.
By screwing the gas charging adapter onto the gas charge hose, you can
either inflate the tire ro inflate the brake system of the vehicle.
1
124
Braking system
Auxiliary gas module

The auxiliary gas module is installed on the frame. Pickup can be achieved by
unscrewing the place showed in figure ② or any plug and using the quick
connector equipped
Warning!
Ferrule fitting is not allowed here.
125
Braking system
Protective measures for brake lines

Warning!
The following requirements shall be observed when welding,
cutting or drilling near nylon tubes for brakes:
- Release the air pressure in the pipeline first.
-Cover the pipeline to avoid damage from sparks, flames, and
scorching swarf.
- The maximum allowable temperature of a non-pressure
pipe is 130 ℃, and the maximum duration shall not exceed 1
hour.
Caution!
○
i - During the cleaning and maintenance of the vehicle, do not
direct the water flow to the brake line, joints, seals, etc. when
spraying water. Regularly check the tightness of the
compressed air braking system and check whether the
pipeline leaks air; Replace the pipeline if bending, friction
mark, pit or other components damage are found on the
pipeline.
-Check the compressed air pipeline frequently for corrosion.
126
Braking system
Check the air cylinder for moisture and drain the moisture (if any)
When the car stops, pull the manual water drain valve pull ring ① at the lower
part of the air cylinder sideways to remove the condensed water in the air
cylinder.
It is recommended to check the air cylinder farthest from the air dryer every
day. If oil water mixture is discharged from the water drain valve, it means that
the air dryer has failed, and the drying chamber on the upper part of the air
dryer shall be replaced immediately. 1
The drying chamber on the upper part of the air dryer shall be replaced at least
every 2 years (replacement before winter is recommended).
Warning!
After parking in cold areas in winter, all air cylinders shall be
emptied to prevent the brake valve from seizing-up and 1
affecting the braking effect.
127
Braking system
Inspection of brake pedal stroke

Free stroke of the brake pedal: 20 mm-30 mm.
The working pressure is 1.0 Mpa, and the cut-out pressure of the pressure
regulating valve built in the dryer is 1.0 Mpa. Once the pressure of an air
cylinder drops below 0.55 MPa, the air cylinder pressure indicator light will be
on. At this moment, stop the vehicle immediately and find out the reason for the
pressure drop to ensure safe driving.
In a short period of time, full-stroke brake is carried out for many times
continuously, which may also cause the pressure to drop below 0.55 MPa.
Check the free stroke of the brake pedal
Gently step on the brake pedal to check the free stroke of the brake pedal, and
the brake pedal shall be fully stepped without unsmoothness.
128
Braking system
Warning!
- Use retarder with caution on slippery roads. The vehicle has a
danger of slippage! If the retarder is used, it should be operated
step by step, and the retarder function should be turned off in
bad road conditions.
- When the vehicle is running without load, use the retarder
with caution!
- Retarder is an auxiliary braking device. In case of emergency,
please use service braking (foot brake) to slow down.
-Under low temperature conditions, the braking effect will be
delayed when the retarder is used for the first time after the
vehicle starts. Service braking can be used if required.
-The retarder function has only a weak effect at low speed. If
necessary, service braking should be used.
- It is forbidden to use retarder when the transmission is in
Neutral.
-When ABS works, the retarder function is automatically turned
off
-If you want to stop the car, you should use service braking.
- If the retarder fails, the exhaust brake and service braking
shall be used to control the driving speed of the vehicle.
-The retarder braking function cannot replace the parking brake,
which shall be implemented before you leave the vehicle.
-If the coolant is insufficient, do not start the vehicle, otherwise
the retarder and gearbox may be damaged.
129
Air conditioning system

Warning!
-Refrigerant is R134 a and refill capacity is 650±10 grams.
- In case of loss of system lubricating oil, an appropriate amount of lubricating oil specified by the compressor
manufacturer shall be added.
- Maintenance of the air conditioning system and refrigerant filling shall be performed by professional maintenance
personnel.
-It is strictly forbidden to wash the front wall of the cab when the air conditioning system is in outer circulation state.
-The air conditioner shall run 1~2 times a month to ensure reliable sealing and lubrication of the compressor.
130
Composition of control panel
Temperature Temperature Defrost Face blowing Refrigeration Air volume Air volume
knob display display display display display knob
Auto key Switch key Inner Blow Mode key Automatic Defrost key Maximum Refrigeration
circulation feet display refrigeration key key
131
Panel operation instructions

Serial
Key Function Function description
No.
•Each time you press to switch the status, the air outlet mode is switched among "blow face →
Change the blowing
1 blow face/blow feet → blow feet→ blow feet and defrost → defrosting → blow face", and the
mode
MODE key current air outlet mode set for the system is displayed on the screen in real time.
•Rotate the air volume knob clockwise once to increase the air volume by 1 gear, and the
maximum gear shall be Gear 8; Rotate the air volume knob counterclockwise once to reduce the
air volume by one gear. The current set air volume is displayed on the screen in real time.
2 Adjust the air volume
•Turn the air volume knob clockwise in the poweroff state to exit the poweroff state and enter the
manual state. AC request, internal and outer circulation, air outlet mode, air volume and
Air volumn regulation temperature return to the state before poweroff.
knob
•When the temperature knob is turned on in power-on state, the set temperature on the screen
will increase or decrease accordingly.
•Turn the temperature knob clockwise once, and the set temperature increases by 0.5
Adjust the degrees/time, with a maximum of 28 degrees. After 28 degrees, rotate it clockwise once to display
3 the forced heating HI. The air door runs to full heat and the air volume is 8 gears. The screen
temperature
displays the current setting status in real time; Turn the temperature knob counterclockwise once,
Temperature and the set temperature decreases by 0.5 degrees/time, with a minimum of 18 degrees. After 18
adjustment knob degrees, press again to display the forced cooling LO. The air volume is 8 gears and the AC
request is sent at the same time. The screen displays the current setting status in real time.
•Press the cycle key, and the inner and outer circulation ventilation doors will switch between
4 Press the cycle key "inner circulation → outer circulation → inner circulation", and the screen displays the current
setting state in real-time.
Cycle key
5 •Press the Defrost button to enter the defrosting state. The air volume is at gear 8 by default, with
Switch to forced outer circulation. The air outlet mode is defrosting. Press the defrosting button again to exit the
defrosting defrosting and return to the previous state.
Defrost key
132
Serial
Key Function Description
No.
•Press the AC button in the off state, the AC icon will be displayed on the panel startup screen, and
the compressor will start to work when the AC working indicator lights up.
Turn on/ off the •Press the AC key in the power-on state, switch the AC state once, and pressing the AC key
6 air-conditioning
several times in succession will automatically delay the panel for 10 seconds.
AC key compressor
When the compressor is shut down under the frosting protection of evaporator, the icon shall be
automatically extinguished or restored;
•Press the A/CMAX key, the indicators of this key and AC key shall be lit up, and the working state
will be the maximum airflow rate, inner circulation, blow face mode, and the temperature shall be
7 Press the AC max key
LO by default. During this period, if any of the following operations is performed, the indicator of this
key shall go out.
AC max key
•Press the automatic key to enter the automatic control state. The AC request, air volume, air outlet
Switch to AUTO mode, temperature and internal and outer circulation are controlled by the automatic mode, and the
8 screen displays the current state and set temperature in real time.
operating mode
AUTO key
•Press the AUTO key in the power-off state to exit the power off state and enter the power-on state.
•In the power-on state, press the ON/OFF key to enter the power-off state. There is no display on
the screen, and the compressor, blower, water valve actuator, inner and outer circulation dampers
and mode actuator all stop working. The action being performed by the actuator must be
9 Press the ON/OFF key completed.
•In the shutdown state, press the on/off key, then the panel will execute the mode before the last
shutdown.
ON/OFF key
133
Self-inspection and fault codes of A/C control system Definition of fault codes
Self-test conditions 00 Normal
Press the mode key and internal and outer circulation key at the
01 Blower fault
same time for 5 seconds and then the control panel enters the
self-test program. 02 Internal/external circulation motor fault
Self-test content: fault information will be displayed after each 03 Mode motor fault
actuator is automatically operated once. The actuator operates in
the following sequence: 04 Heating/cooling motor fault
a) First, display the full screen (all symbols need to be displayed Temperature sensor for the evaporator fails (short circuit,
shall be displayed); b). Blow face, inner circulation, wind speed at 05
disconnection)
Gear 1;
06 Interior temperature sensor fails (short circuit, disconnection)
c). Blow face/blow feet, outer circulation, full-cool mixed wind, and
wind speed raised to gear 3; d). Blow feet, outer circulation, wind 07 Exterior temperature sensor fails (short circuit, disconnection)
speed raised to the maximum gear, and full-hot mixed wind; e)
Display the fault code; f) Automatically exit the self-inspection 08 High/low-pressure switch fault
program. 09 CAN communication fault
The display time of each item shall not be less than 1.5 S, and the
displayed speeds shall be uniform and consistent for easy
observation.
134
Repair and maintenance

Regular maintenance items and time of air conditioner
Maintenance
Parts for maintenance Maintenance items
period
Observe from the view mirror whether the refrigerant is sufficient and supplement it as
Refrigerant needed. Every day
Receiver-drier Water absorption performance is reduced, replace Yearly
Rubber hose Whether it is aged or cracked, replace it if necessary Monthly
Pipeline joint Whether there is leakage or oil stain, fasten Monthly
Expansion valve Check whether the action is normal, otherwise make adjustment or replacement Yearly
Frozen engine oil Whether it is sufficient or polluted, supplement or change if necessary Every half year
Belt Tension, wear or not, replace it if necessary Monthly
Check whether it is loose or damaged, and if necessary, disassemble, check or reassemble

Fastening bolt it Weekly
Evaporator Cleaning and decontamination Every half year
Condenser Cleaning and decontamination Weekly
Outer circulation filter screen of the air

conditioner Cleaning and decontamination Weekly
Air conditioning harness Whether the connector is firm and normal Monthly
135
Fault diagnosis and troubleshooting list

Fault Possible causes Solution
System leakage Leak detection and repair
High-pressure valve fault Replace
The air return valve is closed Open
1 High pressure is low Lack of refrigerant Add refrigerant
The receiver-drier is blocked. Replace
Leakage of air return valve of compressor Change valve
Damage of compressor leaf valve Replace
There is air in the system Reinjection of refrigerant
The condenser is blocked. Clean the condenser

2 High pressure is high
The exhaust valve is closed Open
Excess refrigerant in the system Discharge the excessive refrigerant
Lack of refrigerant Add refrigerant
The compressor piston wears Repair it

3 Low back pressure
Leakage of compressor cylinder gasket Replace the cylinder gasket
The hose is kinked or squashed Replace the hose
136
Leakage of air return valve of compressor Replace the valve plate
There is moisture in the system Replace the dryer
The filter screen of the expansion valve was blocked Clean and replace drying chamber
by impurities
Damage of compressor leaf valve Replace
4 High back pressure The temperature sensing bag of the expansion valve Tighten the fixing clip of the temperature sensing bag
was loose
Excess refrigerant in the system Discharge the excessive refrigerant
The expansion valve opens only Replace the expansion valve
The compressor plate spring is damaged Replace the leaf valve
Leakage of compressor cylinder gasket Replace the cylinder gasket
The drive belt is damaged Replace the belt
Damaged clutch conductor Replace the conductor
The compressor piston is damaged Replace the compressor

5 The compressor does not work
Fault of the thermostatic switch Replace thermostatic switch
Clutch coil damaged Replace the coil
Pressure valve fault Replace the pressure valve
137
The coil is frozen, and the temperature setting value Screw down the thermostatic switch to defrost it
is too high
The hot water valve is not closed tightly Close hot water valve
The receiver-drier is blocked. Replace
Lack of refrigerant Add refrigerant
Defrosting temperature sensor fault Replace

6 Poor cooling effect
High pressure is slightly higher Reference 2
The back pressure is slightly low Reference 3
The back pressure is slightly high Reference 4
Dryer blocked Clean and replace the dryer
Expansion valve fault Replace the expansion valve
Fault of the thermostatic switch Replace thermostatic switch
Improper adjustment of the thermostatic switch Adjust to working conditions

7 Evaporator coil freezing Insufficient amount of air passing through the Check the evaporator blower
evaporator
Pulley not centring Adjust the axial position of the pulley
8 8 Belt fault Belt too tight or too loose Adjust it correctly
Idler bearing damage Replace the bearing
Joint leakage Repair or replacement

9 Leakage of the hose or joint
Hose leakage Replace the hose
138
Independent heater system

The independent heater system is optional.
An independent air heater system heats and insulates the cab, as well as
defrosts the windshield. The system is not affected by the engine, and the
main battery switch of the vehicle needs to be turned on when using it.
Descriptions of the functions of control panel

Heater switch
1 2 3 4
Air supply switch
Temperature - gear
Temperature + gear
139
Caution!
○
Start the heater - When the heater is put into use for the first time in
Heating mode
• Press the heating mode key ① to start the heating mode, and
i the heating operation mode, there may be a situation
that the air outlet of the heater blows natural wind
instead of hot wind. This is not a system failure, but
because the oil pump needs to exhaust the air in the
the screen displays t he status. oil pipe to supply oil to the heater. At this time, it is
only necessary to wait for the heater to be
The required temperature can be adjusted through the temperature automatically turned off, and then start the heater in
adjustment keys ③ and ④. the heating operation mode again. According to the
• Temperature adjustment knob vehicle type and configuration, start the heater
-Minimum setting of 16°C: small heat several times in the above way until the heater is in
normal operation.
-Maximum setting about 40 ℃: large heat
- When using the heater for the first time, it may give
Ventilation mode off an odor in a short time. This is normal if the
Press the ventilation mode key ③ to start the ventilation mode, heater begins to operate for a few minutes, but does
not indicate that the heater is out of function.
and the screen displays the status -After the heater is turned off, the Indicator goes out,
The temperature regulation does not function in ventilation mode. and the fuel conveying function stops, but the fan
needs to be cooled and run for about 4 minutes and
Close the heater then stops working.
When the controller is running, press the button ① to turn off the -For the air circulation during the heater operation,
heater, and the heating or ventilation operation ends. items shall not be stored around the heater, so the
heater can be regularly used.
-When leaving for a long time, please turn off the
heater to avoid wasting battery power.
- If it is necessary to turn off the main power supply
of the whole vehicle during the use of the heater,
please turn off the heater first, and then turn off the
total power supply after the heater stops cooling the
fan, so as not to damage the heater
140
DANGER!
-Danger of fire, explosion, poisoning and injury.
-Do not use the heater in a closed room such as a garage or
parking building.
-During heating operation, all components and parts of the exhaust
gas discharge device are at a high temperature. Do not work in the
area where the exhaust gas guide device is located. When it is
necessary to operate, the heater shall be turned off first until all
parts of it are cooled down, and protective gloves shall be worn if
necessary.
-The heater shall be turned off until all parts of it are cooled down
before operations can be performed on it.
-Exhaust gases must not be inhaled.
-Be careful when using fuel.
- The car engine and heater shall be turned off before oil filling and
when refueling.
-Avoid open flame when using fuel.
-Fuel vapors must not be inhaled.
- For vehicles transporting hazardous articles (such as oil trucks),
the heater should be closed before driving the vehicle into the
dangerous area (refinery, gas station, etc.).
141
When the heater does not start after power on (not the first start):
• Power off and power on again.
• If the heater still does not start, check:
-Is there any fuel in the fuel tank.
-Whether the fuse is normal.
- Whether the circuit, connection and connector are in good condition.
- Check whether the heating air guide, combustion air guide or exhaust emission
device are blocked.
Maintenance
• In addition to the heating period, the heater shall also be turned on for about 10
minutes each month.
• Before the heating period comes, the heater should be put into trial operation. In
case of thick smoke for a long time, abnormal burning sound, obvious smell of fuel
or overheating of electrical/electronic components, turn off the heater, remove the
fuse, and immediately contact the maintenance personnel of SINOTRUK service
station for inspection.
• After a long period of inactivity, you should check the openings of the heating air
duct, combustion air supply pipe and exhaust gas discharge pipe to ensure that
they are clean.
142
Parking air conditioning system

• If the vehicle is equipped with a parking air conditioner optionally, wake up the
control panel in the shutdown state, press and hold the key for 3 s to enter the
parking air conditioner mode, or use the remote control to wake up the control
panel.
Instructions for use
Caution!
○
i - Do not turn off all air outlets of the air conditioner at the same
time, to avoid freezing inside the air conditioner.
- When used for the first time, it may have slight peculiar odor. The
odor is generated during the manufacturing of air conditioners,
and will disappear quickly after initial operation.
Caution!
○
i -The equipment can lower the temperature in the vehicle to a
certain extent. The actual cooling temperature is affected by the
vehicle type, the outside temperature and the cooling capacity of
the equipment you use.
-The system is equipped with a battery monitor. If the system is
still running after the car is shut down, the system will
automatically shut down when the power supply voltage is lower
than the set voltage.
143
Fault prompt on the control panel

If the air conditioner fails, the "E" fault icon on the control panel lights up
Ask for help from SINOTRUK service stations immediately.
Caution!
○
i - Beware of damage.
- Never clean the air conditioner with a high-pressure washer.
- Never use sharp and hard objects or cleaning agent for
cleaning, as these may damage the air conditioner.
- For cleaning, use water and mild cleaner. Do not use gasoline,
diesel or solvent.
- Clean the bottom-mounted air conditioner housing and the
air splitter box with a damp cloth regularly.
- Remove leaves and other dirt from the air conditioning
ventilation grille regularly. Make sure that the air conditioning
grille is not damaged during this process.
- Regularly clean the remote control with a slightly wet cloth. It
is recommended to clean the display with a glass cleaning
cloth.
144
Suggestions for improving the using effects of equipment

This parking air conditioning system is the refrigeration equipment specially
developed for in-car refrigeration. You can use this device during driving, but it
cannot replace the engine-driven in-car air conditioning system.
For efficient use of this equipment, please observe the following operating
instructions.
Suggestion for use:
• Park the vehicle in the shade as much as possible.
• Cover the vehicle with a body cover when the vehicle is not in use.
• If there is no air conditioning system in your car, please keep the car in a good
ventilation environment before using the equipment. You need to cool the car
before using this equipment.
• Close the door and window when using the device.
• All heat source must be eliminated from the vehicle.
• Reduce the devices using power supply in the vehicle and extend the operation
time of the equipment as much as possible.
• Select the appropriate temperature and operating mode.
• Ensure that no foreign objects such as cloth and paper block the air outlet and
return grille.
145
• Strictly follow the instructions below to operate:

-If you want the exterior color of this device to match the color of the vehicle body,
paint only on the top of the housing of this device. Please remove the top of the
equipment and paint it. Please use light colored paint.
- Clean the body regularly, because dust will make the cab heat up faster.
- Ensure that the performance of this equipment is not disturbed by other heat
source. For example: (Heat generated by refrigeration equipment).
Caution!
- The installation and maintenance of the overhead parking air
○
i conditioner should only be carried out by qualified personnel
who are familiar with the risks and relevant regulations
involved in the refrigerant and air conditioning system.
-Improper maintenance may lead to serious hazards. For repair
services, please contact after-sales personnel.
• Keep electrical equipment out of the reach of children or the infirm. It is

prohibited to use electrical equipment without supervision.
• Those who are unable to use the equipment safely due to insufficient physical,
sensory, or mental abilities, or lack of experience and knowledge shall not
use the equipment without supervision or guidance.
• In case of fire, do not open the upper cover of the overhead parking air
conditioner. Use an approved fire extinguishing agent. Do not use water to
extinguish the fire.
146
Caution!
○
i -Only the automatic car washer is allowed to be used to clean the air
conditioner.
-Please turn off the power of air condition before the vehicle cab is
tilted for maintenance.
-Please turn off the power of the air conditioner before cleaning the
body with automatic car washing equipment such as automatic car
washer.
-Do not use water torch to flush the equipment to avoid damage to
the body.
147
Regular maintenance items and time of air conditioner
Maintenance
Parts for maintenance Maintenance items
period
Observe from the view mirror whether the refrigerant is sufficient and supplement it as
Refrigerant Every day
needed.
Receiver-drier Water absorption performance is reduced, replace Yearly
Rubber hose Whether it is aged or cracked, replace it if necessary Monthly
Pipeline joint Whether there is leakage or oil stain, fasten Monthly
Expansion valve Check whether the action is normal, otherwise make adjustment or replacement Yearly
Frozen engine oil Whether it is sufficient or polluted, supplement or change if necessary Every half year
Belt Tension, wear or not, replace it if necessary Monthly
Check whether it is loose or damaged, and if necessary, disassemble, check or reassemble

Fastening bolt Weekly
it
Evaporator Cleaning and decontamination Every half year
Condenser Cleaning and decontamination Weekly
Outer circulation filter screen of the air

Cleaning and decontamination Weekly
conditioner
Air conditioner filter element Cleaning and decontamination Yearly
Air conditioning harness Whether the connector is firm and normal Monthly
148
Cab tilting mechanism

Cab manual/electric tilting and lifting system
① Manual hydraulic pump (electric) 1 6
② Switch assembly
③ Reversing lever
④ Rocker arm 4
⑤ Motor
⑥ Oil plug
⑦ Crowbar
3
⑧ Socket
2
5
Caution!
○
The hydraulic manual oil pump is located on the rear fender
i Bracket, and the specific position of the hydraulic manual oil
pump varies slightly from model to model.
149
Warning!
-The reversing lever ③ can be pulled only when the cab is
turned over. In other conditions (including driving, oil filling,
etc.), the reversing lever shall be kept pointing to the "driving"
position.
- To ensure safety, there shall be no obstacle in the turning
area in front of the cab.
- When the cab is turned over, personnel shall not enter the
place between the cab and the chassis.
- The cab shall be turned in place before operation.
Preparation before turnover

• Park the vehicle on a flat and solid ground without affecting the passage of
other vehicles.
• Apply the parking brake.
• Place the gearshift lever in Neutral.
• Shut off the engine.
• Secure loose objects in the cab.
• Make sure the storage box is emptied.
• Close the cab door.
150
Cab turnover operation

• Pull the front hatch handle ⑩ and open the radiator grille ⑨.
• Press the lifting rocker switch ⑪ (only for electric lifting) to close the door.
• Turn the reversing lever to the "lifting" position, and use the crowbar to shake
the oil pump to flip the cab into place.
11
10
151
Cab return
• Pull the reversing lever ③ to the "driving" position, shake the oil pump and
press the electric lifting rocker switch (only for electric lifting) to make the cab
return to its position.
Warning!
As the oil cylinder has the feature of automatic falling back at
the end point of falling back, when the lockpin is 60~120 mm
from the latch hook, the cab will fall back automatically.
• When the cab falls, the rubber bellows ⑫ shall be tightly attached to the
lower air inlet to prevent the dust from entering.
• Close the radiator grille ⑨.
12
152
The regulations on the use of hydraulic oil for the cab tilting and lifting oil pump are shown in the following table:
Quality grade and Mileage or time between two
Assembly Oil name Oil and oil quantity Remarks
viscidity grade oil changes
Check the fuel level every half a

Cab tilting Hydraulic oil in the No.10 aviation hydraulic
930ml year, refuel as needed, and
mechanism lifting pump fluid
there is no need to change.
153
Chapter II Preparation for Driving
154
Overview of inspection and maintenance
Overview of inspection and maintenance Monthly:

Before starting the engine, the following checks shall be • Steering System: steering fluid level
made:
• Clutch system: brake fluid level
• Poly V-belt: status (see related content in Chapter 5)
Daily:
• EGR system: check the water route and air route of the EGR
• Engine: oil level system
• Cooling system: coolant level
• Light and signal system: function (refer to related content in Every six months:
Chapter 1)
• Cab tilting mechanism: oil level height (see related content in
• Seat belt: status and function (refer to related content in Chapter Chapter I)
1)
• Oil tank: drainage
• Cab tilting system: status (refer torelated content in Chapter 1) If the vehicle is equipped with special-purpose equipment, the
• Fuel/ fuel gas: Fuel quantity/ fuel gas quantity required inspection items may not be listed above.
• Adblue: adblue quantity (see related content in Chapter 1) Note:
• Tow device and bolster: functions, connecting line and cable (see 1) : The inspection frequency shall be appropriately increased
related content in Chapter 3) according to the local climate, use and driving conditions.
• Driver's tool 2): New vehicles shall be inspected every day.
Weekly:
• Tire: air pressure and condition
• Wheel nut: whether it is fastened and fitted 1) 2)
• Windshield washer: washer fluid level, winter adaptability,
function
• Fuel coarse filter: drainage 1) (See the related content in Chapter
4)
• Visual inspection for leakage: engine, gearbox, transfer case,
drive axle, steering mechanism, heater and hydraulic tilting
system
155
Overview of inspection and maintenance
Inspection after starting engine
Daily:
• Engine: oil pressure
• Braking system: functioning normally and effectively
• Steering system: check whether the operation is normal
• Air suspension system: whether the vehicle is tilting
Weekly:
• Air suspension system: check the compressed airbag
Monthly:
• Air dryer: function 1)
If the vehicle is equipped with special-purpose equipment, the required

inspection items may not be listed above.
Note: 1) : The inspection frequency shall be appropriately increased according

to the local climate, use and driving conditions.
156
Inspection and maintenance before starting the engine

Open the radiator grille
Caution!
○
i The wipers shall be in the returned state before opening the
radiator grille.
• Pull the releasing device ① of the radiator grille to release the locking
device of the radiator grille.
• Lift the radiator grille ② to open it with the assist of two pneumatic springs
③ and fix it in the final position.
1
Close the radiator grille

• Pull the radiator grille ② downward along the front edge of the radiator grille
• Gently close the radiator griller ② so that you can hear that the lock device
④ is engaged. 2
157

3 Inspection and maintenance points
After opening the radiator grille, the following inspection and
1 maintenance parts can be seen:
① Coolant filler
② Oil level gauge
③ Clutch hydraulic oil reservoir filler
④ Filler of cleanout fluid for the windshield
158

1
Warning!
The site shall be thoroughly inspected and cleaned before
inspection and maintenance!
Before starting the engine, check daily:

Engine oil
Stop the vehicle on a level road, and turn off the engine for 20 minutes before
checking the oil level.
Pull out the oil level gauge ①, wipe it with a clean lint-free cloth, insert it back
into the pipe of oil level gauge, then pull out the oil level gauge again. The
engine oil level shall be between the maximum and minimum marks of the
dipstick, not lower than the minimum scale. Engine oil should be added when
Engine oil
the oil level is determined to be low after multiple inspections.
Warning!
Do not fill engine oil above the maximum scale. Too much
engine oil can damage the engine!
Maximum
Minimum
159
Fill the engine oil

• Turn off the key switch.
Warning!
- Beware of damaging the engine!
- Only the engine oil certified by SINOTRUK can be used.
-Do not overfill the engine oil!
1
• About tilting the cab, refer to “cab tilting mechanism”.

• Unscrew the filler cap ①.
• Fill in engine oil.
• Tighten the filler cap.
160
Cooling system (checked daily)

Water level sensor alarm
If the key switch is turned to the ON position when the liquid level is lower than
the MIN line by a certain value (lasting 20 s), the alarm will be activated, and
the low coolant level alarm lamp ① on the instrument panel will be on; If the
alarm still exists after engine operation, the buzzer alarm will be activated for
10s.
161
Coolant level inspection

• The vehicle should be parked on a level road, with the radiator grille open.
• Observe the liquid level of the expansion tank, and the coolant level shall be
located between the high and low marks on the side of the expansion tank.
1 Coolant filling
① Filler cap ② Pressure limiter valve
1 2 • Slowly rotate the filler cap ① half a turn counterclockwise to release the
cooling system pressure and remove the filler cap.
• Turn the heater temperature adjustment button switch to the maximum
heater position.
• Fill the coolant to MAX.
• Put on the filler cap and tighten it.
• Run the engine for a period of time.
• Check the liquid level of the coolant, and refill the coolant if necessary.
Caution!
○
i
The pressure limiter valve shall be replaced as soon as
possible once any damage is found; The vehicle shall be
replaced with a new pressure limiter valve after driving for
500,000 km or 3 years (whichever comes first).
162
The cooling system adopts a closed forced water-cooling system and uses a
long-term coolant.
Warning!
-The coolant is toxic, so avoid inhalating it into human body
when using, storing and preparing it.
- It is not allowed to open the filler cap immediately after the
engine stops running, so as not to be burned by internal
high-temperature pressure gas.
- If the coolant is greatly reduced during the use of the vehicle,
resulting in the overheating of the whole system, the coolant
shall not be filled immediately at this time, otherwise the
engine will be damaged by the sudden change of coolant
temperature.
Even if there is no anti-freezing requirement in the area where the vehicle is

used (the temperature is above freezing point all year round), it is not allowed
to use water instead of coolant.
Coolant drain
Unscrew the water drain screw plug at the radiator ① to empty the vehicle
coolant; Drain the engine coolant, see the section "Engine maintenance".
163
Fuel (daily inspection)

Warning!
- The diesel is very flammable, beware of fires and explosions.
- After turning off the engine and auxiliary heater, refill the
diesel.
-When filling the oil tank, there shall be 5% expansion space to
prevent the diesel from overflowing after it expands due to
heating.
Check the quantity of fuel

• Turn on the ignition key switch.
• Check the fuel quantity displayed on the fuel gauge; When only little
1 fuel is remaining in the fuel tank, the fuel oil level at ① is low and the
indicator lights up, reminding the driver to fill the fuel in time.
Caution!
○
i -Do not use up the fuel in the fuel tank. Otherwise, the fuel
system needs to be vented.
- Check fuel freeze resistance before winter begins.
164
Before starting the engine, check the following items every Caution!
week:
○
i -The tire pressure shall comply with the regulations,
Tire pressure and condition (weekly inspection) otherwise it will affect the driving speed, safety,
Inspection (cold tire) controllability of the vehicle and the service life of
the tire.
• Check if the air pressure of all tires (including spare tires) is
normal. -If the tire pressure always keeps decreasing, check
whether the tire is embedded with any foreign
• Check the appearance of all tires, tire wear and pattern depth matter and whether there is any leakage at the hub
(according to legal conditions). and the air valve.
• Find the foreign matter embedded in the tire pattern or between - After the vehicle is running at a certain speed, if
the two tires. the tire gets hot, the tire pressure will rise by 1 bar.
• Check the outer surface of the tire for damage. At this time, the tire cannot be deflated. The
pre-charge pressure of the tire varies with the air
Wheel nut (weekly inspection) temperature by approximately 0.2 bar per 10°C. Pay
• Check nut connections. special attention when checking tyres indoors in
• Re-tighten all wheel nuts again according to the specified torque. winter.
165
Windshield washer system/wiper system (weekly check)

It shall be checked weekly or more frequently depending on the climate, use
and driving conditions.
• Open the driver's door.
• Unscrew the cap ①.
• Check the liquid level height in the reservoir.
• Fill in cleanout fluid if required.
1 Antifreeze windshield cleanout fluid shall be added before winter.
• Screw on the cap ① again.
• Check the windshield washer system/wiping system for proper operation.
Check the engine, gearbox, transfer case, drive axle, steering mechanism,
heater and hydraulic tilting system
Check once a week to see if there is leakage. Please go to the SINOTRUK
service station for service if necessary.
166
Before starting the engine, check the following items in sequence every
month:
Steering system (checked monthly)
1 2
Warning!
If the hydraulic oil is reduced due to leakage, the hydraulic
power steering system may fail and the steering of the vehicle
will be very laborious. Drive the car slowly to the nearest
SINOTRUK service station for service immediately.
Check the fluid level

• The vehicle shall be parked on a level road, and the cab shall be overturned.
• Pull out the oil dipstick ① and check the liquid level.
• While the flameout of engine, the liquid level shall be between the MIN and
MAX marks on the dipstick scale.
If the liquid level is too low, fill ATF Ⅲ automatic steering fluid through filler
②.
• Air breather cleaning.
When filling, start the engine and keep it running stably at a low speed. While
replenishing new oil to the oil storage tank, turn the steering wheel to both the
left and right limiting ends and repeat it until there is no air in the oil returned.
Shut down the engine. Add oil until the oil level of the oil storage tank reaches
the position specified above, and screw the cover in place.
167
Clutch system (checked monthly)

Check the liquid level height of the brake fluid
The vehicle shall be parked on a level road. Open the radiator grille of the cab,
and check the liquid level height of the brake fluid in the clutch oil storage tank
②. The liquid level shall be located between the MAX and MIN marks.
If necessary, unscrew the oil storage tank cover ① and add DOT3 brake fluid.
1 Check the clutch system pipeline
Check the clutch system pipeline for leakage of air and liquid.
Check the wear indicator
2 Check the wear indicator ③ to determine whether the clutch driven plate
needs to be replaced (see clutch maintenance section).
DANGER!
If the oil level in the oil tank drops below the MIN mark, the
clutch control device will not work normally.
168
Before starting the engine, check the following items every six months:
Fuel tank drainage
Warning!
During operation, measures shall be taken to avoid
environmental pollution caused by fuel leakage!
1
The sediment and water in the fuel tank shall be removed every 6 months to
avoid damage to the fuel system and engine.
• Place a suitable container under the oil tank;
• Unscrew the screw plug ① of the oil drain port at the bottom of the oil tank
to drain the sediment and water at the bottom of the oil tank;
• Proper disposal of the discharged substances;
• Tighten the screw plug (Tightening torque——34 Nm).
169
Fire extinguisher (optional) (daily inspection)

Check the fire extinguisher to make sure it works properly when necessary.
Refill the fire extinguishing agent or replace with a new fire extinguisher after
each use.
Driver's tool (daily inspection)
Check whether the driver's tools are complete. For example: jack, wheel
wrench, wheel cushion block, tire inflation hose, reflective vest, parking wedge,
warning triangle, etc.
170

Engine oil pressure (daily inspection)
Warning!
- Beware of damaging the engine!
-If ① on the instrument panel lights up, stop the vehicle
immediately and turn off the engine. Find out the cause, check
the oil volume of engine oil, and fill or drain an appropriate
amount of engine oil if necessary to keep the oil level of engine
oil at a proper height.
When the engine is started, the driver display shall not show any of the following
oil pressure alarms.
171
Braking system (inspect daily)

Before driving, check whether the service braking system and parking brake
system work normally.
Warning!
-Do not start the vehicle until the warning message "Braking
System Fault" on the driver's display disappears!
-Listen carefully to check whether there is any sound
indicating that the air dryer is discharging or exhausting!
After the engine is started, do not release parking brake and get ready to start
the vehicle until the air pressure of the system is above 0.55 MPa (5.5 bar), the
warning light is extinguished, and the alarm buzzer stops sounding.
Check the brake pressure
• When the key switch is turned on, the air pressure displayed on the
barometer shall not be lower than 5.5 bar.
• If necessary, start the engine and inflate the braking system until the air dryer
(or pressure regulating valve) is unloaded and vented.
172
Steering system (checked daily)

Check of the steering clearance
• Start the engine and run it at idle speed.
• Turn the steering wheel left and right alternately. The steering wheel angle
required to rotate the front wheel in the left and right directions shall not
exceed 9 ° respectively. If the steering clearance is too large, check the
steering system and steering linkage immediately, and go to the SINOTRUK
service station for service if necessary.
Air suspension system (checked daily)

Check whether the body is inclined
• The body shall not be inclined when the vehicle is parked on a level road
surface after airbag inflation.
• If one airbag is not inflated enough, the other airbags of the axle should be
properly deflated until the axle is level, and then the vehicle should be driven
slowly to the nearest SINOTRUK service station for service.
Check the airbag
• Check all airbags on the front and rear axles for signs of wear, contamination
and aging.
If the air airbag is damaged, go to the SINOTRUK service station to replace it
with a new one.
173
After starting the engine, check the following items every month:
Air dryer
Check whether the air dryer is working properly and effectively once a month
(or check more frequently according to local climatic conditions, use and
driving conditions). Open the water drain valve of the air cylinder to check.
Warning!
-In winter, an ineffective air dryer will cause the braking
system to ice, making the brake ineffective! -When operating
the water drain valve, be careful to protect your eyes and
hands.
During inspection, the braking system shall have sufficient air pressure.
Pull the pull ring ① sideways to check whether there is oil water mixture
discharged, see Chapter 1 "Brake System" for details.
174
Chapter III Driving Vehicles
175
Driving/run-in
Driving/run-in
In the initial driving stage, the run-in of engine and other assembly should be
treated with caution, which is very important for vehicle economy and
reliability.
Warning!
-For new vehicles and vehicles with the tires replaced, the
wheel nut shall be tightened according to the specified torque
after driving for about 50 km.
-At the beginning, the wheel nuts shall be tightened according
to the specified torque every day until the nuts are confirmed to
be tightened.
Before driving for 2,000 km

• The vehicle is in run-in period and should be driven with caution.
• Vehicles should be driven on flat roads in good conditions.
• New cars should not be driven fast with full load, and observe all kinds of
indicators and warning lights with caution.
• Check the transmission, front and rear axles, the hub and the brake disc
frequently, and find out the cause and adjust or repair immediately if any of
them is hot seriously,
During a driving of more than 2000 km
The speed can be increased gradually until the maximum speed or maximum
allowable engine speed is reached. If the assemblies such as axle are
replaced or after the overhaul, drive carefully.
176
Use the vehicle economically
• Do not accelerate before the engine stops, otherwise the fuel

consumption will increase.
Optimizing the working conditions of the vehicle
Economic way of driving
• Regularly go to the SINOTRUK service station for repair and
• Low speed, large load. The economic operating range of the
maintenance. Only vehicles in good conditions can obtain the
turbocharged engine is 50% to 70% of its rated speed and about
best fuel consumption.
80% of its maximum load. Therefore, during normal driving, try
• Avoid unnecessary driving resistance. Bind the canopy correctly best to keep the pointer of the engine tachometer within the
and reduce the adjustable canopy frame to the minimum height, green scale range, and run the engine under heavy load.
which can extend the canopy service life and reduce the air
• If necessary, use high power at a speed as low as possible. When
resistance, thus reducing the fuel consumption.
high power is required in uphill driving, in overtaking, at the uphill
• Correct tire pressure. If the tire pressure is 1 bar lower than the entrance of the highway, etc., use the maximum power provided
normal value, the fuel consumption will increase by 5%, and the by the rated speed.
service life of the tire will also be shortened.
• Use the tachometer. During the driving of the vehicle, the engine
Economical driving operation tachometer shall be checked to make the engine run within the
economic speed range as much as possible.
• Engine startup. When starting the engine, the electronic fuel
injection control device will automatically adjust the amount of
injected fuel according to the engine temperature, etc. Therefore,
do not step on the accelerator pedal to avoid unnecessary large
fuel injection quantity, thereby reducing the smoke exhaust
volume.
• The engine is running for warm-up. Under the low load conditions,
the temperature rises very slowly during the idling of engine.
Therefore, do not run the engine to heat it up while parking, but
preheat the engine under medium load.
• Cab heating. The vehicle engine is used to drive the vehicle, and
the engine is not an optimal heat source when idling! It is
recommended to use the cab auxiliary heater for heating.
• If the vehicle is stationary for a significant period of time, the

engine should be stopped.
177
• Use the inertia of the vehicle as much as possible. A truck has

• Shift in due course. If it is necessary to shift to the low gear before
great inertia, which can be used to climb slopes or slide on flat
driving into the uphill section, the low gear shall be engaged
roads. When traffic conditions permit and the expressway is flat,
before starting the climbing. In this way, the vehicle can drive to
the accelerator pedal can be released at a distance of 800 meters
the ramp with enough engine speed to avoid shifting again.
from the exit of the expressway; Before reaching the bottom of
• Do not shift at will, and use the engine torque reasonably. Each the ramp, release the brake pedal at an appropriate time and
shift interrupts the traction, so random shift will increase fuel allow the vehicle to obtain kinetic energy (when traffic conditions
consumption and accelerate wear of clutch and synchronizer. and traffic control regulations permit).
• For transmissions with synchronizer, it is not necessary to • Avoid unnecessary parking and braking. Driving slowly but
separate the clutch twice and to cut off the fuel circuit during shift. smoothly, rather than stopping the car (e. g.
This means faster shift, which can shorten the time when traction at the traffic lights) will reduce fuel consumption and reduce the
is interrupted and reduce the fuel consumption. wear of the transmission system mechanism.
• Driving is smooth without obvious acceleration or deceleration, • Cruise control can not predict traffic conditions. Using cruise
with high average speed and low fuel consumption. Listen to the control properly can make driving more comfortable and reduce
traffic announcement issued by the radio broadcast so as to unnecessary fuel consumption.
avoid the traffic jam.
• Keep following distance. Keep enough distance from the vehicle

in front, so that not only the vehicle can be driven safely, but also
the driver has the opportunity to adapt to the changing traffic
conditions.
178
Vehicle load
Vehicle load Basic requirements for loading and unloading

Pay attention to the following items when loading the vehicle: -The maximum axle load or the permissible gross vehicle weight
- Existing national regulations and rules on workers' labor shall not be exceeded.
protection and accident prevention (for example, health and safety -Fix the goods to prevent scattering during driving.
provisions in the labor law). -The center of gravity of the cargo shall be located in the middle of
-National regulations on load safety and load distribution of road the vehicle. Do not let the center of gravity move forward, otherwise
vehicles. the front axle will be overloaded.
-Relevant operating instructions of the manufacturer stored on the -If the cargo is moved to the rear axle, the load borne by the front
vehicle. axle of the steering axle shall be kept above the minimum
Common loading errors specified value (for example, the minimum front axle load of the
two-axis truck is the 25% of the vehicle weight, and that of other
Loading errors Consequences to be caused models is the 20% of the vehicle weight).
Unilateral overload of the -When the vehicle is braked, the load will be transferred to the front
Load on one side only axle, and the rear axle load will be reduced accordingly, and the
suspension/tire
front axle will be in the risk of overload.
Loading on one side only leads to
Possible rollover when turning -Caution tire size, nominal load capacity and required air pressure.
too high a center of gravity
When braking or cornering

The goods are improperly secured
-Shaking of goods
or not tied up to the cargo platform
- Danger for body and goods
There is a gap between the

on-board cargo and the front When braking or cornering
bulkhead, lateral plate, and rear -Shaking of goods
bulkhead of the truck, or between - Danger for body and goods
the cargo.
179
Winter vehicles
Winter vehicles
It is recommended that you apply wax-based protectant to cab,
body, and chassis before winter. Re-coat the sealing protectant,
especially in areas susceptible to frost damage. Clean the whole
vehicle frequently and remove corrosive matter that may contain
salt.
When the engine is idling below 0℃
When the engine is idling below 0℃ for a long time, the wear of the
engine will be heavier, so the idling time shall not be too long.
Heat the adblue tank and clean up the filter screen of the
water shut-off solenoid valve
Clean once a year before winter to ensure smooth water route.
Fuel tank
Drain the fuel tank before winter.
In winter, diesel of grades suitable for the local operating
environment should be selected. For proper use of the main and
auxiliary fuel tanks to start engine, refer to Chapter 4 "Fuel
System".
Fuel coarse filter
Drain the water from the fuel coarse filter every day.
Cooling system
Check antifreeze and add it if necessary.
Windshield washer system
Add antifreezing cleanout fluid.
Battery
Before the start of winter, fully charge the battery. Throughout the
winter, the power of the battery should be kept above 90% of its
total power to ensure that the battery is ready to work at all times.
Headlamp
Check the installation condition and make adjustments if
necessary.
180
Winter vehicles
Snow chain
When driving on snow-covered roads, the snow chain shall be installed on the
driving wheel. Do not install the snow chain too tightly and make sure that the snow
chain can be moved slightly (self-cleaning function).
Warning!
- When using the snow chain, ensure that there are sufficient gaps
between the fender and the tires, and sufficient gaps between the
body if necessary!
- When installing snow chain on air suspension vehicle, be careful
not to drive with relatively low air suspension!
181
Start the engine
Start the engine

Before starting the engine, you should check whether the battery switch is
turned on.
Avoid starting the engine unnecessarily to protect the battery.
Warning!
- When the vehicle is parked for a long time or the electrical
system is maintained, the main switch of the battery shall be
turned off.
-Never disconnect the main switch of the battery when the
engine is running.
- Do not loosen or remove the battery terminal posts when the
engine is running.
1
Master power switch

Turn on the switch.
• Turn the outer handle ① of the battery box clockwise to the horizontal
position, or press the rocker switch ② to turn on the power.
Turn off the switch.
• Turn the outside handle ① of the battery box counterclockwise to the
vertical position, or disconnect the rocker switch ②, that is, disconnect the
power supply.
182
Start the engine
DANGER!
- When the vehicle is running, do not turn the key switch to the
"LOCK" position, otherwise the key switch will lock the
steering wheel and the vehicle will not be able to turn!
- The key shall be removed when leaving the vehicle (even for a
short time).
Turn the key to the "ON" position

The relevant lights will be driven in turn: position lamp - brake light/ reversing
light on - rear fog lamp/ work light on - front fog lamp/ low beam on...will be
driven in turn. At the same time, all Indicators of the instrument are lit up in turn,
and the information display screen is repeatedly switched between "driving
screen", "input information screen" and "output information screen".
If the system detects a fault, the information display will flash the
corresponding fault content (if there are multiple faults at the same time, they
will be displayed cyclically).
183
Start the engine
Air inlet heating

The air intake heater is resistive and is installed on the air inlet pipe. When the
diesel engine coolant temperature is lower than -5 ℃, the preheat device can
heat the air in the air inlet pipe before and when the diesel engine is started,
and automatically stop the preheat after the diesel engine is started, the air
inlet heating indicator goes out.
When the key switch is set to the "ON" position, the system will automatically
enter the preheat state if the conditions are met. At this time, the intake heating
indicator on the driver's display is ON. When the preheat indicator goes out, it
means that the preheat is over, and the engine starting operation can be
carried out at this time.
Release steering lock device

Insert the key into the "LOCK" position on the key switch.
Turn the key to "ACC" position and turn the steering wheel at the same time to
release the steering lock device.
184
Start the engine
Engine startup
• The transmission is place in Neutral.
• Turn the key to the "START" position to start the engine.
• The starting time shall not exceed 15s.
• Release the key after the engine starts.
Warning!
-When starting the engine, check the driver's display
immediately, see "Driver's Display and Detector Lamp
Instrument Panel".
-If the vehicle has started, the oil pressure alarm lamp is on
and the emergency alarm lamp is flashing, the engine shall be
shut down immediately to find out where the fault lies.
Other lamps go out after their inspection/warning functions have been

completed.
If the engine fails to start
• Turn the key counterclockwise to the "LOCK" position.
• Wait for about 30 s for the battery to resume.
• Repeat the above starting procedure.
185
Shut off the engine
Shut off the engine

Shutdown the engine (only when the vehicle is stationary)
Warning!
If the engine is running under high load all the time, the coolant
temperature will be very high. Do not shut down the engine
immediately, let it run at idle speed for 3 to 5 minutes, and wait
until the engine coolant temperature drops before flameout,
otherwise it will bring danger of damage to the engine.
• Place the transmission in Neutral.

• Turn the key counterclockwise to the "LOCK" position, the engine will be shut
down.
• Turn off the battery switch.
Lock the steering wheel
• Turn the key to the "LOCK" position and remove it.
• Turn the steering wheel until you hear that the steering wheel is locked, then the
steering wheel cannot be turned.
DANGER!
Do not lock the steering mechanism while the vehicle is
driving.
186
Clutch
Clutch
• When operating the clutch, floor the clutch pedal.
• When starting, keep the engine speed as low as possible, as long as it can
avoid vehicle flameout. After releasing the clutch pedal, gradually increase
the engine speed by pressing the accelerator pedal, and then upshift.
• When releasing the clutch pedal (under the premise of a smooth start) when
starting the vehicle, engage the clutch as quickly as possible and do not
drive the vehicle in semi-clutch mode for a long time.
• If the vehicle has a heavy load and starts on a large ramp or on a road with
poor adhesion conditions, it may need to start for several consecutive times.
When the accumulated slipping time of the clutch (the clutch pedal is half
released) reaches 10 s within 1 min, stop operating the clutch for 5 min.
During this period, the engine shall not stop.
• If burning of friction plate is smelt when the vehicle starts but fails to start, or
there is clutch slippage after starting, stop operating the clutch for 15 minutes,
and the engine shall not be shut down during this period.
• If a gearing sound is heard when you engage a gear while warming up the
vehicle, you can depress the clutch pedal and wait for a while before shifting
into gear.
Caution!
If the vehicle is fully loaded or on a ramp or bad road, start in
○
i first gear to protect the clutch.
187
Transmission
Transmission
Fast series transmission
Instructions on turning on power take-off when driving
-First keep the car in low gear area and driving slowly;
- Place the transmission control level in the Neutral position;
-Turn on the cylinder pore of the power takeoff so that the power takeoff is in
gear to take the power;
-Pull the transmission control level to the required gear according to specific
situation, then the power takeoff will start operation.
Instructions on turning on power take-off when parking

-First, place the transmission control level in the Neutral position of low gear
zone;
- Connect the cylinder pore of the auxiliary tank, so that the auxiliary tank of the
gearbox is in neutral position;
-Turn on the power takeoff air hole so that the power takeoff is in gear to take
the power;
-Pull the transmission control level to the required gear according to specific
situation, then the power takeoff will start operation.
188
Transmission
HOWO series transmissions

HOWO series manual transmissions mainly include 9 gears, 10 gears, 12
gears and 16 gears, which can meet the needs of vehicles for different
purposes.
Caution!
-The vehicle shall be driven in high gear as much as possible to
○
i ensure that the engine is in the economic speed zone.
- When parking the vehicle or leaving the cab, the transmission
shall be placed in the neutral position and parking brake shall
be applied.
- When it is unnecessary, do not aply emergency braking
frequently or speed up sharply.
- Do not slide downhill when the transmission is in the neutral
position.
189
Transmission
Shift
It is necessary to start the vehicle in gear 1 or gear 2 according to the road
conditions.
Shift in low/high range
• Whenever operating the shift, floor the clutch pedal.
• The clutch shall be engaged slowly.
• Shift according to the gear placard, and the control lever shall be engaged in
position.
Warning!
-When shifting, be familiar with the driving range of each gear
to avoid shifting into a gear that does not match the speed.
- When driving downhill, the vehicle shall be shifted to the low
gear to make full use of engine braking.
-The reverse can be engaged only when the vehicle is
stationary and the engine is idling.
-The parking brake shall not be released until the air pressure
rises to the specified pressure.
-When the vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h, the transmission is
strictly forbidden to shift from the high range to the low range.
190
Transmission
Transmission with synchronizer

(HW25712XST(C)L/HW25716XST(C)L, etc.)
This series of transmissions are equipped with large-capacity synchronizer,
which features labor-saving shift and easy operation.
Steps for synchronizer shifting
• When shifting, clutch pedal ① should be pressed to the bottom.
• Move the gearshift lever ② smoothly and accurately to the required gear,
and gradually apply force for a moment when encountering resistance, and
then engage the required gear.
• Release the clutch pedal smoothly and accelerate to a proper speed.
1
Warning!
When shifting, be familiar with the driving range of each gear to
avoid shifting into a gear that does not match the speed.
191
Transmission
Transmission without synchronizer

2 (HW19710(C)(L)/HW19712(C)(L)/HW20716(C)(L)/HW25712 XS, etc.)
• There is no synchronizer in the main box of the series of transmissions, and
shifting is condutced by moving the sliding sleeve ①. The sliding sleeve of
the main shaft is sleeved on the main shaft ③ by involute splines, and the
1 sliding sleeve is moved to make the engagement teeth (outer splines) mesh
with the inner splines of the main shaft gear ② to transfer power.
• As the main shaft gear is floating relative to the main shaft, the gear can be
engaged only after overcoming large gear shifting resistance, and the
shifting force must be applied smoothly.
3
Shift precautions
• The engaging sleeve can only be engaged when it is shifted after
overcoming large shifting resistance, and the shifting force shall be applied
stably during shifting.
• When shifting from a high gear to a low gear while the vehicle is in motion,
use the "two-foot clutch method" to shift.
• Stop the vehicle when shifting to the reverse gear, otherwise it is easy to
damage the engagement sleeve.
192
Transmission
Transition between high and low gears
Warning!
- Do not shift down into any gear in advance unless the current
vehicle speed is within the range allowed for the gear you want
to engage.
-Whenever operating the shift, floor the clutch pedal.
- When the transmission shifts from the low gear zone to the
high gear zone (or vice versa), do not perform gear skipping 2
operation. 1
- When the vehicle goes downhill, it is forbidden to shift to the
high and low gears.
The switch valve of the gear shifting handle has two positions: high gear ①
and low gear ②.
193
Transmission
Transition between high and low gears (HW20716)

When switching HW20716 series transmission sub-gear (half gear), first
switch the switch on the gear shifting handle (as shown in the figure), for
exmaple, the operation steps for shifting from 1L to 1H: first switch the switch
valve from L to the H position, and then press the clutch pedal (the clutch
pedal should be pressed to the bottom, the same below), release the clutch,
and the shifting is completed (in this processm, there is no need to operate the
handle); Operation steps for shifting from 1H to 2L: first switch the on-off valve
from H to L position, then step on the clutch pedal to make the handle return to
Neutral, and then shift to gear 2. After Gear 2 is engaged, release the clutch
pedal, and the shifting process is completed. And so on, until the gear is
shifted to 8H, the downshift operation is the same. If you first step on the clutch
pedal, then release it, and then switch to the switch on the handle, the gear will
not be shifted.
Transition between high and low gears

(HW15710/HW19710/HW23710/HW19710T)
When the HW15710(HW19710/HW23710/HW19710 T) transmission is shifted
from the low gear area to the high gear area (and vice versa), the handle valve
shall be placed in the H (L) position first, then it shall be removed to Neutral,
wait for a while consciously, and then engage the 6th gear (5th gear). Do not
skip the gear, otherwise the service life of the auxiliary tank synchronizer will
be affected. When the handle is in a gear, switch the handle valve between H
and L. The high and low gears should not be switched until the handle is in the
neutral position.
194
Transmission
Transition between high and low gears (HW19712)

When the HW19712 transmission is shifted from the low gear area to the high
gear area (and vice versa), the handle valve shall be placed in the H (L)
position first, then removed to Neutral, wait for a while consciously, and then
engage the 7th gear (6th gear). Do not skip the gear, otherwise the service life
of the auxiliary tank synchronizer will be affected. When the handle is in a gear,
switch the handle valve between H and L. The high and low gears should not
be switched until the handle is in the neutral position.
Engage power takeoff

Operation methods
Place the transmission control level in Neutral first, step on the clutch pedal
and turn on the power takeoff switch ①. After the power takeoff is engaged,
release slowly the clutch pedal and the power takeoff enters the working
state.
195
Transmission
Precautions Operating temperature

• During the shift, the clutch shall be completely separated and the • The maximum temperature of the transmission during continuous
gearshift lever shall be placed in proper place. operation shall not exceed 120 ℃ , and the minimum
• The switch valve of the gear shifting handle has two positions: temperature shall not be lower than -40 ℃. Excessively high oil
high gear and low gear. When stopping the vehicle, the on-off temperature will lead to decomposition of lubricating oil and
valve shall be placed in the neutral position in the low gear area. shorten the service life of the transmission.
• When the vehicle is in low or reverse gear, stop the vehicle first • Any of the following conditions can make the operating
and then engage a gear to avoid damaging the part inside the temperature of the transmission exceed 120°C:
transmission. When engaging the reverse gear, it is necessary to - Continuously work at a driving speed < 32 km/h;
use a larger gear selection force to overcome the resistance of
- High engine speed;
the reverse lock, and the shift force is also larger than that used
in engaging the drive gear. -High ambient temperature;
• When vehicles go downhill, it is forbidden to shift the high and low - The exhaust system is too close to the transmission;
gears. - Overspeed operation at a high power;
• It is necessary to start the vehicle in gear 1 or gear 2 according to -Vortex surround transmission.
the road conditions. Inclined angle of working
• Before starting the vehicle, the parking brake shall not be When the inclined angle of working of the transmission exceeds
released until the air pressure rises to the pressure required to 15 °, the lubrication may be insufficient (inclined angle of working is
release the parking brake. equal to the installation angle of the transmission on the chassis
• In case of any transmission abnormalities such as abnormal plus the slope angle).
noises and obviously heavy operation during use, stop the Tow or slide
vehicle immediately for inspection, and continue driving after the
fault is eliminated. • Do not step on the clutch pedal to make the vehicle slide in
neutral.
• When the transmission is equipped with the primary and auxiliary
tank interlock mechanism, if the auxiliary tank is not shifted to a • When the vehicle needs to be towed, it is workable to pull out the
proper gear, the main tank will be locked for shifting. If the gear semi-axis, or disengage the transmission shaft, or lift the driving
can be engaged during shifting, it may be that the main auxiliary wheel off the ground.
tank interlock is working. Check the cylinder in the gear range
and its air route first to ensure that the auxiliary tank enters the
gear.
• - Transmissions within the “three guarantees” period are not
allowed to be disassembled and assembled without permission.
196
Transmission
ZF transmission
Manual gear transmission
ZF-Ecosplit 16-gear transmission consists of four-gear main box, high and low
gear parts and half gear group parts.
Four-gear main box
-Synchronizer type, reverse plus sleeve type.
- Manual Shift (rotary shaft control type).
- Double-H gear or (overlapping) single-Hgear.
- Servo shift.
High and low gears are at the rear end of the transmission
- Synchronizer shifting.
- Double-H gear; Automatic switching (pneumatic) when the gear shifting handle
moves between Gear 3/4 and Gear 5/6.
- (Overlapping) Single-H gear; Switching is done by manipulating the preselection
switch on the gear shifting handle.
Half gear group is at the front end of the transmission
- Synchronizer shifting.
-Operate the preselector valve on the gear shifting handle to shift the gear
pneumatically, and then operate the clutch.
197
Transmission
Gear description (Double-H gear)
Automatic switching zone R Reverse Low gear area (gears 1~4)

5~8 High gear zone N Neutral
High gear
area
High and
low gears
Low gear
area
High half
gear
High/low
half gear
Low half
gear
198
Transmission
Shift system
High and low gear double-H shifting system
The shift system is divided into 5 adjacent gear selection positions. There is a
neutral position for spring returning at gear 3/4 or gear 5/6 in the gear selection
position
When shifting from gear 3/4 to gear 5/6 in the gear selection position, the
pneumatic shift of high and low gears is automatically completed, and vice versa.
1 The high-low shift control system consists of a shift module ① and a two-way
cylinder ② located in the transmission.
199
Transmission
Half-gear group High gear

area
The shift operation of the half-gear group is controlled by the preselecter switch on
the gear shifting handle: the driver preselects the high half-gear or the low
High and
half-gear, and then depresses the clutch pedal to switch between the high and low low gears
half gears.
Low gear
area
Caution!
High half
○
- Only after the clutch pedal is fully depressed, the half gear
i
gear
starts to switch.
- The high and low half gears shall be selected according to the
High/low
driving conditions of the vehicle. half gear
Low half
gear
200
Transmission
Engine starting and vehicle starting

• Implement parking brake (prevent accidental sliding of the vehicle).
• Start the engine.
• Engage the gear (to protect the clutch, it is recommended to start from Gear 1).
• Release the parking brake, gradually release the clutch pedal, and the vehicle
starts to move.
Clutch operation
• Whenever separating the clutch, floor the clutch pedal.
Warning!
In the case of incomplete separation of the clutch, the shift will
cause wear of the transmission synchronizer.
201
Transmission
Shift operation
ZF Ecosplit series transmissions are synchronizer transmissions.
• There is no need to step on the clutch with both feet for upshifting. "High and low
• There is no need to step on the accelerator and the clutch with both feet for gear locking
downshifting. blocks"
Transmission gear diagram

In case of double-H shift, there is a neutral position for spring return when the
selector gear is set to gear 3/4 (low gear area) and gear 5/6 (high gear area).
When the shift lever is set to gear 1/2 or gear 7/8 in the selector gear, it is
necessary to overcome the spring force and push it into the corresponding
selector gear before engaging the gear. If the gear is removed, the shift lever will
automatically bounce back into the corresponding neutral position.
The low gear area is separated from the high gear area by a stronger spring lock
mechanism.
The reverse channel is protected by a stop limiter, and more force is required to
engage the reverse gear.
Each gear position has its own limit spring force, which is convenient for
confirming the selection of gear position. Upward shift: rise a half
gear (S)
Down shift: lower a half

gear (L)
Half gear preselection switch for

double-H shift handle
202
Transmission
Warning!
-To protect the transmission synchronizer, be sure to ensure
complete separation of clutch in gear shifting.
Shift - When upshifting or downshifting, it is not allowed to upshift or
operation downshift more than two gears (for example, from the lower half of
4th gear to the lower half of 6th gear), otherwise it will cause
synchronizer wear.
Upshift - In order to avoid damage to transmission and engine, downshift
Downs can only be carried out after the vehicle slows down and the
hift maximum speed allowed by the target gear is reached.
- During the use of the power takeoff, do not shift (including half
gear shifting), otherwise it will cause synchronizer wear. If you
need to adjust the speed by shift, be sure to disengage the power
takeoff first.
-The gear shifting handle should be manipulated quickly and
gently (do not apply too much force), especially when the car has
not started, it is recommended to use the open palm to control the
shift lever.
-When the gear is engaged, hold the gear shifting handle to
overcome the shift resistance until the synchronization is
completed and the shift is realized.
203
Transmission
Double-H shifting
When it is necessary to switch between the 3/4 gear neutral position and the 5/6
gear neutral position, tap the shift lever with your palm and then engage the
required gear.
Shift
Caution! operation
○
i
When the vehicle has not started, larger force should be used
for shifting. If the gear is switched from the 5/6 gear neutral Upshift
position to the 3/4 gear neutral position, the high and low gear
auxiliary tank shall not be engaged in the low gear, and the Downs
vehicle speed shall be reduced before engaging the hift
appropriate gear.
Warning!
- When the vehicle speed is higher than 28 km/h, it is not
allowed to switch between high and low auxiliary tank gears.
Otherwise, it will cause wear of high and low auxiliary tank
synchronizers.
- In the driving mode, other high and low gears can be
preselected only in front of the upcoming shift. Selecting other
high and low gears too early may result in undesired gear
engaged actually in traffic condition when quick shifting is
required, and synchronizer wear.
204
Transmission
Reverse
DANGER!
The reverse can only be engaged when the vehicle is stopped.
• When engaging the reverse gear and exiting the gear, ensure complete
separation of clutch
• Disengaging clutch should be done during idling of engine.
• The reverse can only be shifted to when the transmission countershaft is
stationary, otherwise the gear will be beat when shifting.
• If necessary, please extend the waiting time before shifting.
• Slowly engage the clutch.
205
Transmission
Operation of power takeoff

Engage/disengage Warning!
• The power takeoff can be engaged or disengaged when the - Shift is not allowed when the power takeoff is in
clutch is separated. working state.
• Disengaging clutch should be done during idling of engine. - When parking for a long time, power takeoff
shall be disengaged.
• The power takeoff can only be engaged when the transmission
countershaft is stationary, otherwise the tooth of the power
takeoff will be beat.
Caution!
○
Shift interlock (optional)
i - The time required for the countershaft to stop
rotating may vary with the operation mode. The
Shift interlock is required in the following conditions:
• The vehicle is not allowed to start when the power takeoff is
time can be shortened by briefly activating the
engaged.
synchronizer. It would be best to use gear 1.
- No rattling sound is allowed when the power • When it is not allowed to engage the power takeoff during
takeoff is engaged. If necessary, extend the driving.
waiting time before engaging the power takeoff,
or check whether the clutch is completely
separated.
- Slowly engage the clutch until it operates at the
normal speed.
206
Transmission
Parking
• The transmission is engaged in the low gear area (gears 1-4). If the vehicle is
parked uphill, engage the drive gear; if the vehicle is parked downhill, engage the
reverse gear!
• Load the vehicle and, for safety, block the wheels with wedges.
Traction start
When starting the engine through vehicle traction, the gear should be put into a
high gear (gears 5-8) of the high-low gear auxiliary tank.
Warning!
- In order to avoid damage to the transmission, the engine can only
be started through traction start in a high gear (5-8 gears).
- Starting the engine through traction start at the reverse gear is
prohibited.
207
Transmission
Towing
When towing the vehicle, the following conditions shall be met:
• Fitted with emergency steering pump
• Select the high gear area and place the shift lever in Neutral position
• The maximum towing distance is 100 km
• Determine the maximum allowable towing speed depending on the axle speed
ratio and tire size
Caution!
○
i -If any of the above towing conditions is not met, disengage the
flange connecting the rear axle of the transmission shaft or
remove the semi-axis to prevent damage to the transmission.
- The maximum towing speed specified by the relevant
regulations shall be observed.
208
Transmission
Emergency operation
1 If there is a fault in high/low gear switching, there may be the following reasons:
• The compressed air system pipeline is damaged.
2 • High/low gear valve ① or high/low gear cylinder ② fails (condensate water or
dirt).
Warning!
- If the above situation occurs, you can only continue driving in a
low gear (gears 1-4).
- If the gear is in the high gear area when the fault occurs, towing
shall be carried out.
Shift boost
• If the shift assist fails, shifting can still be implemented manually with greater
force.
209
Transmission
Lubricating oil
• This transmission shall use the lubricating oil specified by the SINOTRUK or oils
certified in the list of ZF lubricating oils TE-ML 02. When the temperature is lower
than -15 ℃, confirm whether the oils is suitable according to the list of oils, and
change the oil in time if necessary; Preheat can also be done before the engine
is started, such as preheating with hot wind, but the temperature on the
transmission must not exceed 130 °C.
Low temperature parking

When parking at an outdoor temperature lower than 0 ℃, ensure that the
transmission is in the low gear area (the 1st gear or neutral in the low gear area
is engaged).
210
Transmission
Start the vehicle at a low temperature

Vehicles equipped with ZF-Ecosplit transmission
Transmission temperature * Above -20℃ -20℃ to -40℃
Lubricating oil model and

See "Transmission maintenance"
grade
-Preheat for at least 15 minutes at the engine speed of about 1500 rpm
-The transmission is placed in Neutral.
Precautions on engine All functions of the transmission can be -External preheat method can be adopted, and hot air can be used, but the
starting applied normally. temperature of the transmission shall not exceed 110℃.
-Do not heat towards mechanical parts, EST54 electronic control unit and heat
exchanger.
Limits Shift time may become longer Preheating is required
Note: the transmission's temperature may be different from the outside temperature.
211
Retarder
Retarder
The retarder is the auxiliary braking device of the vehicle that can Warning!
be used to slow down the vehicle at high speed or to control the - Ensure that the engine speed is not less than
speed during continuous downhill driving. The retarder is controlled 1600 r/min before and during downhill driving,
by the combination switch on the steering wheel tubular column. and do not let the engine run at idling speed or
step on the clutch pedal, otherwise the
After the retarder is activated, the retarder operating s ymbol is
sufficient cooling of the engine coolant cannot
displayed on the driver's display. When the retarder fails, the
be guaranteed.
retarder alarm symbol light s up (yellow means general fault,
and red means serious fault).
• If the vehicle is equipped with the ABS or EBS braking system,
the retarder braking will be affected or interrupted when the
• If the coolant temperature reaches the maximum allowable
ABS/EBS system is active. Once the ABS or EBS stops working,
temperature, the retarder electronic control unit will automatically
the retarder will resume the working mode before the interruption.
adjust the retarder braking torque to the maximum allowable
• The use of the retarder does not affect the operation of the value (the retarder automatically reduces the braking torque).
gearbox. When the clutch is separated (for shift), the braking The driver shall take into account this reduction in retarding
torque of the retarder remains the same. performance and change the driving style accordingly (change
• The engine exhaust brake can work simultaneously with the the driving gear and use engine exhaust brake or service
retarder. braking).
• If necessary, the transmission can reduce one gear to increase
the engine speed, thereby improving the water pump flow and
heat dissipation.
212
Retarder
Operation
General Information
The retarder is activated by the slow-speed hand switch. In order to reduce the
retarder torque, it is allowed to directly shift to the lowest gear when operating
the hand switch.
Caution!
○
i To increase the retarder torque:
The most suitable way to operate the hand switch is level by
level (or gear by gear) (that is, do not directly shift to the
maximum gear)! In case of emergency, it is allowed to operate 1
the hand switch directly to the maximum gear!
Slow-speed hand switch

① Right combination switch
② Slow speed indicator (see the driver display and detector lamp panel)
213
Retarder
Retarder operation
When the vehicle is going down a long slope or is driving at high speed, the speed
can be controlled using a retarder
Retarder control is achieved by turning the right combination switch ①. It is
divided into five gears, and the retarding effect of each gear is as follows:
- Gear 0: retarder off - Gear 1: retarder constant speed gear
-2 gear: 1/4 of the maximum retarder torque -3 gear: 1/2 of the maximum retarder
torque
-4 gear: 3/4 of the maximum retarder torque -5 gear: maximum retarder torque
1
After the retarder is started, the "retarder working" symbol ② is displayed on the
driver's display. When the retarder fails, the retarder alarm symbol ③ lights up.
The "retarder working" symbol will override other information on the driver display.
The transmission can still be shifted when a retarder is used. During the shift
process, the braking torque of the retarder remains the same.
A retarder is an auxiliary braking device. Do not just use the retarder for braking,
as the brake lining will harden and become glassy when the service braking
device is not used for a long period of time, which will result in a reduction in the
effectiveness of the service braking. If the above situation occurs, the brake lining
shall be inspected and replaced by the SINOTRUK service station.
3 2
214
Retarder
Instructions for each gear of the retarder

• After the engine is started, the retarder is in standby state.
• When it is necessary to use the retarder, pull the right combination switch ① to
the required gear (at this time, the retarder indicator will be turned on).
• Turn the right combination switch ① back to gear 0 to cancel the deceleration
function.
Constant speed gear
• Select the vehicle speed and pull the right combination switch ① to the constant
speed gear.
1 • After the constant speed gear is activated, the retarder will keep the vehicle
driving downhill at the selected speed (within the allowable range of the
maximum retarder torque of the retarder). If the constant speed gear is used and
the vehicle speed still increases, please use other braking methods to slow
down the vehicle.
• When the switch is turned back to 0 gear and the constant speed function is
released, the original stored vehicle speed will be automatically deleted.
Caution!
○
Turning from the constant speed gear to the 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears
i cannot improve the retarding effect, and the constant speed gear
and the 5th gear have the maximum retarder torques!
215
Retarder
Switch the retarder to the maximum brake force

Turn the right combination switch ① to gear 5 and the retarder to the maximum
braking force.
Gradually increase or decrease the brake force of the retarder
By changing the gear of the retarder, from a low gear to a high gear (2-3-4-5), the
brake force of the retarder gradually increases; Conversely, the brake force of the
retarder decreases gradually.
Switch off the retarder
Turn the right combination switch ① to gear 0, and the retarder will be turned off.
Caution! 1
○
- When the vehicle cruise function is activated, the retarder's
i constant speed and other gear braking functions cannot be
used.
- Do not use cruise control function if you need to use the
braking function of each gear of the retarder.
-When the vehicle needs a large continuous brake force, the
hydraulic retarder can be used with the exhaust brake function
at the same time. If only a small continuous brake force is
required, it is recommended to use the hydraulic retarder first.
If the brake force cannot meet the demand, the exhaust brake
can be used at the same time.
-Do not use the constant speed function of the hydraulic
retarder when driving on wet and slippery roads!
216
Retarder
Warning!
- Use retarder with caution on slippery roads. The vehicle has a
danger of slippage! If the retarder is used, it should be operated
step by step, and the retarder should be turned off in bad road
conditions.
- When the vehicle is running without load, use the retarder with
caution!
- Retarder is an auxiliary braking device. In case of emergency,
please use service braking (foot brake) to slow down.
-Under low temperature conditions, the braking effect will be
delayed when the retarder is used for the first time after the vehicle
starts. Service braking can be used if required.
-The retarder function has only a weak effect at low speed. If
necessary, service braking should be used.
- It is forbidden to use retarder when the transmission is in Neutral.
-When ABS works, the retarder function is automatically turned off.
-If you want to stop the car, you should use service braking.
- When the retarder fails, the exhaust brake and service braking
shall be used to control the driving speed of the vehicle.
-The retarder braking function cannot replace the parking brake,
which shall be implemented before you leave the vehicle.
-If the coolant is insufficient, do not start the vehicle, otherwise the
retarder and gearbox may be damaged.
217
Differential lock
Differential lock
Differential lock - rear axle inter-wheel differential lock
Before driving into a bad road or muddy road, the differential lock can be used for a
short time to prevent the rear axle from tire slippage on one side. When engaging
the differential lock, the vehicle should be stationary or go straight slowly.
Warning!
-When using the differential lock, the adjustment function of
the wheel antilock braking system will be delayed for a period
of time, and the wheel may be locked for a short time. Steering
ability and directional stability are limited.
- When the differential lock works, the steering ability of the
vehicle is impaired, it is not allowed to drive at the curve of
solid road surface. When the vehicle is driving on a solid road,
the differential lock shall be disengaged immediately.
218
Differential lock
Engage the inter-wheel differential lock - 4 × 2, 6 × 2 vehicles

• Release the accelerator pedal (deceleration).
• Press the upper part of axle differential lock switch ①. When the inter-wheel
1 differential lock of the rear axle is engaged, the inter-wheel differential lock
indicator on the instrument panel will light up.
• Step on the accelerator pedal carefully and accelerate slowly.
Disengage of differential lock
• Release the accelerator pedal and depress the clutch pedal.
• Press the lower part of axle differential lock switch ①. When the inter-wheel
differential lock is disengaged, the inter-wheel differential indicator on the
1 instrument panel will go out.
Warning!
- Only when the vehicle is in a standstill state or running straightly
at a low speed (equivalent to the speed at which a person is
walking), can the differential lock be engaged.
-When the inter-wheel differential lock indicator is lit, the vehicle
cannot turn and drive at a high speed.
219
Differential lock
Inter-wheel differential lock - 6 × 4, 6 × 6 and 8 × 4 vehicles

Operating principle for engagement of the differential lock: engage the inter-axle
differential lock first, and then engage the inter-wheel differential lock.
• Engage the inter-axle differential lock (see "Engagement of Inter-axle Differential
Lock" for specific operation).
• Press the upper part of axle differential lock switch ①. When the inter-wheel
differential lock of the rear axle is engaged, the inter-wheel differential lock
indicator on the instrument panel will light up.
• Step on the accelerator pedal carefully and accelerate slowly.
Disengage of differential lock 1
• Press the lower part of axle differential lock switch ①. When the inter-wheel
differential lock is disengaged, the inter-wheel differential lock indicator on the
instrument pannel will go out.
220
Differential lock
Inter-axle differential lock

2 Inter-axle differential lock: it is used to lock the inter-axle differential between the
first and second drive axles.
Engagement of inter-axle differential lock
• Press the upper part of inter-axle differential lock switch ②. When the inter-axle
differential is engaged, the inter-axle differential lock indicator on the instrument
pannel will light up.
Disengage of differential lock
• Press the lower part of the inter-axle differential switch ②. When the inter-axle
differential lock is disengaged, the inter-axle differential lock indicator on the
2 instrument panel will go out.
Warning!
- Only when the vehicle is in a standstill state or running straightly
at a low speed (equivalent to the speed at which a person is
walking), can the differential lock be engaged.
-When the inter-axle differential lock indicator is lit, the vehicle
cannot turn and drive at a high speed.
221
Suspension
Suspension
Air suspension
The air suspension adopts an airbag filled with compressed air as the main elastic
element, and the airbag inflation/deflation is controled by the control system to
realize the height adjustment of the suspension system and axle lifting.
Structure configuration
The structures of -4×2 and 6×4 air suspension are respectively single-axle
four-airbag and double-axle eight-airbag;
The -6×2 rear lifting air suspension adopts a 9-airbag (4 airbags for the
intermediate axle and 5 airbags for the rear axle) structure. The intermediate axle
is drive axle, the rear axle is supporting beam, on the left and right side of the rear
axle there are 2 supporting airbags, and in the middle there is a lifting airbag for
lifting the rear axle.
Functional characteristics
- Each axle is arranged with the anti-roll bar to improve the stability of the vehicle;
- Each axle is arranged with the shock absorber to reduce the impact of the ground
on the vehicle;
- Height is adjustable for easy towing and loading and unloading of goods;
- For vehicles equipped with lifting axles, the lifting axles can be lifted under
no-load and half-load conditions;
- The load on each axle can be monitored in real time.
222
Suspension
Electrically controlled air suspension (ECAS)

Electrically-controlled air suspension realizes suspension height adjustment, lifting
axle lifting, load transfer and other functions by operating the remote control or the
rocker switch of the instrument panel.
223
Suspension
Instruction of remote control keys

The functions of the keys are shown in the figure.
Airbag lifting
status indicator
Caution! of the rear axle
○
- For the front axle of non-air suspension structure, its airbag
i lifting key is invalid.
- When the middle (rear) axle is non-lifting axle, the lifting key
Airbag lifting
status indicator
Lifting status
indicator of the
medium and rear
of the front axle
is invalid. axles
Airbag lifting
-Due to the particularity of the lifting axle, if the lifting axle activation key of the
Airbag lifting rear axle
control is activated, the controls for the front axle and rear axle activation key of Lifting axle
activation key
will be automatically deactivated; Vice versa. the front axle
-After the speed of the system exceeds a certain limit (30 km/h),
it is forbidden to use the remote control for ascending or
descending adjustment (except for restoring the normal Memory key Normal height key
height).
Up key Stop key
Down key
224
Suspension
Vehicle height adjustment

• Tap the key to activate the rear axle support airbag, the indicator lights up, and
the height lifting status is activated.
• Tap the key to activate the rear axle support airbag again, the indicator goes out,
and the height lifting status is deactivated.
225
Suspension
Adjust the vehicle height

• Press and hold the "Up" or "Down" key to raise or lower the vehicle; Release the
key and the adjustment of vehicle height stops.
Maximum height: the maximum value allowed;

Normal height: default value for normal driving;
Minimum height: the minimum value allowed.
The remote control can be operated only within the allowable height range.
226
Suspension
Memory height
• Press the "Up" or "Down" key to adjust the vehicle to the required height, release
the key, and press the "STOP" + "M1/M2" key at the same time to store and
remember the vehicle height.
Use the memory height

• Press the "M1"/ "M2" key, and the airbag will automatically inflate/deflate to
adjust the vehicle height to the stored memory height.
227
Suspension
Restore to normal vehicle height

• Press the "normal height" key, and the vehicle will automatically return to the set
normal height.
“STOP” Key
• Press the "STOP" key to stop all operations (including height adjustment, lifting,
lowering, axle lifting and lowering etc) immediately, and then the frame is
maintained at the height when the key is pressed.
228
Suspension
Lifting axle operation

• Tap the key to activate the lifting airbag, the indicator lights up, and the lifting
status is activated;
• Tap the key to activate the lifting airbag again, the indicator goes out, and the
lifting status is deactivated.
229
Suspension
• When the lifting airbag control is activated, press the "up" or "down" key to
control the lifting axle to rise or fall.
• When the lifting airbag control is activated, the "memory" key and "normal
height" button will be deactivated.
• When the lifting axle is in the lifting state, the conditions for activating its
automatic lowering are as follows:
- Drive axle fully loaded. In order to protect the drive axle and vehicle safety, the
lifting axle will automatically drop for carrying goods.
-If the ECAS system fails, the lifting axle will automatically drop to avoid unknown
risks.
In both cases, the lifting axle can't be lifted.
230
Suspension
Cab rocker switch

4×2 and 6×4 models (single-axle four-airbag, double-axle eight-airbag) are
equipped with three-height selection switch ①.
6 × 2 model with lifting axle, equipped with middle/ rear axle lifting airbag
control switch ② and three-mode selective switch ③.
1
2 3
ECAS fault alarm light

If the ECAS fails, the ECAS fault alarm light ④ lights up, and the vehicle shall be
stopped for inspection immediately. Refer to "Information displayed on the Driver
Display and Detector Lamp Panel".
If the vehicle can be driven, drive to a location where it will not obstruct the traffic at
a walking pace and immediately request the assistance of the SINOTRUK service
station.
4
231
Suspension
Lifting airbag control Indicator of the intermediate axle/rear axle

The lifting axle indicator ⑤ for the intermediate axle/rear axle lifting airbags on 5
the instrument panel lights up, indicating that the lifting axle is in the lifting state.
Three-height selector switch (three-gear switch)

When the switch is in the middle position, the frame is at the normal height;
Press the upper part of the switch once, and the frame will rise by 25 mm based on
the normal height;
Press the lower part of the switch once, and the frame will drop by 25 mm based
on the normal height;
232
Suspension
Lifting airbag control switch of the intermediate axle/rear axle

If the vehicle is equipped with an intermediate axle/rear axle lifting airbag control
switch, the rising and lowering of t he lifting axle can be controlled through this
switch. The function of this switch is the same as the lifting axle operation on the
remote control (supported by some remote controls). There are only two states for
the lifting axle position: lifting and lowering. Press the lifting axle lifting switch (or
operate the remote control), and the lifting axle will automatically and continuously
inflate/deflate to the corresponding position. It is impossible for the lifting axle to
stay in any position in the middle.
Press upward the intermediate axle/rear axle lifting airbag control switch, the lifting
indicator will light up and the lifting axle is lifted; Press this switch down, the lifting
indicator goes out and the lifting axle goes down.
Three-mode selective switch

When the switch is at 0, the ECAS control mode is ratio control;
Press the lower part of the switch to activate the best traction mode. At this
time, the load of the supporting beam (lifting axle) is transferred to the drive
axle, making the load of the drive axle reach the standard load, and thus
improving the driving force of the vehicle;
Press the upper part of the switch (self-reset) to activate the drive-helping mode.
When this function is activated, the load on the lifting axle will be transferred to the
drive axle until the drive axle obtains the maximum load, thus maximizing the
driving force of the vehicle. When the vehicle speed is not less than 30 km/h, the
drive help mode will be automatically turned off and restored to the ratio control
mode;
When the vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h, after the drive help mode is activated,
press and hold the upper part of the switch for more than 5 s or turn off the main
power switch to manually turn off the drive help mode. The optimal traction mode
is not limited by vehicle speed.
233
Suspension
Precautions for the use of air suspension models with the other functions, so as improve the operation stability of vehicle and
lifting function prevent sideslip.
-The gross train mass of the car shall be based on a standard load. - In order to protect the drive axle tire, start up the vehicle gently, be
-Because the vehicle with a lifting axle is driven by a single axle, the careful to avoid stepping on the accelerator furiously.
wear of a drive axle tire wear is greater than that of a non-drive axle -When the frame height is small, the clearance between the tire and
tire. Tires with drive pattern shall be selected for driving wheels; the fender is small. If there are mud, sand, stones ect. embedded in
The position of fifth wheel shall be as close to the drive axle as the tire pattern, the fender may be damaged. Therefore, before the
possible without affecting the front and rear turning radius. vehicle starts, check whether there is sufficient clearance between
- The lifting axle shall be lifted if it can be under the circumstances the tire and the fender. If the clearance is not enough, appropriately
that the vehicle is idling or the load is small. This can effectively raise the frame to about 40 mm below the maximum height, drive at
avoid problems such as slippage of driving wheels and lack of a speed no greater than 50 km/h for a period of time, and then
climbing ability of vehicles, and effectively reduce tire wear of lifting restore the frame to normal height.
axle. -If the tire of the vehicle is equipped with tire chain, the height of the
-If the lifting axle cannot be lifted when the vehicle load is large, the frame should be properly raised to ensure that the tire chain will not
optimal traction mode can be activated (set the three-mode selector damage the fender.
switch at the lower position) to keep the drive axle under the
standard load, so as to avoid problems such as slippage of the
driving wheels and lack of climbing ability of vehicles. It is
recommended that the user use the best traction function when
driving at a full load.
-When the vehicle is about to enter the toll station, the ratio control
mode should be turned on in advance (set the three-mode selective
switch to 0 position). In this way, the distribution of axle load of the
vehicle maintains the value set by the original factory, so as to
avoid unnecessary troubles during vehicle weighing caused by the
great difference in axle loads of middle and rear axles.
- When the vehicle is starting or about to climb a slope, the drive
assistance mode shall be activated in advance (click the upper part
of the three-mode selective switch). In this way, the drive axle can
obtain the maximum load, maximize the driving and gradeability of
the vehicle to avoid the slippage of the driving wheels effectively,
and prolong the service life of tires.
- When the vehicle runs on wet, slippery, rainy and snowy roads, it
is unadvisable to lift the lifting axle and activate the drive help and
234
Suspension
-When the frame deviates from the normal height set by the factory, the motion
displacement of the suspension will be affected. When the vehicle is driven at the
highest or lowest position for a long time, it may damage the frame, suspension
and transmission system, etc., and may also damage the fenders. Therefore, if it is
not necessary, it should be driven at the normal frame height.
-When the air route of the airbag fails, resulting in insufficient air pressure for the
airbag to work, you should stop the vehicle immediately and request SINOTRUK
service station to provide rescue in time.
-After the supporting beam (and steering supporting beam) is lifted or the drive
assistance function is activated, the braking and steering performance of the
vehicle may change due to the large axle load transfer of the vehicle. Be sure to
drive carefully.
- During the loading or unloading of the vehicle, the vehicle load changes greatly.
At this time, do not turn on the drive assistance and optimal traction function to
prevent the frame from rising or falling suddenly.
- For vehicles operating in mountainous areas such as Yunnan, Guizhou and
Sichuan, the vehicle speed for automatic releasing of driving assistance is 55 km/h
in order to achieve optimal traction performance. So the driving axle is overloaded
for more time than in other areas, which will have a certain impact on the service
life of the driving axle and driving wheels.
235
Semitrailer operation
Semitrailer operation Warning! -The connection of brake spiral pipe between the
General procedures of semitrailer operation tractor and the semitrailer and the electrical
connection spiral cable shall be checked frequently.
The semitrailer tractor is equipped with the dual-circuit trailer brake If any damage is found, it shall be replaced at the
control system. SINOTRUK service station immediately.
Warning! Clean the tractor and semitrailer socket

-When connecting semitrailer or operating bolster, • 6~8 bar compressed air shall be used to clean the tractor and
carefully check the side signboard of bolster. semitrailer socket, and water and mechanical items shall not be
-When the tractor is reversing to move to the used for cleaning.
semitrailer, no one is allowed to stand between the
• During the cleaning, the key switch and lighting system shall be
tractor and the semitrailer.
turned off.
-After hanging the semitrailer, check the handle
position to confirm that the bolster is engaged
correctly.
-If multiple semitrailers are used, check the
clearance between the center dowel and the bolster.
-Frequently check the air connection between the
tractor and the semitrailer as well as the sealing
condition during hitching, so as to ensure the
normal function, and make replacement in time if
any damage is found.
-When moisture, dust or sand particles enter the
trailer socket, especially the ABS socket (always
loaded with 24 V voltage), it is easy to cause
corrosion and heating of the connector, which may
damage the connector and cable. Socket and plug
shall be purged regularly with compressed air and
cleaned with antiwear cloth if necessary.
236
Connect the semitrailer

• Fix the semitrailer to prevent it from sliding.
• Open the bolster
Rotate the bolt-action locating ring ① upward to the horizontal position, and at the
same time push the handle ② forward (the forward direction of the vehicle), and
then pull it out to clamp its rectangular groove on the front side of the rectangular
groove of the bolster plate. At this time, the bolster is in the open state ready for
coupling.
• Reversing and connection. When the traction pin enters the bolster interface, the
latch hook and pin block will automatically lock the traction pin to complete the
docking. At this time, the bolt-action locating ring ① should return to the state
shown in the figure, and the warning hole ③ on the handle ② is located near the
outside of the bolster plate, and bolster locking is firm.
1 • If the bolt-action locating ring ① does not fall to the locking position, or the
warning hole ③ is far from the outside of the bolster plate, check whether the
2 bolster is locked in place.
Warning!
-The operation shall be carried out in accordance with the
3 operating specifications. Failure to correctly hitch the bolster will
lead to vehicle operation accidents.
-When the tractor is connected to the semitrailer, be sure to check
whether the bolster lock-up handle is locked correctly to ensure
driving safety!
237
• Connect the brake line and electrical connector between the semitrailer and the
tractor. Be cautious that the pipeline and wires shall not be tensioned, rubbed
and entangled during driving.
- Connect control line connector ① (yellow) first, and then connect gas supply
line connector ② (red).
- Check whether the function is normal. 1 2
238
Disengagement of semitrailer
• Check the road conditions to prevent semitrailer from sliding.
• Secure the semitrailer so that the wheel cannot move.
• Disconnect the brake line and electrical connector between the tractor and the
semitrailer. The disconnection sequence shall be strictly followed: first
disconnect the gas charging line connector (red) and then disconnect the control
line connector (yellow), otherwise the trailer braking will be released.
• Pull out the bolster handle ① until its locating slot stuck in the bolster housing.
At this time, the Pin block ② disengage with the latch hook ③, and start the
tractor forward, rotate the latch hook ③, release the traction pin, and the
disengage action is completed.
If the trailer is not connected for a long time, the bolster handle ① shall be reset.
• After disconnecting the air connection of the line, cover the joint with joint cover to
3 avoid contamination.
Warning!
Be sure to disconnect the air connection of the line in the correct
order. Otherwise the semitrailer will release the brake, which may
cause sliding.
1
2
239
Wheel spacing
Adequate tire clearance shall be ensured!
Warning!
- Danger of damage to the vehicle!
-The distance between semitrailer and tractor is strictly limited!
-The mobility of tractor and trailer is limited!
-When driving on puddles, slopes and muddy roads, it may
cause serious damage to tractor and semitrailer.
- When the vehicle is lowered in height, the vehicle can only run
at a walking speed for a short distance, otherwise the fender
and tire will be damaged.
240
Chapter IV Practical Suggestions
241
Tire replacement
Tire replacement Vehicle condition

Use and maintenance of tire • The toe-in of the front wheel shall be inspected and adjusted
Air pressure frequently, otherwise it may cause eccentric wear and early
damage to tires.
• After the tire is inflated, check all parts for air leakage and repair in
time. • Do not use rims which are rusty, deformed, or are of incorrect size,
otherwise it will cause seam wear.
• Ensure that the tire pressure is normal during use.
• Driving over steps by a road can cause invisible internal
• When running or working for a long time, the tire pressure should damage to the tire (damage to the tire body), and doing this
be checked regularly. When parking for a long time at full load, frequently can cause serious accidents. If it is difficult to be
the front and rear axles shall be erected. avoided, drive at the lowest possible speed at an angle of 90 °
• If the air pressure is too high, the tire is prone to crown wear and (lower than walking speed).
top explosion; The air pressure is low, and the tire is easy to be Pattern
deformed and damaged.
• When the tread pattern is worn to the wear mark, it shall be
• When two tires are installed in parallel, the air pressure of the two stopped to use.
tires shall be consistent.
Load
Speed
• The vehicle load shall comply with the current national standards,
• Various tire have different speed level restrictions. Overspeed can and overload is strictly prohibited.
cause early damage to the tire. When the road surface is not in
good conditions, do not drive too fast, and minimize emergency • The goods loaded in the vehicle shall be evenly distributed to
brake and sharp turns. avoid unbalanced loading.
• The tires are easy to heat up during the driving at a high speed.
Once the temperature rises too high, measures shall be taken in
time to prevent the tires from blasting.
242
Tire replacement
Assembly cannot be used for steering wheel!

• The tire shall be assembled on the specified vehicles and rims, • The spare tire should be steering wheel tire.
and special tools and instruments shall be used to assemble and • When the specification of the vehicle spare tire is inconsistent
disassemble the tire for standard operation. with that of the standard wheel tire, the spare tire can only be used
• Guide wheels shall be equipped with tires of the same for a short time and the vehicle speed should not exceed 80 km/h.
specification, brand, structure, pattern and level. Driving wheels Tires of all-wheel drive vehicles
also shall be equipped with tires of the same specification, brand,
structure, pattern and level. It is recommended to install tires of • For all-wheel drive vehicles, tires of the same specification, size,
the same brand for one vehicle. and construction are usually used.
• Bias tire and radial tire cannot be mixed. • The difference between the tire rolling circumferences of the front
and rear axles should not exceed 2%, otherwise, the power
• When installing the directional pattern tire, the rotation direction transmission system will form stress when the front axle is
sign should be consistent with the driving direction of the vehicle. engaged or inter-axle differential lock is locked, which will bring
• The tire chain shall be installed symmetrically and removed serious harm to the safety and driving performance, and also
immediately when not in use. earlier wear to the tire.
Interchanging
• It is recommended to interchange the tires every 12000 km.
• If possible, it is recommended to conduct dynamic balance test
for the interchanged wheel-tire assembly.
• During interchanging, tires with similar pattern wear shall be
installed on the same axle as far as possible.
• After interchanging, the rotation direction of the tire shall be
opposite to that before interchanging (the directed pattern tire
shall still follow the original rotation direction after interchanging).
• For split-wheel models, drive pattern tires shall be interchanged
with each other and non-drive pattern tires shall be interchanged
with each other. Mixed interchanging is not allowed.
• When installing two tires, the valve stems of the inner and outer
tire should be staggered 180°to facilitate inflation.
Spare tire
• The tubeless tires are divided into steering wheels and driving
wheels. A steering wheel has good steering characteristics, while
a driving wheel has good adhesion. Therefore a driving wheel tire
243
Tire replacement
Change the tire size

• Use the wheel and tire specifications specified for this model only.
• If the tire size is changed, the programs of the vehicle control unit CBCU,
engine ECU and tachographs shall be refreshed at the SINOTRUK service
station.
Basic Specification
Due to the influence of sunlight and environmental factors, the tire will be aged.
It shall be replaced in time according to the use and wear condition of the tire,
otherwise the driving safety will be affected.
244
Tire replacement
Replace the spare tire

Warning!
When releasing the spare tire, its center of gravity is very easy
to change due to its heavy weight, and it may fall or flip off and
injure yourself or others.
Remove spare tire

• Unscrew the wheel nut.
• Remove the spare tire pressing plate assembly.
• Remove spare tire.
Install spare tire
The assembly procedure of spare tires is the reverse of the disassembly
procedure.
The tightening of the nuts used to fix spare wheel shall be checked regularly.
245
Tire replacement
Tire replacement
Caution!
○
i Before replacing the spare wheel, the key switch should be
turned off.
If replacing the tire on the road, for your safety, be sure to observe local traffic
regulations (such as proper placement of warndreieck, etc.) and ensure that
the vehicle cannot move.
• Remove the wheel retaining nuts, leaving only 3 evenly distributed nuts.
• Place the jack at the designed support points on the relevant side of the
vehicle so that it does not slip.
The jack shall be inspected at least once a year by a specialist
(professional repair center) in accordance with relevant regulations.
• Jack up the vehicle and ensure that the ground foundation is solid.
• After confirming that the newly-replaced wheel can move completely freely
on the wheel bolts, loosen the last 3 wheel nuts.
• Remove the wheel with caution, not damaging the thread.
• Before installing the spare tire, remove the rusting and dirt on the contact
surfaces of the drum brake, rim, nut and bolts, wipe the excircle matched
with the wheel locating hole and wheel rim, and apply an appropriate amount
of grease.
• Install the spare wheel (the tire pre-charge pressure should be as specified),
being careful not to damage the threads.
• Screw on the nut by hand and tighten the nut in a diagonal cross sequence
until it cannot be screwed by hand.
• Lower the jack, lower the wheel, and cross tighten the nut with a torque of
550 ~ 600 Nm.
• After driving for about 50 km, retighten the nuts and retighter them as
required until they are tightened.
246
Tire replacement
Tire inflation
The tire can be inflated with the gas charging adapter mounted on the air dryer
as follows:
• Remove the dust cap ① of the adapter.
• Connect one end of the tire inflation hose to the valve stem of the tire.
• Screw the other end of the tire inflation hose onto the gas charging adapter
on the air dryer.
• Accelerate the engine.
• Check the tire pressure and adjust it as required.
247
Tire replacement
Puncture emergency safety device

Use process of driver's tool ① of the puncture emergency safety device
• Open the driver's tool kit and take out the puller strap, put it under the wheel
rim to tighten it and expose three puller strap lantern rings;
• Take out the tire expander and put the puller strap lantern rings into the top
1 rod, use the tire expander guide rod to adjust up and down to fix the puller
strap to the tire expander, and fix the other two puller strap lantern rings in
turn;
• Press the three tire expander guide rods up and down until the tire is
completely exposed in the rim groove;
• Install the puncture emergency safety device ② into the rim groove. After
the installation, first press the tire expander guide rod down, slide the tire
expander down to separate the top rod from the puller strap lantern ring,
remove the tire expander, and then relax the puller strap and take it out.
248
Traction and traction start

• For traction and traction start, a towing hook is equipped in the driver's tool
for self-rescue. Open the cover ① first and screw the towing hook
completely into the mounting bolt hole ② when using it.
• When towing vehicles from mud pits and soft roads, they should be
unloaded first. If unloading is not possible for technical or practical reasons,
when towing a vehicle, select as many points of force on the vehicle as
possible (the points on the axle are the best).
1
• When towing, the hazard warning lights of the trailer and the faulty vehicle
shall be turned on.
General requirements
• Follow the instructions for the electrical system.
• Turn on the key switch.
• If possible, keep the engine running to keep the braking system and power
steering system in the operating condition.
• Turn the key to the "ON" driving position and do not pull it out.
• Use a rigid tow bar and do not use ropes or cables.
• If the vehicle is trapped, do not let the vehicle swing from side to side during
traction, and do not pull it diagonally, especially do not tow it from one side.
• If the steering system is damaged, raise the front axle. 2
249
Traction preparation (towing)

Before traction, disconnect the transmission shaft and cut off the power.
Warning!
- Attempting to steer a stationary vehicle in case of hydraulic
assistance can cause damage to the steering system!
- Only when the vehicle is moving, steering without hydraulic
assistance can be conducted.
- If the engine is in flameout, due to the failure of hydraulic
assistance, more force needs to be applied to the steering
wheel, and the vehicle shall be towed slowly.
-If the air pressure of the braking system is insufficient,
external compressed air (at least 0.55 MPa) or mechanical
means can be introduced to release the braking of the energy
storage spring brake chamber, see "energy storage spring
brake chamber-Emergency release Release", Caution that there
is no braking thereafter!
Traction start
Traction starting of the vehicle is not recommended. It is recommended to start
the vehicle in jump start mode, see "Jump start/Auxiliary start". The battery and
starter of the started vehicle shall be in good condition.
250
Vehicle traction in case of axle damage

Warning!
-Before the vehicle is lifted, the ignition switch shall be turned
off.
-The key is placed in the "LOCK" position.
Front axle
• Perform the traction with special transportation equipment or after raising the
front axle.
• If the front of the vehicle is raised, the transmission shaft of the rear axle
should be disconnected.
• Only the front axle can be lifted for four-axle vehicles.
Rear axle
• Perform the traction with special transport equipment or after raising the rear
axle.
• For all-wheel drive vehicles, disconnect the transmission shaft of the front
axle.
Supporting beam
• Perform the traction with special transport equipment or after raising the
axle.
Emergency method to send vehicles to the nearest service station
• Unscrew the supporting beam wheel and screw the nut back to the drum
brake.
• Slowly tow the vehicle, and note that the supporting beam hangs on the
shock absorber.
• After completing the repair, ensure that the airbag is in place.
Warning!
-If none of the conditions is met, disconnect the transmission
shaft or remove the semi-axis at the rear axle flange.
-If transmission damage is suspected, disconnect the
transmission shaft or remove the semi-axis at the rear axle
flange.
251
Tow the vehicle with a draw bar

The towed vehicle shall be turned and braked by the driver.
• Start the engine.
• Inflate the braking system until the unloading pressure of the air dryer is
reached.
• Place the transmission in neutral position.
• Disconnect the transfer gear.
• Release the parking brake.
• The vehicle shall be towed slowly, with the maximum traction speed not
exceeding 50 km/h (when a hydraulic retarder is installed, the maximum
traction speed shall not exceed 40 km/h, and relevant local applicable laws
and regulations shall also be observed).
• The maximum traction distance shall not exceed 100 km.
After traction
• Shut off the engine.
• When applying the parking brake, to prevent the vehicle from sliding, the
wheels should be blocked with wedges.
252
Jump start/auxiliary start

If the engine cannot be started due to the power loss of the battery, another
battery can be used to start the engine. Auxiliary equipment shall be operated
as specified and jumper of adequate cross-section shall be used.
Warning!
- Use jumpers that meet the standard only.
- Use the jumper in accordance with the instructions.
- Use battery of the same rated voltage (24 V) only.
-Charger or jump starting device for auxiliary start shall not be
used.
① Battery providing jump start ② Battery requiring jump start

Connect the positive and negative terminals (the engine is shut down)
• Connect the positive terminal.
• Connecting the negative terminal of the charged battery to the grounding
point of the transmission or engine.
Warning!
Do not connect the grounding point to the frame!
253
• The jumper with a main switch of power supply is also available for jump start.
Disconnect the main switch of the power supply, connect the negative
terminals of the two sets of batteries, and do not turn on the switch until the
connection is completed.
• Verify that the jumper will not affect the movement of the vehicle fan/belt and
other parts.
• Start the engine which provides jump start.
• The maximum time for starting and operating the engine which needs a jump
start is is 15 s.
Disassemble positive and negative terminals
• The disassembly sequence is reverse to the connection sequence.
254
Energy storage spring brake chamber-emergency release

When the air pressure in the parking brake circuit is lower than 0.55 MPa and
the pressure acting on the brake chamber diaphragm is less than the energy
storage spring force, the energy storage spring brake works.
At the same time, the braking system fault lamps ② or ③ and the parking
1
brake light ① are lit at the same time. The energy storage spring brake
chamber can be released by pneumatic or mechanical means in case of
emergency or in maintenance depot.
Warning!
-Before releasing the energy storage spring brake chamber,
make sure that the car cannot move by itself!
- The emergency release device of the energy storage spring
brake chamber can only be used to maneuver the vehicle at
maintenance depot or in emergency situations.
-After the emergency release of spring energy storage gas
chamber, the driving of the vehicle will cause an accident, 2
because the air pressure of service braking circuit I and circuit 3
II is not enough to ensure effective braking!
-The vehicle shall not be driven until all information displayed
on the driver's display disappears.
255
Energy storage spring brake chamber-mechanical emergency release

Diaphragm spring brake chamber
When the air pipeline connecting the energy storage spring brake chamber is
self-braked due to leakage, the brake can be released as long as the bolt ①
at the rear end of the brake chamber is screwed out to the release position.
Double-diaphragm spring brake chamber

Open the rear end cover ② of the double-diaphragm spring brake chamber,
insert the bolt ③ from the rear end cover and screw it out manually to release
the brake.
3 2
256
Fuel system
Fuel system
Oil tank
Check the condition and tightness of the fuel system
Visually inspect whether the pipeline and pipe joint (especially the area near
the heat source) in the fuel system are damaged or corroded.
If any leakage is found, please go to the SINOTRUK service station for repair
immediately.
• If the fuel hose is not worn, it does not need to be replaced.
Retighten the oil tank tape

When the vehicle has drived for 2000 km, the oil tank tape shall be retightened
for the first time, and be retightened every 5000 km later. When the road
conditions are bad, the mileage for retightening the oil tank tape shall be
shortened appropriately.
257
Fuel system
Fuel coarse filter

For vehicles equipped with a fuel coarse filter with an electronic pump, the fuel
coarse filter will work after the vehicle is powered on, heating the fuel inside the
fuel coarse filter ①. At the same time, the electronic pump will absorb the fuel
in the oil tank to enable the engine to start faster.
258
Fuel system
When the level of the water filtered from the fuel at the bottom of the filter
reaches the specified height, the driver's display screen will display alarm
indicator ② indicating that there is moisture in the fuel to remind the user to
drain the moisture in time, so as to protect the fuel system and ensure the
normal operation of the engine.
Drain the impurities and water in the fuel coarse filter as prompted by the
alarm of the water level sensor.
• Stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and apply the parking brake.
• Unscrew the water drain valve ③ at the bottom of the fuel coarse filter. 3
• Remove impurities, water and dispose them properly.
• Tighten the water drain valve at the bottom.
259
Fuel system
Maintenance of filter element of fuel coarse filter (long life oil-water

separator)
When using regular oils, it is recommended to replace the filter element every
7 100,000 km for trunk tractors (for other working conditions, please shorten the
maintenance intervals appropriately).
Steps for replacing the filter element
6 • Stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and apply the parking brake.
• Disconnect the connecting harness of the filter, unscrew the water drain
valve ④ at the bottom of the fuel coarse filter, and drain the diesel in the
filter.
• Remove the filter housing from the bottom of the housing with a 36 mm
4 socket wrench or from the top of the housing with a clamp wrench.
• Take out the old filter element and remove the old O-ring of the housing.
• Apply a small amount of diesel oil to the sealing ring at the bottom of the new
filter element ⑦, and install it into the housing after lubricating it.
• Install the new O-ring ⑥ on the housing and apply clean diesel for
lubrication.
• Pre-assemble the housing with the filter element in place on the aluminum
base, then tighten the housing by 3.5 to 4 turns counterclockwise with a
socket wrench or clamp wrench by using the housing tab as the starting
point.
• Reconnect the filter harness and energize the electric pump to exhaust the oil
pumping. When there are bubble-free fuel flowing continuously in the oil
return pipe, exhaust of the fuel system is completed.
• Start the engine and check the oil pipe and filter for leakage. If no, the
replacement of the filter element is completed.
• Please replace the filter element in a SINOTRUK service station.
260
Fuel system
Caution!
○
-The housing sealing ring is a one-time part, and it must be
i replaced with a new one every time the housing is removed
and reinstalled!
-After each removal and reinstallation of the housing, the fuel
system (including prefilter, main filter and oil line) must be
vented. If the fuel system is not completely vented, the engine
starting may be affected.
261
Fuel system
Fuel coarse filter (oil-water separator)

1 Check for impurities and water, and remove them as required.
2 (Weekly or more frequently, depending on weather, use and operation)
• Stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and apply the parking brake.
• Unscrew the nut ③ at the bottom of the fuel coarse filter.
• Remove impurities, water and dispose them properly.
• After tightening the filter element for maintenance, restore the oil line.
• Unscrew the deflation bolt ② on the top of the fuel coarse filter.
• Press the hand pump ① until oil overflows from the oil outlet of the prefilter.
3 • Tighten the deflation bolt ②.

• Continue pressing until there is fuel flow in the oil return pipe.
262
Fuel system
Fuel pressure sensor

When the fuel fine filter ① of the engine is blocked, and the pressure
measured by the fuel pressure sensor ② installed at the front end of the fuel
fine filter is higher than 9.5 bar, the engine fault alarm indicator ③ on the
instrument panel lights up
2
1
Fuel fine filter

Engine fault alarm indicator ③ flashes, with the flashing code of 215.
If the fuel fine filter is blocked, please replace a new fuel fine filter element for
it in time.
263
Fuel system
• The main fuel tank shall be refuelled with 0# diesel, and the auxiliary fuel
tank shall be refuelled with diesel according to the ambient temperature
(according to GB 19147). For the diesel grade, refer to the following table:
When the ambient temperature is ≥ 4℃, refuel with 0# diesel
When the ambient temperature is lower than 4℃ and higher than or equal to
-5℃, refuel with -10# diesel
When the ambient temperature is lower than -5℃ and higher than or equal to
-14℃, refuel with -20# diesel
When the ambient temperature is lower than -14℃ and higher than or equal
to -29℃, refuel with -35# diesel
Caution!
○
i Do not operate the transfer switch of main and auxiliary fuel
tanks at will to avoid unnecessary times of switchover,
otherwise the fuel mixing incurred may affect engine starting.
264
Vehicle LNG supply system

(For details, see instructions on use and maintenance provided by the
manufacturer)
Warning!
-There is a danger.
- The LNG natural gas has an extremely low temperature under
ambient air pressure: -162 °C.
- Natural gas is an asphyxiating gas.
- Natural gas is a flammable gas.
-Non-professionals are not allowed to operate and maintain the
LNG gas supply system.
-Before maintenance work, the fuel gas in the carburettor, buffer
tank and pipeline must be depressurized and changed by
professionals.
265
Valve operation
The operation of LNG gas cylinder is relatively simple. During normal use
everyday, only 3 valves need to be operated by the user:
• Discharge valve ①: normally in the open state; Shut down it in case of failure; 1
The valve shall be reopened slowly to prevent the automatic cutout of excess
flow valve.
• Pressurized discharge valve ②: normally closed; When the storage pressure is
too low, it is necessary to open the pressurized discharge valve ② for self 放空
VENT 进液
pressurization, and open the air release valve ③ at the same time.
• Air release valve ③: open it when pressure relief is required in the gas cylinder. 2
Caution!
○
- When the vehicle is running, if the power is insufficient due to the 3
i carburettor and buffer tank frosting, pull over and stop the engine,
wait until the ice on the pipeline melted, and then close the
discharge cutout valve of the gas cylinder (do not close it
immediately).
- After the vehicle returns to the site or needs to stop for a long
time, it is necessary to confirm that there is no low-temperature
liquid fuel gas (no low temperature phenomena such as freezing
and frosting) in the pipeline before closing the discharge cutout
valve of the gas cylinder.
1
3
266
LNG filling
Regular filling
Regular filling of LNG is accomplished through an independent oil filling hose. The
filling steps are as follows:
• First, release the pressure in the cylinder to 0.6 ~ 0.9 MPa, and connect the gas
filling gun with the gas filling seat.
• Oil filling switch of the dispenser is then started, the liquid is injected through the
liquid intake pipe in the gas cylinder.
• When the liquid level reaches the rated position, the filling stops automatically.
Return filling
When the pressure in the gas cylinder is too high and it is difficult to add liquid,
return filling shall be carried out. The filling steps are as follows:
• Connect the gas filling gun to the gas filling seat of the gas cylinder, and the gas
return gun to the gas return seat of the gas cylinder.
• Open the air release valve, reduce the storage pressure below the pressure
required by the dispenser, and close the valve.
• Turn on the air pump for filling until the air dispenser stops automatically, and
remove the air filling gun and air return gun.
267
Caution!
-For a fully-filled gas cylinder, the pressure rises
○
i very rapid, which may cause the safety valve to open
frequently; Therefore, a fully-filled gas cylinder
should be put into use as soon as possible, and
long-term storage is prohibited.
- When the remaining liquid in the bottle exceeds 2/3,
try to avoid adding liquid.
Insulated cylinder filling

Generally, automotive LNG natural gas welded insulated gas
cylinders which are used before the first filling of LNG natural gas
and stop working for more than two weeks are called hot cylinders.
The filling steps are as follows:
• First, fill the gas cylinder with about 30 L of LNG , and keep it
stationary. In the course of the vaporization and pressure rise of
LNG in the gas cylinder, cool the liner of the gas cylinder liner.
• After the pressure in the air cylinder reaches the normal working
pressure, conduct an air-tight test for the system.
• After venting and reducing the pressure, the operation of filling or
venting and fillingcan be carried out regularly.
268
System maintenance
• To ensure the normal operation of the vehicle, the system shall be
checked regularly for tightness. If any fuel leakage is found, Requirements for regular maintenance
contact the SINOTRUK service station immediately for treatment.
Maintenance items Maintenance interval Maintenance method
• For a gas cylinder with vacuum failure, its pressure will rise
rapidly at a rate of about 0.1~0.4 MPa/h. This pressure change is Connecting nut on the
Before each trip
Visually observe if there is
very obvious, and the SINOTRUK service station shall be gas cylinder pipeline any leakage
contacted immediately for treatment. Carburettor 12 months Clean the scale on the coil
• Please remove or replace the components and parts or accept
Every 7,500 km or 2 Check for shutdown
other after-sales treatment in the SINOTRUK service station. Valve
months condition and leakage
Precautions
Send it to the local technical
Under severe road conditions, drive the car at a low speed, Safety valve 12 months supervision department for
otherwise it may cause fatigue damage to the gas cylinder support verification
structure, resulting in safety accidents such as gas cylinder Send it to the local technical
leakage. Pressure gauge 6 months supervision department for
verification
Vacuum degree of the

12 months Pressure test
gas cylinder
Spot check for leakage

Every 7,500 km or 2 Airtightness test or leakage
at each connection
months detection
point of the system
Replacement period of fuel gas hose

It is recommended to replace it every two years.
269
Fuel gas indication

Display the remained fuel in the gas cylinder.
When the fuel gas level in the fuel gas tank is too low (the liquid level display of the
fuel gas level gauge ① is in the red area), the instrument will light up the low fuel
gas warning lamp ② to remind the driver to add fuel gas in time.
270
Natural gas leakage alarm

Natural gas
Leakage alarm When the natural gas leakage reaches the set alarm concentration, the alarm ③
will give audible and visual alarms.
According to the use environment of this product, spot check should be conducted
regularly to ensure safety. The spot check period is 1~3 months, and the content is
to check whether the alarm host and detector work normally. The impact from the
artificially high-concentration natural gas should be avoided for the detector,
otherwise the sensitivity of the gas sensitive element will be reduced temporally.
Avoid silicon composition material pollution during use to prevent damage to the
detector! In case of natural gas leakage and audible and visual alarm from the
main unit, stop the vehicle as soon as possible, turn off the power supply, find the
Green - normal 3 leakage point immediately, and take measures such as valve closing and
Yellow light - fault
Red light - leakage ventilation. It is strictly forbidden to plug and unplug the connectors between the
alarm host and the detector in power-on state, otherwise the internal chip of the
system may be damaged Damaged or failed sensors in the detector must not be
replaced by yourself and shall be handled by contacting a SINOTRUK service
station.
271
CNG supply system for vehicles

Composition of CNG system
The CNG fuel gas system consists of gas cylinder and gas cylinder valves,
integrated control assembly, high and low pressure filters, low pressure solenoid
valve, gas cylinder pipeline, etc.
Gas cylinder and valves of gas cylinder
Before starting the engine, make sure that the gas cylinder valve ① is opened.
The fusible plug and the rupture disk is integrated in the valve of the gas cylinder,
which ensures that the pressure can be released in time under the conditions of
high temperature and overpressure of the gas cylinder; The overcurrent protective
device in the valve of the gas cylinder ensures that the pipeline can be cut off in 1
time when the gas supply system leaks.
High/low-pressure filter assembly
The high-pressure filter assembly ② and low-pressure filter assembly ③ can
effectively filter the moisture and impurities in the natural gas, so as to better
protect the engine.
272
Integrated control assembly

6 The integrated control assembly includes stop valve V1 ④, stop valve V2 ⑤,
barometer ⑥ and inflation port ⑦.
• Stop valve V1 represents the gas-filling cut-off valve, which shall be opened
during inflation and closed after inflation.
• Stop valve V2 represents the air supply stop valve, which should be opened
5 before the vehicle is in service and closed during vehicle maintenance and
long-term shutdown.
• The barometer displays the gas pressure of the system.
7 4
Low pressure solenoid valve

The low-pressure solenoid valve ⑧ is used to block the flow of natural gas. The
valve is normally closed and the solenoid valve is opened when energized.
273
High pressure reducer

See the section of "Engine".
Inflation of t he CNG system

• When using gas, the operation procedures shall be strictly implemented to
ensure that the pressure in the gas cylinder is above 5 MPa. If the storage
pressure is lower than 5 MPa, inflation shall be considered. If the pressure of the
gas cylinder is lower than 2.5 MPa, inflation shall be carried out immediately.
• The CNG gas used in the vehicle shall meet the requirements of the national
standard GB 18047 Compressed Natural Gas as Vehicle Fuel.
Caution!
○
-During inflation, the engine shall be shut down and the power
i supply shall be disconnected.
-Since the vehicle will release a lot of heat during the inflation
process, the temperature of the inflated gas is high, so the
pressure of the gas will drop after sufficient cooling, which is
normal.
274
Operating specifications When the vehicle is running, if there is a large amount of leakage
Drivers of CNG vehicles should receive professional technical of the natural gas due to the rupture of the natural gas pipeline or
trainings and be familiar with the use, maintenance and safety the loosening of the cutting ferrule, pull over and stop the vehicle
requirements of natural gas engines, especially should have a immediately, cut off the power supply and close all air route
deep understanding of the natural gas system to ensure normal valves, and then troubleshoot it.
use and safe operation. If the gas leakage is serious and the excess flow valve fails, and
Inspection before driving the stop valve of the gas cylinder cannot be closed, the personnel
shall be evacuated, the site shall be isolated, the fire source shall
Generally, after parking the vehicle at night, record the indicated be isolated, and it shall be reported to the local fire fighting,
pressure value of the integrated panel barometer, observe the transportation and other relevant departments, and the treatment
indicated pressure of the barometer again before driving the shall be carried out after the natural gas is cleared.
vehicle the next day, and observe whether there is an obvious
decrease between the two to verify whether there is gas leakage In the event of a fire in the vehicle, immediately turn off the
in the natural gas system. If the air pressure drops obviously, the master power switch, close all air route valves as much as
leakage part should be found and eliminated. possible and give an immediate alarm.
Caution! During inflation, the engine shall be shut down and the power
supply shall be disconnected.
○
i The instrument in the cab shows the proportion of the
compressed gas remaining in the gas cylinder, which
is not the actual pressure. The actual pressure shall be
subject to the indicated pressure of the barometer of
integrated panel.
Handling of problems that occur during driving

When the circulating water temperature of the engine is normal,
the reducer will not be frosted or blocked by ice. In cold winter,
thin frost may be attached to the surface of the reducer, but it will
not affect the normal operation.
When the car is running, if gas leakage or loud noise is found,
stop the car immediately for inspection, and then continue driving
after troubleshooting.
Emergency handling of faults that occur during driving
275
Requ
irements for stopping the car whether all components and parts are installed securely, whether
When the driver leaves the car or temporarily stops the car for more the pipeline clamp is fastened, whether the pipeline interferes with
than 10 minutes, the power shall be turned off and the engine shall other parts, and eliminate the existing problems.
be shut down. 10,000 km maintenance
Only the gas leak detector, soapy water or other non-corrosive Check the decompression regulator for leakage; Check whether
foaming water is allowed for leak detection, and leak detection with the outlet pressure of the decompression regulator is normal, and
open flame is strictly prohibited. whether the pressure relief valve of decompression regulator works
During the vehicle maintenance, it is strictly forbidden to knock or normally.
collide with the natural gas system device, and keep away from the
fire source for more than 10 m. It is strictly prohibited for the vehicle 50,000 km maintenance
to operate under the condition where the device is faulty or air
leakage exists in the system. Test the performance of the decompression regulator. If the
performance cannot be restored to the level when the
Before starting the engine, slowly open the valve of each air supply decompression regulator leaves the factory, the decompression
air route to prevent the excess flow valve from working. regulator shall be replaced; Check the circulating water hose for
Maintenance damage and deterioration.
Routine maintenance See the Natural Gas Engine section in Vehicle Maintenance for the
In addition to routine maintenance according to the vehicle maintenance of the high pressure filter and low pressure filter.
maintenance requirements, the user shall also carry out routine Replacement period of fuel gas hose
maintenance for the natural gas system according to the following It is recommended to replace it every two years.
specifications. The higher level items include all items of the
previous level. Precautions
5,000 km maintenance It is strictly forbidden to disassemble and replace the natural gas
supply system components without permission.
Check all the high and low pressure pipe joints, air route valves,
pressure reducing regulators, and other components and parts of Fill in and maintain driving records related to the natural gas system
the system of natural gas device for air leakage or damage. Check for reference during service.
276
Air filter
Air filter
Dry-type air filter
Warning!
- The engine must stop working when replacing the filter element,
and it is forbidden to clean it with oil or water.
- Cleaning the safety filter element is not allowed.
-Do not open the air filter unless necessary to reduce the risk that
contaminants enter the clean air side.
-When replacing the filter element, be sure to replace it with the
ones from the original factory.
- When replacing the filter element, ensure that the filter element is
not damaged and its clean air side is free of dirt.
Maintenance period
When the blockage alarm indicator of the air filter on the instrument panel lights up,
the following maintenance shall be carried out on the air filter:
• For vehicles without oil-bath air filters, replace the main filter element of dry-air
filter with a new one.
• For vehicles equipped with oil-bath air filter, the steel wire filter element in the oil
filter shall be cleaned first, and a dry air filter main filter element shall be
replaced whenever the oil-bath air filter is maintained three times.
• Replace the main filter element of dry-type air filter with a new one when the
main filter element has been taken out for 5 times.
277
Air filter
Cleaning method
• Shut off the engine and apply the parking brake.
• Tilting the cab (refer to "cab tilting mechanism").
• Loosen elastic clip ② of end cover ① of the air filter, remove the end cover,
and remove the internal dust and wipe it clean. 1 2
• Pull out the main filter element, clean the dust inside the air filter housing with a
brush or dust collector and wipe it clean.
• Mark "√" on the number of maintenances at the tail of the safety filter element
filter element every time the main filter element is withdrawn, and one safety
filter element filter element shall be replaced whenver the main filter element is
withdrawn for five times. If dust accumulation is found on the safety filter element,
replace the safety filter element with a new one immediately (remove the safety
filter element by turning it counterclockwise).
• After the cleaning, carefully check whether the filter paper is broken and whether 3
the end-face sealant is cracked. If either of the phenomenon mentioned above
occurred, the filter element shall be replaced with a new one.
• After the above inspections are completed and no error is found, press the filter
element into the housing according to the correct position, cover the sealing end
cover and press the surrounding elastic clips.
• Finally, focus on checking whether the air inlet pipeline seal after air filter is intact,
especially whether the hose clamp is loose and the tube wall is worn, so as to
prevent unfiltered air from directly entering the engine.
Cleaning dust bag
The dust bag ③ shall be cleaned as required, and the dust bag shall be cleaned
every day in winter and under dusty conditions. The dust bag should be replaced in
time when it falls off or is damaged, otherwise it will cause early wear of the engine
and supercharger.
278
Air filter
Oil-bath air filter
○
i Caution!
- The new car is not filled with engine oil before leaving the factory.
- Engine oil needs to be filled before the vehilce is put into
operation. The model of the engine oil to be filled is the same as
that of the engine oil.
- When filling the engine oil, the oil depth shall not exceed 30 mm
or the oil charge shall not exceed 4 L. Do not fill excessive engine
oil.
If the engine oil is not easy to flow when the bottom housing is
shaken, the filter element needs to be cleaned and changed. It
shall be checked every day if the condition of use is particularly
severe. Under normal circumstances, it can be used continuously
for 80~150 hours. The filter element can be used for a long time
without replacement.
-In daily off-running, check whether connecting bolt or drag hook
between the housing and the bottom shell is loose and tighten
them as required.
- For vehicles equipped with an oil-bath air filter, after driving in
rainy days, check the oil sump for accumulated water in time. If
there is accumulated water, clean it up in time.
279
Air filter
Steps of strip inspection and cleaning

• Open the upper and lower housing locking devices.
• Remove the oil sump and fill 4 L of engine oil or the depth of the oil layer reaches
30 mm.
280
Air filter
• Clean the lower filter element assembly

Clean the fan blade surface and filter element of the lower filter element assembly
with diesel, until they are clean by visual inspection.
• Wash the upper filter element assembly.

The cleaning method is the same as that for lower filter element assembly.
281
Air filter
• Assemble filter element assembly

Install the upper filter element first, then install the lower filter element, and finally
tighten them with rubber pad, flat washer and butterfly nut.
• Assemble the lower housing

Fix the oiled lower housing firmly with a drag hook.
282
Electrical system
Electrical system Connection sequence: first positive pole, then negative pole.
For safety reasons, disconnect the battery or the main switch of the • If the vehicle is not used for a long time, charge it every four
battery before the electrical system is repaired. weeks.
Warning! • Make sure that only the correct measuring equipment is used to
Hydrogen and oxygen mixture will be formed in the measure the voltage.
closed battery box. When the battery terminal is • To avoid short circuit, the input resistance of measuring
disconnected, electrical equipment or monitoring equipment shall be at least 10 MΩ.
device in operation will generate a spark, which will
ignite the gas. Before the battery terminal is • The ignition switch shall be switched off before the electronic
disconnected, the battery box shall be dried by control unit plug is disconnected and connected.
compressed air or cleaned. • The plug or socket shall be replaced when there is obvious
rusting or visible cracks.
• When washing the car:
Protect the socket, starter and electric generator from moisture
(splashing). The sockets of the tractor and trailer shall be cleaned
• Do not start the engine unless the battery connection is tight. with 6-8 bar compressed air and no water or mechanical items
• Do not disconnect the battery while the engine is running. shall be used.
• Conduct traction start only when battery is connected and is During the cleaning, the key switch and lighting circuits shall be
partially charged at. Refer to "Traction and Traction Start ". turned off.
• Do not jump start the vehicle with a charger. • If the vehicle is equipped with AC generator and 400 V
three-phase AC socket (such as refrigerator vehicle),
• Disconnect the positive and negative poles before charging.
the compressed air can only be used for cleaning after the engine
Disconnection sequence: first negative pole, then positive pole.
and external power supply are turned off.
283
Electrical system
• When conducting electrowelding, the following provisions shall be followed:

-Disconnect the battery and connect the disassembled positive and negative cables.
-Do not use other power sources except DC power supply, and check whether the
polarity of electrode is correct.
- Turn on the mechanical master switch of battery.
- Electromagnetic switch connectors shall not be connected to the storage battery.
Disconnect or remove these cables and connect them together.
- Keep the ground wire of welding equipment as close to the welding area as
possible, and ground it in a place with good electric conduction.
- Do not place the cable of the welding equipment parallel to the vehicle cable.
- The welded part is in good contact to ensure good electroconductibility, e. g.
pressing the weldments together with the negative clip of the welding equipment.
• The battery boxes of cargo trucks, dump trucks and concrete mixers are reserved
with electricity takeoff connector for position lamps of the upperstructure, and the
power on one side shall be less than 100 W.
Warning!
Users shall not add electrical equipment for vehicles or change the
electrical circuit on their own, otherwise the vehicle electrical
system may fail, which may lead to serious consequences!
284
Lighting
Lighting
Replace the bulb
Turn off the faulty electrical equipment before replacing the bulb.
Do not touch the bulb glass with bare fingers.
Before installing a new bulb, make sure that the identification label on the bottom
of the new bulb is same with that of the old one.
285
Lighting
Headlamp
After the high beam and the low beam are replaced, the headlamp settings shall
be checked.
Caution!
○
i Do not touch the bulb glass with bare fingers!
Causes of fogging of lamps

When the headlamp is lit, a large amount of heat will be generated, which needs to
be dissipated through the air breather. At the same time, the external humid gas
may also enter the lamp from the air breather, and fog will be generated during the
exchange of cold and hot air. This phenomenon usually occurs in winter, rainy
season or climatic areas with high humidity.
In this case, if the fog disappears automatically within 45 minutes after the
headlamp is on, it shall be regarded as normal.
286
Cleaning and maintenance of vehicles

Regular professional maintenance can maintain the value of your Warning!
vehicle. When using the vapor cleaner, do not spray water
Car washing directly into the steering knuckle.
Warning!
If the vehicle is equipped with high-voltage electrical • In winter, the vehicle shall be washed more frequently.
system (working voltage exceeds 24 V), the engine shall
• Do not spray paint on and apply oil to the brake line, or use
be shut down before washing the vehicle.
gasoline, benzene, mineral oil, etc on the brake line. In particular,
do not make the brake hose come into contact with spray or
lubricating grease.
• Wash the vehicle only in a well-equipped cleaning place, and take
measures to avoid polluting the environment.
• In the first few weeks, new cars and newly painted cars can only
be washed with clean water, and a vapor cleaner cannot be used
for the first six weeks.
• The sponge used for car washing shall be washed frequently.
• Don't expose the vehicle to the sunlight when washing it.
• Clean wheels and wheel housings with a brush and water.
• Cleaning solvent or special cleaner can be used to flush alloy
wheels according to the degree of fouling.
• Do not spray water on the device under operating temperature.
• Do not wet the AC generator and starter
• If using the vapor cleaner, the manufacturer's operating
requirements shall be strictly observed, and the distance between
the nozzle and the paint work surface shall be kept at least 30
cm.
287
Maintenance of paint coat

• For minor paint damage, it shall be repainted immediately.
• Protect paint coats against corrosion in a timely manner.
Rearview mirror
• Clean the dirty mirror surface with a glass cleaner.
Clean the inside of the cab
• Clean the steering wheel, gearshift lever, dirty interior and carpet with warm
water and cleaner solution. Do not use detergent.
• Use alcohol to clean off the oil stain (do not use gasoline)
• Wash the curtain with the flexible cleaning agent at a temperature below 30 ℃.
• Wash the safety belt with warm water and soap, and do not use soapless.
• In frost weather, handle the door and window seals with talcum powder to
prevent the door and window from freezing together with the seal strip.
Clean and maintain the seat and berth
• Clean the plastic part (e.g. belt, bracket, control level) with a damp cloth or, if it is
heavily soiled, clean it with a solvent cleaning agent (e.g. washing fluid).
• Clean the interior and cushion with a piece of wet cleaning cloth, or with dry foam
and soft brush.
288
List of dirts
The substances listed in the table below can be purchased from chemical or special stores. Do not spill these substances on the surface of
the material. The following treatment methods are based on experience. Each substance can be tried in a more hidden place first, and we will
not be liable for any damage.
Water-soluble dirt
Type of dirt Cleaner Treatment method
Apply the reagent to a soft cotton cloth until the dirt

begins to dissolve. Do not wipe hard, otherwise the
Blood stains, eggs, excrement, urine stains Cold water, shampoo, foam solvent for carpets
surface will be damaged. If necessary, wipe from the
outside to the center, and then rinse with clean water.
Fatty substances, vomit, coffee with cream, hot Warm water, shampoo, liquid foam for carpets,
Ditto
chocolate, lipstick, mayonnaise, milk, ice cream benzene, stain remover
Warm water, shampoo, solvent such as

Ordinary alcohol, beer, fizzy drinks, fruit juices,
benzene, methylated solvent and stain Ditto
lemonade, fruit, white wine, sugary solutions
remover, can be used only after the dirt is dry.
289
Water-insoluble dirt
Type of dirt Cleaner Treatment method
A) Apply the reagent to a soft cotton cloth. Until the

Butter, polishing paste, pigment (bright) Cleaning agent, stain remover, shampoo dirt begins to dissolve. Do not wipe hard, otherwise
grease, varnish, resin, carbon, nail polish, oil, the surface will be damaged. If necessary, wipe from
paint, soot, tar the outside to the center, and then rinse with clean
water.
Paraffin, stearin candle Benzene, scrape it off as much as possible Ditto
It sprays. Knock it down with a hard object (hammer)

Chewing gum It ices and sprays.
to break it into pieces
15% sodium fluoride is dissolved in water, with a

Rusting Use according to instructions A)
spoonful for every 100 ml of water.
290
Chapter V Vehicle Maintenance
291
Engine
Engine
MC11/MC13 diesel engine
Lubrication system maintenance
Aftermarket special engine oil for MC National VI Series engines:
Super long-life special engine oil 10W-40 for SINOTRUK National VI engines
Caution!
○
i The GB17691 clearly stipulates that during the warranty period,
the user shall keep the material certificates which prove that
oils and reactant meeting the requirements of national
standards (e. G. certificate from a formal gas station within 1
year, reactant sales certificate from a formal sales store) are
used. To ensure your legitimate rights and interests, please be
sure to comply with the regulations, and keep relevant
voucher.
292
Engine
Engine oil specification and drain interval

Quality Oil and oil
Oil grade and quantity Mileage or time for the Mileage or time between
Assembly Remarks
name viscidity first change two oil changes
grade 1)
Over-the-road truck 2): Over-the-road truck 2): 1. Engine oil for any
other engines (including
Light load conditions: Light load conditions:
MC National V, WD615
120,000 km or 12 months; 120,000 km or 12 months;
and D12) shall not be
Medium load condition: Medium load condition: used for MC (National
90,000 km or 12 months; 90,000 km or 12 months; VI) engines; Otherwise,
Heavy load condition: Heavy load condition: it will cause serious
40,000 km or 12 months; 40,000 km or 12 months; damage to the engine
MC-Ⅱ and after-treatment
10W-40 Whichever comes first Whichever comes first system within a short
Q/ZZ21037 time, for which the
super 42 L (first Dump truck, fire fighting Dump truck, fire fighting SINOTRUK only
long-term replenishment) truck, pump truck: truck, pump truck: provides paid service.
National Engine
Engine MC13/MC13H special 40 L (refilling 40,000 km or 1,000 hours 40,000 km or 1,000 hours
VI oil 2. Taking the formal
engine oil without replacing (working hours) or 12 (working hours) or 12 commercial (National
10W-40 for the filter element) months, whichever comes months, whichever comes VI) fuel of CNPC and
SINOTRUK first first Sinopec as the
National VI standard, if the quality
engines of the fuel does not
Mine car (non-road, Mine car (non-road, meet the standard, the
III/IV-stage), engines for III/IV-stage), engines for oil change mileage
lifting purposes: lifting purposes: should be reduced
1,000 hours (working hours) 1,000 hours (working accordingly.
or 12 months, whichever hours) or 12 months, 3. The oil filter element
comes first whichever comes first must be replaced when
changing the engine oil.
Note: 1) The oil and oil quantity in the table are only for reference, and the actual consumption shall prevail;
2) For over-the-road trucks, when the average fuel consumption is less than 32 L/100 km, the drain period for the light load condition shall be followed; When
the average fuel consumption is 32 ~ 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the medium load condition shall be followed; When the average fuel consumption is
greater than 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the heavy load condition shall be followed.
293
Engine
Quality grade Oil and oil

Oil quantity Mileage or time for the first Mileage or time between
Assembly and viscidity Remarks
name change two oil changes
grade 1)
Over-the-road truck 2):

Light load condition:
110,000 km or 12 months ; Light load condition:
110,000 km or 12 months ; 1. Engine oil for any
Medium load condition Medium load condition: other engines (including
80,000 km or 12 months; 80,000 km or 12 months; MC National V, WD615
Heavy load condition: Heavy load condition and D12) shall not be
40,000 km or 12 months; 40,000 km or 12 months, used for MC (National
whichever comes first. VI) engines; Otherwise,
Whichever comes first it will cause serious
damage to the engine
MC-Ⅱ Coach bus: Coach bus: and after-treatment
10W-40
50,000 km or 12 months, 50,000 km or 12 months, system within a very
Q/ZZ21037
whichever comes first whichever comes first short time, for which the
super 42 L (first
SINOTRUK only
National long-term replenishment)
Engine Dump truck, municipal Dump truck, municipal provides paid service.
Engine MC11/MC11H special 40 L (refilling
VI oil vehicles (sanitation, vehicles (sanitation,
engine oil without replacing 2. Taking the formal
10W-40 for the filter element) firefighting, wrecker), firefighting, wrecker), commercial (National
SINOTRUK buses: buses: VI) fuel of CNPC and
National VI 40,000 km or 1,000 hours 40,000 km or 1,000 hours Sinopec as the
engines (working hours) or 12 (working hours) or 12 standard, if the quality of
months, whichever comes months, whichever comes the fuel does not meet
first first the standard, the oil
change mileage should
Concrete mixer, mine car Concrete mixer, mine car be reduced accordingly.
(non-road, III/ IV-stage), (non-road, III/ IV-stage), 3. The oil filter element
engines and pump trucks engines and pump trucks must be replaced when
for lifting purposes : for lifting purposes : changing the engine oil.
1,000 hours (working 1,000 hours (working
hours) or 12 months, hours) or 12 months,
whichever comes first whichever comes first
2) For over-the-road trucks, when the average fuel consumption is less than 32 L/100 km, the drain period for the light load condition shall be followed; When
the average fuel consumption is 32 ~ 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the medium load condition shall be followed; When the average fuel consumption is
greater than 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the heavy load condition shall be followed.
Engine
294
Change the engine oil
The engine oil can only be changed after the diesel engine is in a horizontal
position and has been shut down for at least 10 minutes.
• Place a suitable oil receiving container under the diesel engine.
• Unscrew and remove the drain plug ② on the oil sump ① to drain the
used oil.
• After installing a new composite sealing ring ③, screw in the drain plug ②.
The tightening torque is 80 Nm.
1 3
Install a new oil filter element
• Loosen the oil filter cover ① and keep it stationary for two minutes.
• Pull oil filter cover ①, sealing ring ② and oil filter element ③ out of the oil 2
filter housing ④. 1
• Remove the old sealing ring ②.
• Apply a little engine oil to the new sealing ring ② and put it into the sealing
2
groove of the oil filter cover ①.
• Insert new filter element ③ into the oil filter cover ① as preassembly.
• Insert the oil filter housing ④ and tighten the oil filter cover with a tightening
torque of 40 + 10 Nm (if the torque is too large, the filter cover may break).
3
Note: The oil filter element should be replaced every time the engine oil
is changed.
Engine
295
Warning!
Special engine oil and oil filter element for MC engines shall be
used, otherwise early engine wear will be caused, and
SINOTRUK only provides paid service!
Filling engine oil

Refer to "Inspection and maintenance before starting engine".
Check the oil level
Caution!
○
- Oils of different grades are not allowed to be mixed.
i - Oils of the same grade from different manufacturers are
compatible with each other and can be mixed for use.
Engine
296
Fuel system maintenance
Diesel specifications 1
The diesel shall comply with the provisions of GB 19147. The diesel grades
include No. 5, No. 0, No. -10, No. -20, No. -35 and No. -50. Appropriate diesel
grade shall be selected according to the temperature of the service
environment (in general, the selected diesel grade shall be 5 ℃~10 ℃ lower
than the service temperature).
2
Replace the fuel filter element
• Loosen the fuel filter cover ①, keep it stationary for two minutes, unscrew
the water drain valve ⑤, and drain the fuel filter.
• Retighten water drain valve ⑤ to 3 Nm.
• Remove the filter cover ① and the fuel filter element ③.
3
• Pull fuel filter element ③ out of the fuel filter cover ①.
• Remove sealing ring ②.
• Apply a small amount of diesel to the new sealing ring ② and assemble it
on the fuel filter cover ①. Then insert the new filter element ③ into the 4
upper cover ① as the preassembly. Finally, screw them into the filter
housing together with a tightening torque of 25+5 Nm.
Engine
297
Cooling system maintenance
Coolant specification and drain interval
The coolant of MC-series diesel engines: BASF G48-24 -35 ℃ operating fluid produced by Changchun Delian Chemical Co., Ltd.
For the first maintenance of the vehicle, it is not required to change the coolant, and the recommended change period is shown in the
following table:
Mileage or time
Coolant refill
Assembly Name Coolant level between two oil Remarks
capacity 1)
changes
Coolant for any other engines (including WD615,

-35 ℃ operating fluid-I type Vehicle driving of D12) shall not be used for MC engines;
Q/ZZ21007 (coolant special for 200,000 km or 4 Otherwise, it will cause corrosion to the engine
MC11/MC13 Coolant 42-48L cooling system within a very short time, for
SINOTRUK MC/MT engines years, whichever
-35 ℃) comes first. which the SINOTRUK only provides paid service.
Note: 1) If the vehicle is equipped with a gearbox with a retarder, the coolant refill capacity shall be subject to the actual refill capacity.
If the coolant becomes cloudy or brownish, change it immediately.
Coolant drain
• Place a container with proper capacity under the oil module ①.
• Unscrew draining screw plug ② and composite seal gasket ③ to empty
the coolant.
• Install a new composite seal gasket ③, tighten the screw plug ②, and the
1 tightening torque is 80 + 10 Nm.
• Dispose of the discharged coolant in a correct manner.
Engine
298
Warning!
-Special coolant for SINOTRUK MC engines should be used,
otherwise it will cause engine damage, SINOTRUK only
provide paid service.
-It is forbidden to use water to replace the coolant.
-Gas in the coolant shall be exhausted completely, otherwise
the water pump will be damaged.
299
Engine
Check and replace the poly V-belt (common to other models)

Check the poly V-belt and automatic tensioning wheel
2
Check the alignment metric of whole gear train: in case of off tracking, adjust it in
time and find out the reason. 1
Check the poly V-belt for crack, oil stain, sintering, wear, abnormal sound, etc; If
the poly V-belt is damaged or has abnormal wear, please replace it in time.
Check the performance of tensioning wheel.
Check the rotation flexibility of the rocker arm of the tensioning wheel, ensuring it
can recover automatically.
Check the rotation flexibility of the pulley bearing of the tensioning wheel.
Check whether other structural members of the tensioning wheel are intact.
If any abnormality occurs, replace the tensioning wheel.
Check the belt tension
The poly V-belt tensioning wheel is under spring tension and is maintenance-free.
If the belt cannot be tensioned, further check whether it is caused by tensioning wheel failure or excessive belt extension, and replace it in
time.
Engine
300
Replace with a new poly V-belt (common to other models)
Use the wrench to turn the bolt of the tensioning wheel ② counterclockwise
2 to the stopper position and fix it.
2
1 Remove the old belt, replace it with a new belt ①, and confirm the installation
position of the belt.
The automatic tensioning wheel ② slowly returns to its original position until it
contacts new belt.
Check the contact surface of the belt again.
Replacement cycle of poly V-belt and tensioning wheel
1 Poly V-belt: when the vehicle travels for 2 years or 200,000 km, whichever
comes first;
Poly V-belt (air-conditioning compressor): 1 year or 80000 km, whichever
comes first.
Engine
301
Exhaust aftertreatment system of Sinotruk national VI diesel engine (universal to other models)
Fuel
In order to meet the requirements of National VI emission regulations, the injection Adblue
post-processing system of National VI diesel engine of Sinotruk adopts the unit (IU) injection
Differential
unit
technical route of oxidizing catalytic converter (DOC) + diesel particulate filler Tempe Tempe pressure
(DPF) + selective catalytic reduction converter (SCR) + ammonia slip catalyst rature rature sensor
Tempe
sensor sensor
(ASC). rature
sensor
Nitroge Nitroge
n n
oxygen oxygen
sensor sensor
Front exhaust temperature

There are 2 nitrogen oxygen sensors, 4 exhaust temperature sensors, 1 sensor of SCR
differential pressure sensor, 1 PM sensor and 1 adblue nozzle on the Sinotruk Adblue
nozzle Rear
National VI postprocessors. The installation positions for sensors and adblue exhaust
nozzle on the postprocessor are shown in the figure. temperature
sensor of
SCR
DPF differential
pressure sensor PM sensor
Front exhaustUpstream NOx Upstream NOx

Downstream
temperature sensorsensor sensor NOx sensor
of DPF
Engine
302
DPF system operating the button of DPF active regeneration to realize DPF
The DPF system is mainly composed of the HCI injection system, parking regeneration of the vehicle.
the DOC assembly and the DPF assembly.
The diesel engine exhaust contains inhalable particles, which is a
serious threat to human health. The National VI emission standards
not only impose stricter restrictions on the particulate mass (PM),
but also impose requirements on the particulate quantity (PN). The
National VI diesel engine of Sinotruck adopts a diesel particulate
filter (DPF) that meets the National VI emission regulations.
The DPF is a bag-type diesel particulate filter of wall-flow structure.
The working principle is: When the exhaust gas flows through the
honeycomb bag type diesel particulate filter, the air flow passes
through the wall while the particles are left in the bag, so most of
the particles are trapped in this way. Particulate capture occurs
continuously. The particulate in the DPF will accumulate and
eventually blocked the DPF, and the carbon particulate must be
removed by the means of regeneration.
DPF regeneration
DPF regeneration mode is divided into passive regeneration and
active regeneration. The regeneration strategy of the DPF of the
post-processing system for Sinotruk National VI engines is based
on passive regeneration, supplemented by active regeneration.
DPF active regeneration does not occur continuously. Only when
the driving mileage of the vehicle or the weight of the particulates
trapped reaches the limit value, the ECU controls the fuel injection
device to inject a certain amount of fuel into the exhaust pipe, which
is oxidized under the action of diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) and
generates a high temperature, burning off the carbon particulates
accumulated on the DPF, thus achieving DPF regeneration. DPF
active regeneration modes can be divided into two types: driving
regeneration and parking regeneration. Driving regeneration
means that the vehicle driver does not need to perform any
operation on the vehicle, and when the regeneration activation
conditions are met, the ECU automatically controls the
regeneration activation; The parking regeneration refers to
Engine
303
The DPF regeneration operation interface consists of 4 indicators and 1 button switch. See the table on the next page for details.
DPF regeneration state indicator is used to remind the driver of high exhaust temperatures during regeneration activation and to drive
and operate safely.
The DPF carbon loading status indicator, reminding the driver that the conditions (medium and high load) for activating regeneration
for the vehicle are met.
The DPF carbon loading status indicator, reminding the driver that regeneration should be conducted as soon as possible.
Serious DPF carbon loading indicator indicates that the carbon loading is too large to regenerate and the DPF needs to be processed
at the service station.
The DPF parking regeneration button is used to activate the parking regeneration.
The DPF regeneration prohibition button is used to prohibit the DPF active regeneration.
Engine
304
When an ordinary high-speed tractor is running, the DPF carbon deposit and lighting regeneration strategy can be classfied into four modes.
Note: The DPF lighting and regeneration strategy for special vehicles are subject to the instructions for special vehicles.
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4
A lot of carbon deposit, it is

More carbon deposit, the vehicle Too many carbon
Amount of carbon Less carbon deposit, no need to required to activate the
automatically activates the active deposit to activate
deposition activate active regeneration active regeneration
regeneration active regeneration
immediately
OFF Always on Always on Flash
OFF OFF Always on OFF
OFF OFF OFF Always on
To be completed on the
same day: continuous
If conditions permit, select continuous Please go to the
Operation requirements operation for more than 40
None operation for more than 40 min under service station for
for drivers min or parking regeneration
high-speed and high-load conditions processing
under high-speed and
high-load conditions
It is used during parking regeneration. When the DPF needs to be regenerated, the vehicle should be idling
in Neutral. After the water temperature meets the conditions, press this switch for 8 s and release it to enter Invalid Operation
the parking regeneration mode
It flashes when the regeneration is activated, indicating that the exhaust pipe temperature is very high and
attention should be paid to safe driving and operation.
Engine
305
Mode 1: Indicates that there are fewer carbon deposit and no need to activate the regeneration. At this time, the driving regeneration is not
automatically activated, but the parking regeneration can be activated by the button of the parking regeneration.
Mode 2: There has been a lot of carbon deposition and regeneration can be
activated, which indicates that the carbon deposit status indi cator is activated.
During normal driving, if the vehicle operating conditions reach the conditions for
activating regeneration, the active regeneration regeneration will be automatically
activated, and the instrument indicator li ght up to remind the driver that
exhaust pipe temperature is high and attention should be paid to driving safety.
The parking regeneration button can also be used to ac tivate the parking
regeneration.
Mode 3: When the instrument board indicator is lit at the same time, it
means that there is a lot of carbon deposit in DPF. If no active regeneration is
conducted, too much carbon deposit in DPF will eventually make it impossible to
perform active regeneration . Remind the driver to conduct parking regeneration
immediately after stopping the operation. When regeneration is activated by
us ing the parking regeneration button, the instrument panel indic ator
lights up to remind the driver to caution high temperature operation.
Mode 4: If the regeneration operation is still not carried out in time after Mode 3, or
the regeneration operation is incomplete, Mode 4 will be activated, and two
l ights will b e lit to remind the driver that the active regeneration is
prohibited, which needs to be handled in the service station. At this time, the active
regeneration is prohibited and the regeneratio n button is in the invalid state.
Engine
306
Parking regeneration triggered The parking regeneration shall be continued for a period from about
To trigger the parking regeneration, the following conditions must 45 minutes to 60 minutes. Be sure to reserve enough working time
be met: before triggering the parking regeneration.
The amount of carbon deposition in the DPF meets the condition of Parking regeneration stopped
regeneration and does not exceed the upper limit. The severe After the parking regeneration, the regeneration mode will be
automatically exited, and the carbon deposit will be cleared to zero,
carbon loadi ng indicator is extinguished; and the code light indicating carbon deposit and the light indicating
- Idling speed of engine with the vehicle in neutral and parked. the regeneration status will be automatically extinguished, and the
engine speed will automatically return to low idle speed after the
- Press the parking regeneration switch for 8 seconds and regeneration. Try to avoid controlling engine flameout and other
then release it. operations during regeneration, unless the danger will occur when
the engine is not shut down or other operations are not conducted.
After the parking regeneration is triggered, the ECU automatically
The exhaust temperature is very high during the regeneration
controls to increase the speed of the diesel engine to raise the
process, and the sudden flameout will prevent the heat from
exhaust temperature . When the exhaust temperature rises to a
dissipation. If it is necessary to stop working in the regeneration
reasonable temperature, the ECU controls the HCI system to inject
atomized diesel into the exhaust. The diesel is oxidized in the DOC process, press the parking regenera tion switch for 10 seconds,
to generate a lot of heat, and the exhaust temperature rises above or step on the brake/clutch/accelerator to exit parking regeneration
directly.
600°C. At this time, the regeneration state indi cator keeps
flashing to remind the driver to caution operation safety.
Engine
307
Caution!
○
i - After the indicator signalling serious carbon load of DPF is shown on the inst rument, in order to prevent the
DPF from being fused, the active regeneration will be stopped. At this time, the engine has a regeneration-related
fault and enters the deashing mode, and the engine shall be brought to the service station for deashing.
- To ensure the normal operation of the DPF, the DPF needs to be conducted with reverse deashing periodically.
- After entering the regeneration state, the idling speed of engine will increase to 800 r/min.
- The active regeneration may be interrupted during low speed operation, but will restart when the speed and load
increase again.
Warning!
- The exhaust temperature is high during active regeneration, so regeneration in a gas station, high dust, or other
inflammable and explosive dangerous chemicals-containing areas is prohibited.
-The Regeneration Prohibited bu tton is used in special occasions. For example, when the vehicle enters gas
station, high dust or other areas containing inflammable and explosive dangerous chemicals, the driver needs to
press this button in advance to prohibit all active regenerations.
- The exhaust temperature is very high during the regeneration, so it is strictly forbidden to be close to the muffler
and the exhaust pipe, and it is strictly forbidden to stand or stack articles at the downstream of the exhaust pipe
outlet!
-Poor quality oils will not only greatly shorten the deashing mileage and time, but also cause DOC and DPF
poisoning, and lead to the failure of regeneration. Be sure to use fuel and engine oil that meet national VI
regulations.
Engine
308
DPF system maintenance
The maintenance of the DPF system is mainly the carrier deashing process for the
DPF. In principle, all parts of the HCI injection system are maintenance-free in the
life cycle, but they shall be checked regularly.
The disassembly and assembly steps of the post processer during specific
deashing are as follows:
- Loosen the fixing bolt of the upper trim cover and remove the upper trim cover
on the postprocessor;
- Loosen the fixing bolt of the trim cover bracket and remove the trim cover
bracket;
- Remove the hard pipe joint of the differential pressure sensor, loosen the upper
and lower clamps in clamp deflrctor, remove the diffuser and take out the DPF
assembly;
- Install the DPF after the deashing is completed, install the DPF into the
postprocessor, tighten the V-shaped clamps at both ends of the diffuser, install the
differential pressure sensor hard pipe, and install the trim cover bracket and trim
cover.
Installation torque of V-shaped clamp: 22±2 Nm
Note: As the front and rear gaskets of DPF are easily damaged during disassembly,
the corresponding clamp and gaskets must be replaced with new ones after each
DPF maintenance.
DPF assembly deashing cycle
DPF deashing shall be conducted for high-speed standard load road vehicles
(traction, cargo) once every 300,000 km DPF.
309
Engine
Engineering vehicle (ordinary dump trucks, mixers), a sanitation truck shall get
deashed once every 200000 kilometers' running.
For engines used for lifting purposes and specail vehicles which are shut down for
a long time for operation such as a pump truck, deashing should be conducted
once after the engine runs for 4000h. (4000 h calculated based on fuel
consumption of approximately 20 kg per hour)
Precautions for the DPF system
- It is strictly forbidden to remove the ash from DPF by knocking or patting the DPF.
Improper cleaning methods may damage the DPF.
- Ensure that DPF is removed and installed correctly, and the clamp and gasket
cannot be reused.
-Deashing mileage and time are affected by many factors, including engine
operation, the engine oil used and fuel quality. When the engine works under the
working conditions where active regeneration cannot be activated for a long time,
the deashing mode can be carried out in advance.
-Exhaust temperature is high during regeneration. Under certain driving conditions,
for example, when driving at low speed, the temperature may become extremely
high. Avoid driving or parking in unsuitable locations and keep away from areas
where flammable materials or gases are present.
- Check the DPF system regularly to ensure that there is no leakage in the fuel and
air pipeline, and the electrical components such as harness connectors work
normally.
- Pay attention to relevant indicators on the dashboard all the time during driving,
and pay attention to whether a regeneration is required for the DPF system and
what regeneration status the DPF system is in.
310
Engine
SCR system maintenance (common to other models)

Check and add adblue aqueous solution regularly
Adblue aqueous solution (the quality and performance shall meet the requirements
specified in GB 29518) shall be purchased from authorized dealer or professional
manufacturers. During filling, professional filling equipment is recommended to
prevent adblue aqueous solution from splashing.
It is forbidden to use privately-configured or substandard adblue aqueous solution,
as well as other alternative liquids, otherwise it will affect the normal operation of
the system and shorten the service life of the system. The resulting loss is not
covered by the quality warranty. Adblue aqueous solution will freeze at about -11℃.
The normal starting and driving of the vehicle can be ensured due to the heating
function of the SCR system,
Warning!
The adblue aqueous solution is corrosive to the skin. If it
accidentally touches your skin or eyes during filling it, rinse with
water as soon as possible; If pain persists, call for medical help. If
you swallow it, seek medical attention immediately!
When the level of adblue box is below 10%, the low adblue box level indicator on
the dashboard will flash and the adblue aqueous solution shall be filled in time.
When the adblue box level falls below 2.5%, the engine will limit the torque and
speed.
311
Engine
Replace the main filter element of the adblue supply unit

Every year or every 50,000 kilometers ( whichever comes first), the main filter
element of the adblue supply unit should be replaced at the SINOTRUK service
station. Replacement period shall be shortened appropriately according to the
actual situation in harsh application environment and in case of serious pollution of Main filter element
the adblue aqueous solution .
Replacement of the gasket at the bottom of the adblue injection unit

The gasket is a disposable part and should be replaced after each disassembly.
312
Engine
Check adblue level/ temperature/ mass sensor

Check and clean the breather pipe during the first maintenance, and then clean
the breather pipe every 5,000 km.
Every year or every 50,000 kilometers ( whichever comes first), the main filter
Adblue mass sensor element of the adblue level/temperature/mass sensor should be replaced at the
SINOTRUK service station. Replacement period shall be shortened appropriately
according to the actual situation in harsh application environment and in case of
serious pollution of the adblue aqueous solution .
313
Engine
Precautions for the SCR system

• After the engine starts, when the engine speed and exhaust temperature reach the set value, the Denoxtronic ® 2.2 system starts to work.
After the engine has stopped, the Denoxtronic®2.2 system enters the reverse pumping phase to drain the adblue aqueous solution in the
system, which will last for two to three minutes. Do not disconnect the master power switch while the system is still in operation.
• The Denoxtronic® 2.2 system can be shut down for up to 4 months in the environment at -40°C to 25°C after normal shutdown (completion
of the entire pumping process) without disassembly and storage, provided that the pipeline and electrical circuits and harnesses are not
disconnected during this period; Evaporation of water vapor in the adblue aqueous solution in the adblue supply unit and adblue injection
unit should be avoided, and it is recommended to fill the adblue box before shutdown to reduce evaporation in the pipeline. At a high
temperature, the upper time limit of downtime without disassembly should be shortened accordingly. After the time limit is exceeded, the
system shall be pre-operated before starting to ensure normal starting. The steps are as follows:
- Refilling the adblue box with adblue aqueous solution.
-Replace the main filter element of the adblue supply unit;
- Start Denoxtronic®2.2 system.
- If the system starts abnormally, shut down the system, and restart the system after the ECU main relay stops working (the time varies
according to different applications). If the system still fails to start, contact the SINOTRUK service station for help.
• The components of the Denoxtronic® 2.2 system shall be protected from direct exposure to mechanical and thermal shock. No stones,
soil and other debris shall be accumulated on the protective cover. In addition, they shall be kept away from heat source such as exhaust
pipe, turbocharger and engine.
• The adblue supply unit (SM) and adblue injection unit (DM) have certain waterproof and dustproof functions, but shall be protected against
flooding and the impact by a water torch. It is not recommended to lubricate the pipeline joint, and it is prohibited to lubricate the electrical
interface.
• The adblue pipeline and harness shall be well fixed, and the pipeline shall not be loose or bent; Ensure that the cooling water pipeline of the
adblue nozzle does not leak and is not plugged, with sufficient water flow; Ensure that the circulating water heating pipeline is firmly fixed
and works normally.
314
Engine
Daily maintenance The tightening torque of the hexagon socket cylindrical head
• Observe the coolant liquid level of the expansion tank and add fastening screw of the fixed tension strap of the National VI
coolant if necessary. postprocessor is 100±5 Nm. It shall be retightened for the first time
for spot check, and then retightened every 5000 km.
• Check the engine oil level, and add engine oil if necessary.
• Winter maintenance
• Check the fuel level and add fuel in time.
In order to maintain safe operation of the diesel engine and safe
• Check the adblue solution level, which needs to be kept between driving, the winter maintenance shall be carried out in time before
30% and 80% of the total volume of the adblue box. the temperature starts to drop.
Periodic maintenance cycle and maintenance specification of -Timely change low-viscosity engine oil;
the engine
- Select the fuel of appropriate grade according to the ambient
• Spot check temperature;
It shall be performed between 2000 km and 5000 km. -Drain the water in the fuel module;
• Regular maintenance -Check and fill up the coolant in the cooling system;
Perform annual (after 12 months) maintenance, and the regular -Check the electrical appliances;
maintenance is independent of the changes of diesel engine oil. -Drain the low-grade diesel oil in the HCI module.
315
Engine
Maintenance list (maintenance content for the gas engine part is common)
Work Period Remarks
Cooling system
Check the liquid level Daily inspection
Check function and tightness First spot check, periodical maintenance
Retighten the hose clamp of the cooling and intake
First spot check
supercharging systems
Check the contamination condition of intercooler and
Regular maintenance
radiator fin
Change the coolant and check the safety valve of the
200,000 km or 4 years
expansion tank (replace with new parts if necessary)
Check the coolant specifications. Winter maintenance, eriodical maintenance
Conditions of belt and automatic tensioning wheel Routine inspection and regular maintenance
Check the water route and air route of the EGR system Regular maintenance
Fuel system
Check the fuel level Daily inspection
Check the status and tightness of the fuel system First spot check, periodical maintenance
Synchronize with engine oil maintenance according to the
Fuel module; Replace the fuel fine filter element
reminder from the fuel pressure sensor
Replace the filter element of the fuel coarse filter Replace it according to vehicle requirements
Air intake and exhaust system
Check the pollution of air filter element When changing engine oil
It is recommended to replace it in
Replace the filter element According to vehicle regulations time according to the pollution
situation.
Check the status, function and tightness of the exhaust Make the first spot check when changing engine oil for the
system diesel engine
316
Engine
Work Period Remarks
Cylinder head
In order to reduce the number of times

of entering the service station, the
Check the valve clearance and adjust if necessary 120000km valve clearance check can be carried
out simultaneously during engine oil
change / regular maintenance.
Lubrication system
Check the oil level Daily inspection
Change the engine oil and replace the filter element. According to the oil drain interval
Electric system
Check the status of starter and electric generator First spot check, periodical maintenance
Post-processing system
Check adblue aqueous solution level Daily inspection
Exhaust the fuel in the HCI Winter inspection
Check and replace main filter element of adblue supply unit, It is recommended to replace it in time
50000km
and 3D filter screen of adblue level sensor according to the pollution situation.
Clean adblue pump, adblue nozzle, adblue box and other It is recommended to replace it in time
50000km
pipeline of the system according to the pollution situation.
Check adblue level/ temperature/ mass sensor/ breather pipe First spot check shall be carried out every 5000 km
First spot check shall be carried out every 5000 km

Retighten the screw of the postprocessor assembly.
for re-tightening
317
Engine
MC07 diesel engine maintenance

Lubrication system maintenance
Aftermarket special engine oil for MC National VI Series engines:
Super long-life special engine oil 10W-40 for SINOTRUK National VI engines
Caution!
○
i The GB17691 clearly stipulates that during the warranty period,
the user shall keep the material certificates which prove that
oils and reactant meeting the requirements of national
standards (e. G. certificate from a formal gas station within 1
year, reactant sales certificate from a formal sales store) are
used. To ensure your legitimate rights and interests, please be
sure to comply with the regulations, and keep relevant
voucher.
318
Engine
Engine oil specification and drain interval

Quality grade and Oils Mileage or time Mileage or time
Oil
Assembly for the first between two oil Remarks
name viscidity grade Oil volume 1) change changes
Tractor, cargo 1. Engine oil for any

truck, coach bus: Tractor, cargo truck, other engines (including
50,000 km or 12 coach bus: 50,000 km MC National V, WD615
months, or 12 months, and D12) shall not be
whichever comes whichever comes first used for MC (National
first VI) engines; Otherwise,
it will cause serious
Municipal damage to the engine
sanitation truck, and after-treatment
Municipal sanitation
bus, port towing system within a short
MC- Ⅱ 10W-40 27.5 L (green oil truck, bus, port towing
tractor: 30,000 km time, for which the
Q/ZZ21037 scale, first tractor: 30,000 km or
or 800 hours SINOTRUK only
replenishment) 800 hours (working
National Engine Super long-life special (working hours) or provides paid service.
Engine MC07/MC07H 26 L (green oil hours) or 12 months,
VI oil engine oil 10W-40 for 12 months,
scale, refill whichever comes first 2. Taking the formal
SINOTRUK National VI whichever comes
without replacing commercial (National VI)
engines first
filter element) fuel of CNPC and
Sinopec as the standard,
Concrete mixer, if the quality of the fuel
engine for lifting Concrete mixer, does not meet the
purposes: 800 engine for lifting standard, the fuel
hours (working purposes: 800 hours change mileage should
hours) or 12 (working hours) or 12 be reduced accordingly.
months, months, whichever
3. The oil filter element
whichever comes comes first.
must be replaced when
first.
Note: 1) The oil and oil quantity in the table are only for reference, and the actual consumption shall prevail.
319
Engine
Recommended oils for MC05H National VI engines and the recommended drain periods
Quality grade and Mileage or time
Oil and oil Mileage or time for the
Assembly Oil name between two oil Tips
viscidity grade quantity 1) first change
changes
Road freight vehicles Road freight vehicles 1. Engine oil for any
(non-tractor) 30,000 km (non-tractor) 30,000 km other engines (including
or 9 months, whichever or 9 months, whichever MC National V, WD615
comes first. comes first. and D12) shall not be
used for MC (National
VI) engines. Otherwise,
engines will be seriously
damaged in a short
Conventional oil: time, and SINOTRUK
16.5 L (first only provides paid
Mobil Delvac XHP replenishment) service for the damage.
National Super 10 W-40 15 L (refill
Engine MC05/MC05H Engine oil Diesel Engine Municipal vehicle, urban Municipal vehicle, urban 2. Taking the regular
VI capacity without
Oil/Castrol Enduron construction truck, construction truck, commercial fuel of
replacing the
10 W-40 Hercules transport dump truck, transport dump truck, CNPC and Sinopec as
filter element)
Diesel Oil mixer truck: 20,000 km mixer truck: 20,000 km the standard, if the
or 9 months, whichever or 9 months, whichever quality of the fuel does
comes first. comes first. not meet the standard,
the fuel change mileage
should be reduced
accordingly.
3. The oil filter element
must be replaced when
320
Engine

The engine oil can only be changed after the diesel engine is in a horizontal
position and has been shut down for at least 10 minutes.
• Place a suitable oil receiving container under the diesel engine.
• Unscrew and remove the drain plug ② on the oil sump ①, and drain the used
oil.
• After installing a new composite sealing ring ③, screw in drain plug ② on the
oil sump and the tightening torque is 75 Nm.
1 3
Replace the oil filter element.

MC07 adopts Hengst oil module.
4 5 • Remove the oil filter cover ⑤ with the socket wrench socket head ④.
• Pull oil filter element ⑥ out of oil filter housing ⑦.
5
5 • Insert the new filter element ⑥ into the filter housing ⑦.
• Screw in the oil filter cover ⑤ with the socket wrench socket head ④ with a
6 tightening torque of 25 Nm.
6
6 Each time the diesel engine oil is changed, a new oil filter element shall be
installed.
321
Engine
The sealing ring must be replaced along with the oil filter element
Hengst oil module 3
Remove the O-ring ④ from the oil filter cover ③, install a new O-ring ④ into the
oil filter cover ③, and apply a small amount of clean engine oil to the O-ring during
installation.
Warning!
-The engine should use special engine oil \ and engine oil filter
element for MC engines, otherwise it will cause early wear of
the engine, SINOTRUK only provide paid service!
- Oils of different grades are not allowed to be mixed.
Filling engine oil

Check the oil level
322
Engine
Fuel system maintenance

1 Fuel specifications
In accordance with the provisions of GB 19147, fuel of appropriate grade
shall be selected according to the ambient temperature.
2 Replace the fuel filter element
• Loosen the fuel filter cover ①, keep it stationary for two minutes, unscrew
the water drain valve ④, and drain the fuel filter.
• Retighten water drain valve ④ to 3 Nm.
3 • Then remove the filter cover ① and the fuel filter element ③.
• Pull fuel filter element ③ out of the fuel filter cover ①.
• Remove sealing ring ②.
• Apply a small amount of diesel to the new sealing ring ② and assemble it
on the fuel filter cover ①. Then insert the new filter element ③ into the
upper cover ① as the preassembly. Finally, screw them into the filter
housing together with a tightening torque of 25+5 Nm.
323
Engine
Coolant specification and drain interval

The coolant of MC-series diesel engines: BASF G48-24 -35 ℃ Ⅰ-type operating fluid produced by Changchun Delian Chemical Co., Ltd.
For the first maintenance of the vehicle, it is not required to change the coolant, and the recommended specific change cycle is shown in the
following table:
Mileage or time
Quality grade and viscidity Oil and oil
Assembly Name between two oil Remarks
grade quantity
changes
Coolant for any other engines (including WD615, D12)

Vehicle driving of shall not be used for MC engines; Otherwise, it will
-35 ℃ operating fluid-I type cause corrosion to the engine cooling system within
200,000 km or 4
MC07 Coolant Q/ZZ21007 (BASF G48-24 25-30L a very short time, for which the SINOTRUK only
years, whichever
-35 ℃) provides paid service.
comes first
Regardless of the time interval, if the coolant becomes cloudy or browned, change it immediately.
Coolant drain
• Place a suitable collection container under the oil module ①.
• Drain the coolant from the drain screw plug hole ②.
• Apply loctite 242 to the thread part of the drain screw plug and screw it back to
the oil module. 1
• Dispose of the discharged coolant in a correct manner.
Coolant filling
324
Engine
Warning!
-SINOTRUK-specific coolant should be used, otherwise it will
cause damage to the engine, SINOTRUK only provide paid service.
-It is forbidden to use water to replace the coolant.
-Gas in the coolant shall be exhausted completely, otherwise the
water pump will be damaged.
Engine maintenance
For the initial spot check and periodic maintenance of the engine, refer to
"Vehicle maintenance".
Winter maintenance
In order to maintain safe operation of the diesel engine and safe driving, the
winter maintenance shall be carried out in time before the temperature starts to
drop.
Select the fuel of appropriate grade according to the ambient temperature; Drain
low grade fuel in HCI module; Expel the air from the fuel module.
Check and fill up the coolant in the cooling system.
Check the electrical appliances.
Before using the air intake heater for the first time every year, please check the
carbon deposit of the electric heater, and clean it in time if there is any carbon
deposit (the heater is a one with the EGR mixed).
325
Engine
List of maintenance items for MC07 engine

Work Period Remarks
Cooling system
Check the liquid level Routine inspection specification
Check function and tightness First spot check, periodical maintenance
Retighten the hose clamp of the cooling and intake
First spot check
supercharging systems
Check the contamination condition of intercooler and
Regular maintenance
radiator fin
Change the coolant and check the safety valve of the
4 years or 200,000 km, whichever comes first
expansion tank (replace with new parts if necessary)
Check the coolant specifications. Winter maintenance, eriodical maintenance
Poly V-belt: 2 years or 200,000 km; Poly V-belt (air-conditioning compressor), 1
Conditions of belt and automatic tensioner
year or 80,000 km. whichever comes first.
Fuel system
Check the fuel level Routine inspection specification
Check the status and tightness of the fuel system First spot check, periodical maintenance
Fuel module; Clean the filter screen of the hand primer Synchronize with engine oil maintenance according to the reminder from the fuel
and replace the filter element of the fuel fine filter pressure sensor
Replace the filter element of the fuel coarse filter Replaced together with main filter element
Air intake and exhaust system
Check the pollution of air filter element When changing engine oil
It is recommended to replace it in time
Replace the filter element According to vehicle regulations
according to the pollution situation.
Check the status, function and tightness of the exhaust
Make the first spot check when changing engine oil for the engine
system
Cylinder head
In order to reduce the number of times of
entering the service station, the valve
Check the valve clearance and adjust if necessary 60000km clearance check can be carried out
simultaneously during engine oil change
/ regular maintenance.
Lubrication system
Check the oil level Routine inspection specification
Change the engine oil and replace the filter element. According to the oil drain interval
Electric system
Check the status of starter and electric generator First spot check, periodical maintenance
326
Engine
Work Period Remarks
Post-processing system
Check adblue aqueous solution level Daily inspection
Exhaust the fuel in the HCI Winter inspection
Check and replace main filter element of adblue supply unit, It is recommended to replace it in time
50000km
and 3D filter screen of adblue level sensor according to the pollution situation.
Clean adblue pump, adblue nozzle, adblue box and other It is recommended to replace it in time
50000km
pipeline of the system according to the pollution situation.
Check adblue level/ temperature/ mass sensor/ breather pipe First spot check shall be carried out every 5000 km
First spot check shall be carried out every 5000 km

Retighten the screw of the postprocessor assembly.
for re-tightening
For high-speed and standard-oad highway vehicles

(traction and cargo), DPF deashing shall be carried
out once every 300,000 km for engineering vehicles
(ordinary self-unloading and mixing). For sanitation
trucks, deashing shall be carried out once every
Using inferior engine oil will greatly
DPF assembly deashing cycle 200,000 km for engines, and for other vehicles which
shorten the deashing cycle
are stopped for a long time for operation, such as
pump trucks used for lifting purpose and pump
trucks, deashing shall be carried out once every
4,000 km for engines. (4000 h calculated based on
fuel consumption of approximately 20 kg per hour)
327
Engine
Natural gas engine

The maintenance requirements for natural gas engines (MT series) are the same
as those for MC engines, except for the following provisions.
Fuel
The CNG used in the engine shall comply with the provisions of the national
standard GB 18047 Compressed Natural Gas as Vehicle Fuel.
Warning!
Using non-conforming natural gas will affect engine
performance and may cause power drop or damage the engine.
SINOTRUK only provide paid service in such cases.
Engine oil
Special oils for MT National VI Series Engine aftermarket engines are:
High-end special engine oil 10W-40 for SINOTRUK National VI engines
High-end special engine oil 5W-30 for SINOTRUK National VI engines
328
Engine
Oils and drain periods for MT07 National VI engines

Quality
Mileage or time
Oil grade and Oil and oil Mileage or time for the
Assembly between two oil Tips
name viscidity quantity 1) first change
changes
grade
Tractor, cargo truck, Tractor, cargo truck, 1. Engine oil for any
coach bus: coach bus: other engines
30,000 km or 6 months, 30,000 km or 6 months, (including T10 and
whichever comes first whichever comes first T12) shall not be used
for MT (National VI)
Municipal sanitation Municipal sanitation engines. Otherwise,
truck and buses: truck and buses: engines will be
seriously damaged in
20,000 km or 800 hours 20,000 km or 800 hours a very short time, and
Conventional (working hours) or 6 (working hours) or 6
oil: MC-Ⅱ SINOTRUK only
27. 5 L (green months, whichever months, whichever provides paid service
10W-40 oil scale, first comes first comes first for the damage.
Q/ZZ21037
replenishment)
MT07 (high-end 2. Taking the formal
Gas Engine 26 L (green oil
National VI special commercial fuel of
engine MT07H oil scale, refill
engine oil CNPC and Sinopec
without
10W-40 for as the standard, if the
replacing filter
SINOTRUK quality of the fuel gas
element)
National VI Concrete mixer, engine Concrete mixer, engine does not meet the
engines) for lifting purposes: 800 for lifting purposes: 800 standard, the fuel
hours (working hours) or hours (working hours) or change mileage
6 months, whichever 6 months, whichever should be reduced
comes first. comes first. accordingly.
3. The oil filter
element must be
replaced when
changing the engine
oil.
329
Engine
Recommended oils and the drain periods for MT11/MT13 National VI engines (version 2021)
Quality grade and Mileage or time

Oil Oil and oil Mileage or time for
Assembly between two oil Tips
name viscidity grade quantity 1) the first change
changes
Over-the-road truck:
Over-the-road truck:
80,000 km or 12 1. Please use the
80,000 km or 12
months; Heavy load special engine oil for
months; Heavy load
condition: 60,000 km SINOTRUK MT
condition: 60,000 km
or 12 months; National VI engines,
or 12 months;
whichever comes otherwise,
Conventional oil: whichever comes first.
first. SINOTRUK will only
MC-Ⅱ10W-40 provide paid service
42 L (first Municipal vehicle, Municipal vehicle,
Q/ZZ21037 replenishment) for engine damage
dump truck: 30,000 dump truck: 30,000
MT13 caused by improper
Gas National Engine (high-end special 40 L (refill km or 1000 hours km or 1000 hours
use of engine oil. 2.
engine MT11 VI oil engine oil 10W-40 without (working hours) or 12 (working hours) or 12
Please use CNG
for SINOTRUK replacing the months, whichever months, whichever
conforming to
National VI filter element) comes first comes first
GB18047 or LNG
engines)
Concrete mixer, mine conforming to
Concrete mixer, mine GB/T19204. 3. The
car (non-road Phase
car (non-road Phase oil filter element must
III and IV), engine for
III and IV), engine for be replaced when
lifting purposes: 1000
lifting purposes: 1000 the engine oil is
hours (working hours)
hours (working hours) changed.
or 12 months,
or 12 months,
whichever comes
whichever comes first.
first.
330
Engine
Warning!
-Never check the lubricating oil level when the engine is running.
- Engine oils of different grades are not allowed to be mixed.
- Engine oil for any other engines should not be used for
SINOTRUK MT series engines. Otherwise, engines will be
seriously damaged in a very short time, and SINOTRUK only
provides paid service for the damage.
Coolant
The specification and drain period of coolant for MT07 series engines are the
same as those for MC07 engines.
Coolant specification for MT13 series engines: -35℃ operating fluid, type I
Q/ZZ21007(BASF G48-24-35℃), mileage or time between two changes: when
the vehicle has been traveling for 200,000 km or 4 years, whichever comes first.
Valve clearance
Check it regularly and adjust it if necessary.
For MT07 series, the maximum mileage between two checks shall not exceed
60,000 km;
For MT13 series, the maximum mileage between two checks shall not exceed
120000 km.
In order to reduce the number of vehicles entering the service station, the valve
clearance check can be carried out simultaneously during vehicle maintenance
according to the actual interval mileage.
331
Engine
Operational precautions
In order to ensure driving safety, the relevant parts of the engine shall be inspected
daily before driving. If any abnormality is found, go to the SINOTRUK service
station for service immediately.
Before starting the engine, check whether the oil level, coolant and storage
pressure meet the requirements to ensure normal use and safety.
When starting the engine, if it fails to start within 5 s, it shall be started again after
an interval of 15 s.
After starting the engine, it shall first run at idle speed for 3~5 minutes, and the oil
pressure shall be higher than 100 kPa; When the coolant temperature is not higher
than 60℃, it is not allowed to run at high speed and heavy load, otherwise the
reliability of the gas engine will be affected.
Before the engine with load stops, the load shall be reduced and the speed shall
be lowered, and the idling shall last for no less than 3~5 minutes.
The engine shall only work below medium load within its run-in period.
The maximum continuous idling time of the vehicle shall be 15~20 minutes, and it
is strictly prohibited to exceed 20 minutes. Too long idling time may cause carbon
deposit in the engine.
332
Engine
Maintenance precautions
Sparking plug
When routine maintenance is performed for engine, it is necessary to check
whether the sparking plug clearance meets the requirements. Replace the
sparking plug according to the usage, and it is recommended to replace it every
100,000 km.
The sparking plug can be removed after the engine is cooled down, to prevent
scalding and damage to the fastening thread of sparking plug. After the sparking
plug thread is completely screwed out, take it out with a ignition coil rubber
housing.
When installing the sparking plug, first screw the sparking plug onto the sparking
plug mounting threads on the cylinder head with a ignition coil rubber housing
until the sparking plug touches the sealing washer. Then fasten sparking plugs
with the sparking plug installation tool. The tightening torque of M14 sparking plug
shall be 25 Nm ~ 30 Nm, and the tightening torque of M12 sparking plug shall be
23±2 Nm.
When the torque wrench is not available or not suitable, the sparking plug can be
tightened by hand until it cannot be screwed any more to ensure that the sparking
Method for tightening M14 Method for tightening M12 plug shim is in contact with the cylinder head surface. Then tighten the sparking
sparking plug sparking plug plug as shown in the figure. Use M14 sparking plug for MT13 and M12 sparking
plug for MT07. When the electrode gap of the sparking plug is greater than 0.7 mm,
In case of new In case of new
it is recommended to replace the sparking plug. Caution: The sparking plug and
products products ignition coil used for MT national VI gas engines are different in structure from
Rotation Rotat
ion
those used for national V gas engines, so they are required to be used
correspondingly and not mixed.
In reuse In reuse
Rotat Rotat
ion ion
333
Engine
Maintenance precautions
Oil-gas separator (MT13)
1
Replace the oil-gas separator filter element and O-ring every 80,000 km.
Operation method:
•Unscrew fixing bolt ④ of the oil-gas separator, hexagon spline wrench T30;
2
•Pull the upper end cover ①, sealing ring ② and filter element ③ of the oil-gas
separator out of oil module housing ⑤.
•Remove the old sealing ring ②;
•Put the new sealing ring ② into the sealing groove on the upper end cover ①
of the oil-gas separator ;
3
•Put the new filter element ③ into the oil module housing ⑤, and there is
locating slot in the housing;
•Cover the upper end cover ① of the oil-gas separator, tighten the fixing screw
④, with the tightening torque of 1 ~ 13 Nm. 4
Remarks: the oil-gas separator filter element can be removed after the engine
cools down, to prevent scalding.
5
334
Engine
Exhaust vent valve (MT07)

Remove the relevant pipeline every 20,000 km, and clean the 3 air holes of the
exhaust vent valve with Henkel Loctite special cleaner. The cleaning position is
shown in the figure.
2 3 1 Air source hole 2 Control air hole 3 Return hole
Solenoid valve High pressure reducer

connector
During use, check whether the engine coolant can be supplied normally to the
Fuel inlet engine every day.
If the engine power is insufficient and frosting is found on the high-pressure
Fuel outlet
reducer, it indicates that a problem exists in heating of the pipeline of the
high-pressure reducer by the coolant. The coolant pipeline shall be checked for
any bend, which may affect the flow of coolant. Insufficient heating for a long time
can result in too low temperature of the fuel gas and damage the high pressure
reducer and downstream components and parts.
Circulating water
Circulating water
outlet
outlet
335
Engine
Voltage regulator
MT13-LNG models are equipped with voltage regulator.
The dust cap on the voltage regulator shall be clean and shall not be blocked by
dust, otherwise it may lead to voltage stabilization deviation of the voltage
regulator. If the dust cap is found to be blocked, it can be removed and purged
with compressed air before installation.
It is recommended to purge it every 2,000 km (if the environment where it is
used is muddy or dusty, the mileage can be shortened appropriately).
High pressure filter (CNG vehicles)
Dust
(CNG vehicle / domestic and international ISO certification requirements)
Sewage shall be carried out for the vehicle every 2,000~5,000 km, and the filter cap
element shall be replaced every 50,000 km or 6 months. When replacing the filter
element, the rubber sealing ring of housing shall be replaced at the same time,
and the reassembled filter and joints shall be inspected for tightness.
(CNG vehicle / international ECE certification requirements)
The filter element shall be soaked and cleaned with gasoline every 30,000 km of
vehicle operation and dried with compressed air. Replace the filter element every
100,000 km or every year. When replacing the filter element, the spring seat
sealing ring shall be replaced at the same time, and the reassembled fliter and
joints shall be inspected for tightness.
336
Engine
Low pressure filter

MT07 engine
Discharge sewage every 5,000 km.
For CNG vehicles, replace the filter element every 40000 km.
For LNG vehicles, replace the filter element every 80000 km.
MT13 engine
Discharge sewage every 5,000 km.
For CNG vehicles, replace the filter element every 40000 km.
For LNG vehicles, replace the filter element every 80000 km.
According to the actual situation, the maintenance mileage for sewage and filter
element replacement can be appropriately shortened.
Warning!
No maintenance or sewage under pressure, otherwise serious
injury may occur.
1
337
Engine
Precautions
CNG gas cylinder
The temperature of the gas cylinder will increase during the inflation, which is
obvious by touching it with hands, but not hot. This is a normal phenomenon due
to the heat released when the gas is compressed during inflation. It is normal that
the pressure will be reduced (caused by the temperature drop of the gas in the gas
cylinder) in the vehicle which is placed for a period of time after the inflation has
been completed (inflated until the pressure is 20 MPa) . The operation procedures
of the CNG gas filling station shall be strictly implemented during filling, and the
pre-charge pressure of CNG shall not exceed 20 MPa.
Vehicle stop
When the CNG vehicle is stopped for more than 3 hours, the driver needs to turn
off the master stop valve and battery master switch located in the integrated
control panel when leaving.
If the CNG vehicle is stopped for more than 24 hours, the driver shall close all the
gas cylinder valves in addition to the master stop valve and battery master switch
on the Integrated panel to ensure the safety of the vehicle.
338
Engine
LNG gas cylinder

Observe whether the carburetor is frosted during use. If frosting exists, it means
that the carburettor coolant flow is insufficient, and it is necessary to check
whether the heating pipeline is bent. Otherwise, the engine power will be
insufficient due to insufficient vaporization capacity of the carburettor.
When the temperature is low in winter or the vehicle is running under heavy load
for a long time, the automatic pressure-increasing valve can be opened to
increase the internal pressure of the gas cylinder and increase the LNG
evaporation. Ensure gas engine supply and engine power. When the temperature
is high in summer or the vehicle load is low , the automatic pressure-increasing
valve should be closed.
339
Engine
Maintenance of Weichai WP7/WP8 engine

Engine fuel oil
The fuel used shall comply with the standard GB 19147 and be selected according
to the local ambient temperature on the basis of this standard provisions. The
details are as follows:
- 5# vehicle diesel: the diesel with a risk rate of 10% shall be used in areas with the
lowest temperature above 8 ℃;
- -10# vehicle diesel: the diesel with a risk rate of 10% shall be used in areas with
the lowest temperature above -5 ℃;
the lowest temperature above -44 ℃.
Engine lubricating oil
Engine oil refill
Model Product type
capacity
WP7/WP8 CK-4 20-24L
340
Engine
Engine lubricating oil temperature-viscosity reference table

Viscosity grade Range of operating Viscosity grade Range of operating
temperature, ℃ temperature, ℃
Note: For the viscidity grade of oils in the table, the smaller the number before W is, the higher the low-temperature
performance of the oils is; the greater the number after W is, the greater the viscidity of the oils is; the
viscosity-temperature performance requirements of engine lubricating oil are described in GB 11122.
Caution!
○
-Before starting the engine, check the engine oil level in the oil sump.
i -Do not check the engine oil level when the engine is running.
-It is forbidden to mix the Weichai Power special engine oil with engine oils from other manufacturers.
341
Engine
Engine coolant
The freezing points of the special coolant for Weichai Power are - 25 ℃, - 35 ℃, -
40 ℃ and other specifications. Please select the special coolant for Weichai with
different freezing points according to the local ambient temperature. The selection
principle is that the freezing point is about 10 ℃ lower than the local air
temperature. See the following table for the specifications of heavy-load engine
coolant.
Caution!
○
-Check the coolant regularly, and change it in time according to
i the situation to prevent corrosion damage.
-It is forbidden to use water and inferior coolant as the coolant
of engine.
Model Coolant model Drain period
50,000 km/2
WP7/WP8 HEC-Ⅱ-25, HEC-Ⅱ-35, HEC-Ⅱ-40
years
342
Engine
Adblue solution
The quality and performance of the adblue solution shall meet the requirements
specified in GB 29518. The unqualified adblue solution may bring the risk of
blocking the adblue pump and adblue nozzle, and the metal impurities in the
unqualified adblue solution may easily lead to the permanent poisoning of SCR
catalyst and the decline of SCR catalytic converter efficiency; Similarly, adblue
solution shall be added through formal channels or in the designated units. It is
strictly forbidden to use any liquid to replace adblue solution during normal use.
Caution!
○
-Adblue solution shall be stored in a sealed container in a cool, dry
i space, away from strong oxidizers. When filling, professional filling
equipment is recommended.
-The adblue solutionis is corrosive to the skin. If it accidentally
touches your skin or eyes during adding, rinse with water as soon
as possible; If pain persists, seek medical help. If you swallow it,
seek medical attention immediately.
343
Engine
Daily inspection
- Check the coolant liquid level, engine oil liquid level, fuel liquid level, and whether
the lubricating grease at the position where the lubricating grease is filled is
sufficient.
- Check oil, water and gas for leakage.
- Check whether the external coupler and accessories are well connected and
fastened.
-Visually check the fan to see whether the fan blades are damaged and whether
the connecting bolts are fastened.
- Check whether the belt is too tight or too loose.
- Check the wiring connection and connector for damage.
- Check whether the exhaust temperature, color, sound and vibration of the engine
are normal and whether the speed is stable.
- Check whether oil inlet and return pipes of the supercharger are unobstructed
and whether there is engine oil leakage.
- Check the exhaust pipeline to ensure that there is no leakage, and ensure that
the air inlet pipeline is unblocked.
344
Engine
Periodic maintenance cycle and maintenance specification of the engine

High-speed standard load road
Purpose Engineering vehicle (normal, dump) Mixer truck
vehicles (traction, cargo)
First Regular First Regular First Regular
Maintenance type
maintenance maintenance maintenance maintenance maintenance maintenance
5,000 km or 3 60,000 km or 6 3,000 km or 3 10,000 km or 2 3,000 km or 1 30,000 km or 6
Maintenance period
months months months months month months
Change the engine oil ● ● ● ● ● ●
Replace the centrifugal filter element ● ● ●
Replace the oil filter or the filter
● ● ● ● ● ●
element
Check and adjust the valve clearance ● ● ● ● ● ●
Clean or replace the oil-gas separator
● ● ●
filter element
Check water pump (lubricate by grease
● ● ● ● ● ●
cup)
Replace the fuel filter element ● ● ● ●
Check the coolant capacity and fill up
● ● ● ● ● ●
coolant
Fastening the pipe clamp of the cooling
● ● ●
pipeline
Fasten the air inlet pipeline, hose and
● ● ● ● ● ●
flange connectors
Check the air filter maintenance
● ● ●
indicator light or indicator
Clean the dust cup of the air filter
(excluding air filters of automatic dust ● ● ●
discharge type)
Clean the main filter element of air filter When the indicator lights up When the indicator lights up When the indicator lights up
Replace the main filter element of the
See "Air filter" See "Air filter" See "Air filter"
air filter.
Replace the safety filter element of the After cleaning the main filter element for After cleaning the main filter element for After cleaning the main filter element for
air filter 5 times 5 times 5 times
Inspect and fasten the triangle belt ● ● ● ● ● ●
345
Engine

Purpose Engineering vehicle (normal, dump) Mixer truck

Maintenance type
5,000 km or 3 60,000 km or 6 3,000 km or 3 10,000 km or 2 3,000 km or 1 30,000 km or 6

Maintenance period
Check the supercharger bearing clearance Every 240,000 km Every 80,000 km Every 150,000 km
Check and adjust the clutch stroke ● ● ● ● ● ●
Adblue pump filter element ● ● ●
Each time the adblue nozzle is Each time the adblue nozzle is Each time the adblue nozzle is
Adblue nozzle shim
removed removed removed
Clean the adblue box and adblue box filter

● ● ●
element
Refer to the relevant provisions in the Refer to the relevant provisions in the Refer to the relevant provisions in the
DPF deashing
manual manual manual
Note 1: ● Maintenance marking is required.

Note 2: A diesel engine that has parked for more than half a year must be subject to corresponding maintenance maintenance, such as redoing the oil seal.
Note 3: Weichai will provide maintenance advice upon user request.
Note: 4 For every 15,000 km of operation, replenish the engine oil to the upper line .
346
Engine

Unscrew the drain plug at the bottom of the oil sump, drain the engine oil, and
screw on the drain plug.
Open the filler cap, add engine oil from the oil filler, observe the dipstick scale until
the requirements are met, and then install the filler cap.
347
Engine
Replace the oil filter or the filter element

Remove the old oil filter.
Fill the new filter with clean engine oil.
Apply engine oil to the rubber mat before installing a new oil filter.
After the rubber mat touches the base, tighten it another 3/4~1 turn to seal it.
Start the diesel engine to check whether there is any oil leakage.
Caution!
○
Unqualified diesel or oil filter elements will lead to early wear of
i bushings in the crankshaft and other parts, exacerbating the
risk of exceeding emissions.
348
Engine
Replace the fuel filter and filter element

Remove the old fuel filter.
Fill the new filter with clean fuel.
Apply fuel to the rubber mat before installing a new fuel filter.
After the rubber mat touches the base, tighten it another 3/4~1 turn to seal it.
Start the diesel engine to check whether there is any oil leakage.
Inspect air-tight seal

Check whether the air intake hose is aged with cracks, and whether the clamp is
loose. Tighten or replace the part if necessary to ensure the tightness of the air
intake system.
Check filter element of the air filter
The maximum allowable intake resistance of the engine is 6 kPa. You must check
the maximum intake resistance of the engine when the engine is running at the
calibration speed and full load. When the intake resistance reaches the maximum
allowable limit, the filter element shall be cleaned or replaced according to the
manufacturer's regulations.
349
Engine
Caution!
○
-It is never allowed to use the engine when there is no air filter,
i otherwise dust and impurities entering the engine will cause
early wear of the engine!
- The unqualified filter element of the air filter will cause
abnormal blocking of DPF post-processer, resulting in the
serious faults such as excessive emission and DPF damage!
350
Engine
Maintenance of post-processing components and parts

Check adblue pump filter element
During each maintenance, the filter element of the adblue pump shall be removed
and washed with clean water before installation. Do not slap or tap the filter
element.
Caution!
○
During each replacement or disassembly of the adblue nozzle, it is
i necessary to check the state of the adblue nozzle. If there is any
damage or deformation, it is necessary to replace the adblue
nozzle!
Clean the adblue box and adblue box filter element

During the maintenance, check the cleanliness of the adblue box and filter element,
and clean them if necessary.
Caution!
○
i After the engine is shut down (only T15 is powered off), the SCR
system will automatically enter the suck-back state and suck the
adblue solution in the adblue pump and adblue pipeline back to the
adblue box. This phase will last for 2 min, during which it is
forbidden to turn off the master switch of the vehicle power supply.
351
Engine
Maintenance of adblue box

Clean the adblue box regularly every 60,000 km or 6 months to avoid the blocking
and wear of the adblue pump caused by particulates and impurities in the box;
The adblue box sensor is an intelligent sensor, which is responsible for measuring
the liquid level and adblue concentration, corresponding to the data in the engine
ECU. Replacing a mismatched adblue box may cause OBD failure, resulting in
engine torque limitation. If replacement is required, be sure to replace the adblue
box with a one from the original manufacturer and of the same model.
The deashing cycle of DPF is different due to different user conditions for the
whole vehicle. The deashing cycle of Weichai product post-treatment DPF is about
250,000 km to 300,000 km. The specific steps of post-treatment disassembly and
assembly during deashing are as follows:
Remove the small M8 bolts from the housing.
Remove the clamps at both ends of the DPF and take out the DPF. Remove the
flat clamp at the rear end first, and then the v-band clamp at the front end.
352
Engine
DPF installation is carried out after deashing is completed. The v-band clamp at
the front end of the DPF is installed and pre-tightened first, after installing the DPF
to the right position, the flat clamp at the rear end of the DPF is installed and the
bolt is tightened, and finally the V-band clamp at the front end of the DPF is
tightened and the housing is installed in place.
Assembly/disassembly torque of M8 bolt (17-23) N ·m;
Assembly/disassembly torque of V-band clamp (20±1) N ·m;
Assembly/disassembly torque of flat clamp (40-45) N ·m;
Since the front and rear gaskets of DPF are made of graphite materials, they are
easy to be damaged during disassembly and assembly. The corresponding clamps
and gaskets must be replaced with new ones after each DPF maintenance.
353
Engine
Maintenance of WP9 H/WP10 H/WP10.5 H Weichai engine s

Fuel
The diesel shall meet the requirements of GB 19147 and be selected according to
the local ambient temperature. The recommended ones are as follows:
lowest temperature above 8 ℃.
Caution!
○
The fuel used by the vehicle shall meet the requirements for
i vehicle diesel specified in GB19147 .
354
Engine
Lubricating oil
Type Product type Packing specification
Diesel engine CK-4 4L,18L,170kg

performance of the oils is; the greater the number after W is, the greater the viscidity of the oils is; the viscosity-temperature
performance requirements of engine lubricating oil are described in GB 11122.
355
Engine

Engine oil refill
Model Engine oil grade
capacity
WP9H/WP10H/WP10.5H 30L CK-4
Caution!
○
-Before starting the engine, check the engine oil level in the oil
i sump.
-Do not check the engine oil level when the engine is running.
-It is forbidden to mix the Weichai Power special engine oil with
engine oils from other manufacturers.
Engine coolant
coolant.
356
Engine
Heavy-duty engine coolant HEC-Ⅱ-25 HEC-Ⅱ-35 HEC-Ⅱ-40 4 kg, 10 kg
Caution!
○
-Check the coolant regularly, and change it in time according to the situation to prevent corrosion damage.
i -It is forbidden to use water and inferior coolant as the coolant of engine.
Adblue solution
The quality and performance of the adblue solution shall meet the requirements specified in GB 29518. The unqualified adblue solution may
bring the risk of blocking the adblue pump and adblue nozzle, and the metal impurities in the unqualified adblue solution may easily lead to
the permanent poisoning of SCR catalyst and the decline of SCR catalytic converter efficiency; Similarly, adblue solution shall be added
through formal channels or in the designated units. It is strictly forbidden to use any liquid to replace adblue solution during normal use.
Caution!
○
i
-Adblue solution shall be stored in a sealed container in a cool, dry space, away from strong oxidizers. When filling,
professional filling equipment is recommended.
-The adblue solutionis is corrosive to the skin. If it accidentally touches your skin or eyes during adding, rinse with water as
soon as possible; If pain persists, seek medical help. If you swallow it, seek medical attention immediately.
357
Engine
Daily inspection
sufficient.
fastened.
358
Engine

High-speed standard load road Engineering vehicle (ordinary
Purpose Mixer truck, sanitation truck
vehicles (traction, cargo) dump)
Maintenance type
5,000 km/3 60,000 km/6 3,000 km/3 10,000 km/2 3 ,000 km/1 30,000 km/6
Maintenance period
Replace the centrifugal oil filter
● ● ●
element.
Replace the oil filter or the filter
● ● ● ● ● ●
element
Check and adjust the valve
● ● ● ● ● ●
clearance
Replace the fuel filter element ● ● ● ●
Clean or replace the oil-gas
● ● ●
separator filter element
Check water pump (lubricate by
● ● ● ● ● ●
grease cup)
Check the coolant capacity and fill
● ● ● ● ● ●
up coolant
Fastening the pipe clamp of the
● ● ●
cooling pipeline
Fasten the air inlet pipeline, hose
● ● ● ● ● ●
and flange connectors
Check the air filter maintenance
● ● ●
indicator light or indicator
Clean the dust cup of the air filter
(excluding air filters of automatic ● ● ●
dust discharge type)
359
Engine

Purpose Mixer truck

Maintenance type
5,000 km/3 60,000 km/6 3,000 km/3 10,000 km/2 3 ,000 km/1 30,000 km/6
Maintenance period
Replace the main filter element of See "Air filter" See "Air filter"
See "Air filter"
the air filter.
Replace the safety filter element of

the air filter
Check the supercharger bearing

Every 240,000 km Every 80,000 km Every 150,000 km
clearance
Adblue nozzle shim
Clean the adblue box and adblue

● ● ●
box filter element
DPF deashing cycle 240,000 km/24 months 180,000 km/36 months 180,000 km/36 months
Note 1: ● Maintenance marking is required

Note 3: For every 15,000 km of operation, replenish the engine oil to the upper line .
Note 5: : Vehicles used on standard load highways: 1. operating condition limit: 1) the proportion of high speed operating condition shall not be less than 55%, and the defined
speed under the high speed operating condition shall be greater than 75 km/h. 2) The annual mileage exceeds 150,000 km. 2. The fuel shall be the ones complying with
national VI and above and meeting the GB19147 requirements. 3. Use adblue that meets the GB29518 requirements. If any one of the conditions such as fuel, adblue and
working conditions is not met, the drain period is half of the periodical maintenance period; if two of them are not met, the drain period is 1/4 of the periodical maintenance
period.
360
Engine

-Unscrew the drain plug at the bottom of the oil sump, drain the engine oil, and
then screw on the drain plug.
Drain plug
-Open the filler cap, add engine oil from the oil filler, observe the dipstick scale until
Filler cap
361
Engine

- Remove the head end cover of the engine oil cooling filter module
The top part of the module is removed by loosening the upper bolts of the engine
oil cooling filter module with the socket wrench, so that the paper filter element can
be clearly seen. The top part of the module is equipped with rotor filter element
inside, and only a small part of the engine enters the rotor filter during operation of
the engine.
- Slowly remove the filter element and replace it,
- Install the new filter element inside the module so that it naturally falls to the
bottom of the module. Note: the lower end of the paprt cartridge and the inside of
the module are designed with a special guiding and positioning structure. After the
filter element is placed inside the module, the paprt cartridge will be naturally
positioned inside the module along the central pipe. In addition, do not press down
the paprt cartridge with force after the paprt cartridge is installed.
- Hold the top cover with one hand and rotate the centrifugal filter base
circumferentially with the other hand a little, the clip is released, and the centrifugal
filter base is separated from the top cover; Take out the centrifugal rotor filter
element up along the central axis and replace it. Note: The O-ring is for one-time
use, and the O-ring must be replaced at the same time when replacing the filter
element or filter cover; and ensure that there are no impurities in the groove.
362
Engine
- Replace the center pipe of filter element.

In cases where the central pipe inside the filter element is damaged or where it is
possible to replace the central pipe inside the filter element when replacing the
filter element, it is necessary to install the central pipe. The installation sequence
should be treated with caution. After installing the central pipe, install the eilter
element. When installing the central pipe, align the two notches on its lower end
with the two protrusions on the base, and then apply a little force to install the
central pipe. At this time, a "click" sound will be heard and the central pipe cannot
be rotated, indicating that the central pipe has been reliably installed.
intake system.
Replace the fuel filter and the filter element
The fuel filter used in WP9H/WP10H diesel engine integrates fuel coarse filter and
fuel fine filter. The upper part is a fuel fine filter and the lower part is a fuel coarse
filter. When replacing the fuel fine filter element, you need to unscrew the upper
cover of the filter for filter element replacement. When replacing the fuel coarse
Upper cover filter element, you need to remove the lower housing.
Diesel fine filter
Diesel coarse filter
Lower housing
363
Engine
Follow the steps below when replacing the fuel filter element:
- Remove the old fuel filter element; If the water collecting vessel installed on the
fuel coarse filter can be reused, remove the water collecting vessel.
-Lubricate the seal.
- Screw on the filter by hand until the seal engages with the interface.
-Continue to screw the filter by hand until the filter is firmly installed (about 3/4
turns)
- Vent until no bubble appears.
-Conduct leak test.
Caution!
Exhaust the air in the prefilter when replacing the spinning
○
i prefilter or reinstalling the oil pipeline.
364
Engine

element.
Caution!
○
nozzle!

Caution!
○
adblue solution in the adblue pump and adblue pipeline back to
the adblue box. This phase will last for 2 min, during which it is
forbidden to turn off the master switch of the vehicle power
supply.
365
Engine

The deshing cycle of DPF is different due to different user conditions for the whole
vehicle. The deashing cycle of Weichai product post-treatment DPF shall be
carried out according to the regular maintenance cycle of the engine and the
provisions of the maintenance specifications.
- Remove the small M8 bolts from the housing.
-Remove the clamps at both ends of the DPF and take out the DPF. Remove the
-DPF installation is carried out after deashing is completed. The V-band clamp at
easy to be damaged during disassembly and assembly. The corresponding
clamps and gaskets must be replaced with new ones after each DPF
maintenance.
366
Engine
Weichai WP4.6N engine

Fuel
The fuel used shall comply with the standard GB 19147 and be selected according
to the local ambient temperature on the basis of this standard provisions. The
details are as follows:
Engine oil refill

capacity
WP4.6N 13L CK-4
367
Engine

Operating Operating
Viscosity Viscosity
temperature temperature
grade grade
range, ℃ range, ℃
0W -35～-15 10W-50 -25～50
0W-20 -35～20 15W-30 -20～30
0W-30 -35～30 15W-40 -20～40
0W-40 -35～40 15W-50 -20～50
5W -30～-10 20W-30 -15～30
5W-20 -30～20 20W-40 -15～40
5W-30 -30～30 20W-50 -15～50
5W-40 -30～40 20 -10～20
5W-50 -30～50 30 -5～30
10W-30 -25～30 40 5～40
10W-40 -25～40 50 15～50
Note: For the viscidity grade of oils in the table, the smaller the number before W
is, the higher the low-temperature performance of the oils is; the greater the
number after W is, the greater the viscidity of the oils is; The
viscosity-temperature performance requirements of engine lubricating oil are
described in GB 11122.
Caution!
○
i sump.
-It is forbidden to mix the Weichai Power special engine oil
with engine oils from other manufacturers.
368
Engine
Engine coolant
coolant.
Caution!
○
-Check the coolant regularly, and change it in time according to the
i situation to prevent corrosion damage.
-It is forbidden to use water and inferior coolant as the coolant of
engine.
Model Coolant model Drain period
50,000 km/2
WP4.6N HEC-Ⅱ-25, HEC-Ⅱ-35, HEC-Ⅱ-40
years
369
Engine
Adblue solution
The quality and performance of the adblue solution shall meet the GB 29518
standard. The unqualified adblue solution may bring the risk of blocking the adblue
pump and adblue nozzle, and the metal impurities in the unqualified adblue
solution can easily lead to the permanent poisoning of SCR catalyst and the
decline of SCR catalytic converter efficiency. It is strictly forbidden to use any liquid
to replace adblue solution.
Caution!
○
-Adblue solution shall be stored in a sealed container in a cool,
i dry space, away from strong oxidizers. -When filling adblue
solution, professional filling equipment is recommended.
-The adblue solutionis is corrosive to the skin. If it accidentally
touches your skin or eyes during adding, rinse with water as
soon as possible; If pain persists, seek medical help. If you
swallow it, seek medical attention immediately.
370
Engine
Daily inspection
• Check the coolant liquid level, engine oil liquid level, fuel liquid level, and whether
sufficient.
• Check oil, water and gas for leakage.
• Check whether the external coupler and accessories are well connected and
fastened.
• Visually check the fan to see whether the fan bglades are damaged and whether
• Check whether the belt is too tight or too loose.
• Check the wiring connection and connector for damage.
• Check whether the exhaust temperature, color, sound and vibration of the engine
• Check whether oil inlet and return pipes of the supercharger are unobstructed
• Check the exhaust pipeline to ensure that there is no leakage, and ensure that
371
Engine
Maintenance cycle and maintenance specification of the engine

Purpose Road vehicles
Maintenance type First maintenance Regular maintenance
Maintenance period 3,000 km or 3 months 20,000 km or 3 months
Change the engine oil ● ●
Replace the oil filter or the filter element ● ●
Check and adjust the valve clearance ● ●
Replace the fuel filter element ●
Check the coolant capacity and fill up coolant ● ●
Fastening the pipe clamp of the cooling pipeline ●
Fasten the air inlet pipeline, hose and flange connectors ● ●
Check the air filter maintenance indicator light or indicator ●
Clean the dust cup of the air filter (excluding air filters of
●
automatic dust discharge type)
Clean the main filter element of air filter When the indicator lights up
Replace the main filter element of the air filter. See the relevant provisions in the manual
Replace the safety filter element of the air filter After cleaning the main filter element for 5 times
Inspect and fasten the belt ● ●
372
Engine
Continued from the previous page

Purpose Road vehicles
Maintenance type First maintenance Regular maintenance
Maintenance period 3,000 km or 3 months 20,000 km or 3 months
Check the supercharger bearing clearance Every 120,000 km
Check and adjust the clutch stroke ● ●
Adblue pump filter element ●
Adblue nozzle shim Each time the adblue nozzle is removed
Clean the adblue box and adblue box filter element ●
Clean the filter screen of adblue box sensor ●
Clean the filter screen of adblue pump liquid intake

●
pipe

2: A diesel engine that has parked for more than half a year must be subject to corresponding maintenance maintenance, such as redoing the oil seal.
3: Weichai will provide maintenance advice upon user request.
4: For every 5000 km of operation of high-speed and standard-load highway vehicles (light trucks), replenish the engine oil to the upper line .
373
Engine

Unscrew the drain plug at the bottom of the oil sump, drain the engine oil, and
tighten the drain plug.
Drain plug
Filler cap
374
Engine

• Loosen the oil filter cover and screw out the filter cover by about (10~15) mm
(when a small hole is exposed on the filter cover,
After It has been screwed out for about 10 mm), stay for (3~4) minutes, wait until
the dirty engine oil is discharged to the oil sump, then remove the filter cover
(normally the filter element will be brought out).
• Remove the filter element from the filter cover, remove the O-ring from the filter
cover, install a new O-ring, apply oil to the surface of the O-ring, screw the new
filter element in the filter cover groove, and apply oil to the small O-ring at the
bottom of the filter element.
• Install the filter cover and the filter element on the filter base and tighten the filter
cover according to the torque marked on the filter cover.
• Start the diesel engine to check whether there is any oil leakage.
Caution!
○
- Avoid installing the filter element and filter cover separately. The
i filter element and filter cover should be combined together before
installing them on the filter base.
-Unqualified diesel or oil filter elements will lead to early wear of
bushings in the crankshaft and other parts, exacerbating the risk
of exceeding emissions.
375
Engine

• Remove the old fuel filter element. If the water collecting vessel installed on the
• Lubricate the seal.
• Screw on the filter by hand until the seal engages with the interface.
• Continue to screw the filter by hand until the filter is firmly installed (approx. 3/4
turns).
• Vent until no bubble appears.
• Conduct leak test.
intake system .
376
Engine

and washed with clean water before installation. It is forbidden to slap or tap the
filter element.
Caution!
○
nozzle!

Caution!
○
After the engine is shut down (only T15 is powered off), the SCR
i system will automatically enter the suck-back state and suck the
supply.

Clean the adblue box every 60,000 km or 6 months to avoid blocking and wear of
the adblue pump caused by particulates and impurities in the box.
377
Engine
The adblue box sensor is an intelligent sensor, which is responsible

for measuring the liquid level and adblue concentration
(measurement of adblue quality is added) and corresponds to the
data in the engine ECU. Replacing a mismatched adblue box may
cause OBD failure, resulting in engine torque limitation. If
replacement is required, the adblue box from the original
manufacturer and of the same model shall be used.
378
Engine
Weichai WP6H engine

Engine fuel oil
The fuel used shall comply with the standard GB 19147 and be selected according to the local ambient temperature on the basis of this
standard provisions. The details are as follows:
- 5# vehicle diesel: the diesel with a risk rate of 10% shall be used in areas with the lowest temperature above 8 ℃;
- 0# vehicle diesel: the diesel with a risk rate of 10% shall be used in areas with the lowest temperature above 4 ℃;
- -10# vehicle diesel: the diesel with a risk rate of 10% shall be used in areas with the lowest temperature above -5 ℃;
-20# vehicle diesel: the diesel with a risk rate of 10% shall be used in areas with temperature above -14℃.;
Engine oil refill
Model Product type
capacity
WP6H CK-4 19L
379
Engine

Viscosity grade Applicable temperature range ℃
0W-20 -35～20
5W-30 -30～30
10W-30 -25～30
15W-40 -20～40
20W-50 20 W ~ 50
Note: For the viscidity grade of oils in the table, the smaller the number before W is, the higher the low-temperature performance of the oils is; the greater the
number after W is, the greater the viscidity of the oils is; The viscosity-temperature performance requirements of engine lubricating oil are described in GB
11122.
Caution!
○
-Before starting the engine, check the engine oil level in the oil sump.
i -Do not check the engine oil level when the engine is running.
-It is forbidden to mix the Weichai Power special engine oil with engine oils from other manufacturers.
Engine coolant
The freezing points of the special coolant for Weichai Power are - 25 ℃, - 35 ℃, - 40 ℃ and other specifications. Please select the special
coolant for Weichai with different freezing points according to the local ambient temperature. The selection principle is that the freezing point
is about 10 ℃ lower than the local air temperature. See the following table for the specifications of heavy-load engine coolant.
380
Engine
Caution!
○
Adblue solution
Caution!
○
i
381
Engine
Daily inspection
• Check the coolant liquid level, engine oil liquid level, fuel liquid level, and
whether the lubricating grease at the position where the lubricating grease is
filled is sufficient.
• Check oil, water and gas for leakage.
• Check whether the external coupler and accessories are well connected and
fastened.
• Check whether the fan and belt are too tight or too loose.
• Check whether the exhaust temperature, color, sound and vibration of the
engine are normal and whether the speed is stable.
• Check whether oil inlet and return pipes of the supercharger are unobstructed
• Check the exhaust pipeline to ensure that there is no leakage, and ensure that
• Clean up weeds and foreign matter on the surfaces of engine, water tank and
intercooler, especially the surfaces of high-temperature components and
electrical components. Remove the dust in the dust exhaust bag of the air filter
every day (in a dusty environment, remove the dust attached to the paprt
cartridge surface, and replace the filter element if necessary) and the
accumulated debris inside the electric generator.
382
Engine
Maintenance cycle and maintenance specification of the engine

Purpose Engineering vehicle (ordinary dump) Mixer truck, sanitation truck
Regular Regular Regular

Maintenance type First maintenance First maintenance First maintenance
maintenance maintenance maintenance
3,000 km-6 000 60,000 km/6 2,000 km-3,000 10,000 km/2 3,000 km-6,000 30,000 km/6
Maintenance period
km/3 months months km/3 months months km/3 months months
Replace the centrifugal

● ● ●
filter element
Replace the oil filter or

● ● ● ● ● ●
the filter element
Check and adjust the

● ● ● ● ● ●
valve clearance
Check water pump

(lubricate by grease ● ● ● ● ● ●
cup)
Replace the fuel filter

● ● ● ●
element
Check the coolant

capacity and fill up ● ● ● ● ● ●
coolant
Fastening the pipe

clamp of the cooling ● ● ●
pipeline
Fasten the air inlet

pipeline, hose and ● ● ● ● ● ●
flange connectors
Check the air filter

maintenance indicator ● ● ●
light or indicator
383
Engine

Purpose Engineering vehicle (ordinary dump) Mixer truck, sanitation truck
Regular Regular Regular
Maintenance type First maintenance First maintenance First maintenance
3,000 km-6,000 60,000 km/6 2,000 km-3,000 10,000 km/2 3,000 km-6,000 30,000 km/6
Maintenance period
Clean the dust cup of
the air filter (excluding
● ● ●
air filters of automatic
dust discharge type)
Clean the main filter
When the indicator lights up When the indicator lights up When the indicator lights up
element of air filter
Replace the main filter
See the relevant provisions in the manual See the relevant provisions in the manual See the relevant provisions in the manual
element of the air filter.
Replace the safety
After cleaning the main filter element for 5 After cleaning the main filter element for 5 After cleaning the main filter element for 5
filter element of the air
times times times
filter
Inspect and fasten the
● ● ● ● ● ●
triangle belt
Check the
supercharger bearing Every 240,000 km Every 80,000 km Every 150,000 km
clearance
Check and adjust the
● ● ● ● ● ●
clutch stroke
Adblue pump filter
● ● ●
element
Adblue nozzle shim Each time the adblue nozzle is removed Each time the adblue nozzle is removed Each time the adblue nozzle is removed
Clean the adblue box
and adblue box filter ● ● ●
element
Refer to the relevant provisions in the Refer to the relevant provisions in the Refer to the relevant provisions in the
DPF deashing
manual manual manual
Note 1:● A maintenance mark is required. Note 2: A diesel engine that has parked for more than half a year must be subject to corresponding maintenance, such
as redoing the oil seal. Note 3: Weichai will provide maintenance advice upon user request. Note 4: For every 15,000 km of operation, replenish the engine oil to
the upper line .
384
Engine

Unscrew the drain plug at the bottom of the oil sump, drain the engine oil, and then
screw on the drain plug.
Drain plug
Filler cap
385
Engine

•Remove the oil filter cover
•Remove the old filter element;
•Replace the rubber gasket of the filter cover;
•Clip the new filter element on the filter cover;
•Install the filter element and filter cover, and tighten the cover according to the
tightening torque shown on it;
•Start the diesel engine to check whether there is any oil leakage.
loose.
Tighten or replace the part if necessary to ensure the tightness of the air intake
system.
The left part of the fuel filter module used for WP6H diesel engine is a fuel coarse
filter, and the right part is a fuel fine filter,
When replacing the fuel filter element, unscrew the upper cover of the filter to
replace the filter element.
386
Engine
Coarse filter Fine filter -Turn the filter cover counterclockwise, and then the filter element is screwed out
together with the upper cover.
-Rotate in the opposite direction to remove the old filter element.
- Check whether sealing ring of the new filter element is intact. Press the new filter
element into the filter seat.
- Screw in the filter cover, tighten the filter cover clockwise and the tightening
torque shall be 25 ~ 35 Nm.
- Loosen the bleed screw, press the hand pump or use the electric pump to
exhaust the air, and tighten the bleed screw after the air is exhausted.
- Loosen the oil inlet bolt of the fuel injection pump, press the hand pump or use
the electric pump to exhaust the air, and tighten the bolt after the air is exhausted
, and start the engine to check for oil leakage and other faults.
387
Engine

element.
Caution!
○
- During each replacement or disassembly of the adblue nozzle,
i it is necessary to check the state of the adblue nozzle. If it is
damaged or deformed, it is necessary to replace the adblue
nozzle!

Caution!
○
- After the engine is shut down (only T15 is powered off), the
i SCR system will automatically enter the suck-back state and
suck the adblue solution in the adblue pump and adblue
pipeline back to the adblue box. This phase will last for 2 min,
during which it is forbidden to turn off the master switch of the
vehicle power supply.
388
Engine

389
Engine
Maintenance of WP12/WP13 Weichai engine s

Fuel
The diesel shall meet the requirements of GB 19147 and be selected according to
the local ambient temperature. The recommended ones are as follows:
Caution!
○
The fuel used by the vehicle shall meet the requirements for
i vehicle diesel specified in GB19147 .
390
Engine
Lubricating oil
Diesel engine CK-4 4L,18L,170kg

performance of the oils is; the greater the number after W is, the greater the viscidity of the oils is; the viscosity-temperature
performance requirements of engine lubricating oil are described in GB 11122.
391
Engine

Engine oil refill
capacity
WP12/WP13 25-28L CK-4
Caution!
○
i sump.
-It is forbidden to mix the Weichai Power special engine oil with
engine oils from other manufacturers.
Engine coolant
coolant.
392
Engine
Caution!
○
Adblue solution
Caution!
○
i
393
Engine
Daily inspection
sufficient.
fastened.
394
Engine

Purpose Engineering vehicle (ordinary dump) Mixer truck
Regular
First Regular Regular
Maintenance type First maintenance First maintenance maintenanc
e
3,000 km-6,000 120,000 km/6 2,000 km-3,000 km/3 30,000 km/6 3,000 km-6,000 km/3 30,000 km/6
Maintenance period
km/3 months months months months months months
Replace the oil filter or the
● ● ● ● ● ●
filter element
Check and adjust the valve
● ● ● ● ● ●
clearance
Replace the fuel filter
● ● ●
element
Clean or replace the oil-gas
● ● ●
separator filter element
Check water pump
● ● ●
(lubricate by grease cup)
Check the coolant capacity
● ● ● ● ● ●
and fill up coolant
Fastening the pipe clamp of
● ● ●
the cooling pipeline
Fasten the air inlet pipeline,
● ● ● ● ● ●
hose and flange connectors
Check the air filter
maintenance indicator light ● ● ●
or indicator
Clean the dust cup of the air
filter (excluding air filters of
● ● ●
automatic dust discharge
type)
When the When the When the indicator lights When the When the indicator lights up When the
Clean the main filter
indicator lights indicator lights up indicator indicator
element of air filter
up up lights up lights up
395
Engine

Purpose Mixer truck

Maintenance type
3,000 km-6,000 120,000 km/6 2,000 km-3,000 30,000 km/6 3,000 km-6,000 30,000 km/6
Maintenance period
Replace the main filter element of See "Air filter" See "Air filter"
See "Air filter"
the air filter.
Replace the safety filter element of

the air filter
Check the supercharger bearing

Every 240,000 km Every 80,000 km Every 150,000 km
clearance
Adblue nozzle shim
Clean the adblue box and adblue

● ● ●
box filter element
DPF deashing cycle 240,000 km/24 months 180,000 km/36 months 180,000 km/36 months

Note 3: For every 15,000 km of operation, replenish the engine oil to the upper line .
Note 5: For road vehicles at high speed and standard load: 1. Engine configuration: 1) Oil sump capacity is 36 L. 2) The lubricating oil meets the requirements of CK – 4 and
E6 at the same time, and the recommended viscosity grade is 5 W – 30. 2. Working condition limit: light load condition <32 L/100 km, medium load condition 32 L/100 km-50
L/ 100 km. 3. The fuel shall be the ones complying with national VI and above and meeting the GB19147 requirements. 4. Use adblue that meets the GB29518-2013
requirements. If any one of the conditions such as configuration, working condition, fuel and adblue is not met, the drain period is half of the periodical maintenance period; if
two of them are not met, the drain period is 1/4 of the periodical maintenance period
396
Engine

-Unscrew the drain plug at the bottom of the oil sump, drain the engine oil, and
then screw on the drain plug.
Drain plug
-Open the filler cap, add engine oil from the oil filler, observe the dipstick scale until
Filler cap
397
Engine

- Remove the head end cover of the engine oil cooling filter module
The top part of the module is removed by loosening the upper bolts of the engine
oil cooling filter module with the socket wrench, so that the paper filter element can
be clearly seen. The top part of the module is equipped with rotor filter element
inside, and only a small part of the engine enters the rotor filter during operation of
the engine.
- Slowly remove the filter element and replace it,
- Install the new filter element inside the module so that it naturally falls to the
bottom of the module. Note: the lower end of the paprt cartridge and the inside of
the module are designed with a special guiding and positioning structure. After the
filter element is placed inside the module, the paprt cartridge will be naturally
positioned inside the module along the central pipe. In addition, do not press down
the paprt cartridge with force after the paprt cartridge is installed.
- Hold the top cover with one hand and rotate the centrifugal filter base
circumferentially with the other hand a little, the clip is released, and the centrifugal
filter base is separated from the top cover; Take out the centrifugal rotor filter
element up along the central axis and replace it. Note: The O-ring is for one-time
use, and the O-ring must be replaced at the same time when replacing the filter
element or filter cover; and ensure that there are no impurities in the groove.
398
Engine
- Replace the center pipe of filter element.

In cases where the central pipe inside the filter element is damaged or where it is
possible to replace the central pipe inside the filter element when replacing the
filter element, it is necessary to install the central pipe. The installation sequence
should be treated with caution. After installing the central pipe, install the eilter
element. When installing the central pipe, align the two notches on its lower end
with the two protrusions on the base, and then apply a little force to install the
central pipe. At this time, a "click" sound will be heard and the central pipe cannot
be rotated, indicating that the central pipe has been reliably installed.
intake system.
The fuel filter used in WP9H/WP10H diesel engine integrates fuel coarse filter and
fuel fine filter. The upper part is a fuel fine filter and the lower part is a fuel coarse
filter. When replacing the fuel fine filter element, you need to unscrew the upper
cover of the filter for filter element replacement. When replacing the fuel coarse
Upper cover filter element, you need to remove the lower housing.
Diesel fine filter
Diesel coarse filter
Lower housing
399
Engine
- Remove the old fuel filter element; If the water collecting vessel installed on the
-Lubricate the seal.
- Screw on the filter by hand until the seal engages with the interface.
-Continue to screw the filter by hand until the filter is firmly installed (about 3/4
turns)
- Vent until no bubble appears.
-Conduct leak test.
Caution!
Exhaust the air in the prefilter when replacing the spinning
○
i prefilter or reinstalling the oil pipeline.
400
Engine

element.
Caution!
○
nozzle!

Caution!
○
supply.
401
Engine

The deshing cycle of DPF is different due to different user conditions for the whole
vehicle. The deashing cycle of Weichai product post-treatment DPF shall be
carried out according to the regular maintenance cycle of the engine and the
provisions of the maintenance specifications.
- Remove the small M8 bolts from the housing.
-Remove the clamps at both ends of the DPF and take out the DPF. Remove the
-DPF installation is carried out after deashing is completed. The V-band clamp at
easy to be damaged during disassembly and assembly. The corresponding
clamps and gaskets must be replaced with new ones after each DPF
maintenance.
402
Clutch
Clutch
Operating parameters
Working medium: compressed air, DOT3 brake fluid;
Maximum operating pressure: 4MPa for brake fluid and 0.85MPa for air;
Operating temperature:- 40 ℃ ~ +80 ℃;
Pedal travel: a maximum total stroke of 130mm;
Pedal force: not more than 190 N when assisted.
403
Clutch
Clutch brake fluid change

Drain period (not to be changed in the first maintenance)
Quality Oil and oil Mileage or time between two oil
Assembly Oil name Remarks
grade quantity changes
The after-sale oil specified by SINOTRUK

160,000 km or 2 years, whichever must be used, otherwise, SINOTRUK will only
Clutch Brake fluid DOT3 0.5L
comes first. provide the paid service if the clutch and clutch
control system are damaged.
Precautions
• Before adding or changing the brake fluid, confirm whether the oil storage tank and the surrounding area are clean, and tighten the oil
storage tank cover after adding the brake fluid.
• When changing the brake fluid, all the residue in the hydraulic system shall be drained, and then add the brake fluid of the specified grade
and the same batch.
• The brake fluid is corrosive, so try to avoid brake fluid splashing on people and
the paint surface of vehicle.
Warning!
Engine oil and lubricating grease are strictly prohibited from
entering the hydraulic pipeline, otherwise the clutch master
cylinder and subsidiary power cylinder will be damaged.
404
Clutch
Hydraulic pipeline exhaust

If there is air in the clutch hydraulic pipeline, the effective stroke of subsidiary
power cylinder push rod will be reduced, resulting in incomplete clutch
separation and difficulty in gear shifting. After the brake fluid is changed or
replenished, or the pipeline is assembled or disassembled, the exhaust shall
be discharged (the exhaust shall be discharged by two persons
cooperatively).
1
Remove the dust cap ② on the bleed screw ①, wipe the bleed screw ①
clean, connect one end of the vinyl hose to the bleed screw ①, and put the
other end into a transparent container. Keep sufficient dynamic fluid in the oil
storage tank during the exhaust process. Tighten the bleed screw ① ,
repeatedly press the clutch pedal for several times to keep the clutch pressed
to the bottom, then loosen the bleed screw ①, discharge the brake fluid with
bubbles into the container, and tighten the bleed screw ① immediately.
2
Repeat the above operations for several times until the brake fluid from the
bleed screw ① is completely free of bubbles. Finally, install the dust cap ②
back onto the bleed screw ①.
Precautions
• During exhausting, be cautious to loosen the pedal after tightening the bleed
screw to avoid air intake.
• The pedal shall be raised to the maximum height so that the brake fluid in the
oil storage tank can be replenished into the master cylinder.
405
Clutch
Application of clutch wear indicator

• The clutch wear indicator (composed of ①, ② and ③) is located above the
4 valve body of the clutch booster cylinder ④. You can learn whether the
L 3 driven plate of the clutch is worn to the limit by observing the position of the
card type indicator ②. The clutch wear indicator is used to match the
2 pull-type clutch model.
• As the clutch driven plate wears, the clearance L between card type indicator
1 ② and measuring rod seat ③ will gradually increase. For HW12706 T and
HW12710 C transmissions, when L = 20 mm, the driven plate should be
replaced; For other transmissions, when L = 23 mm, the driven plate should
be replaced.
• After the initial installation of clutch booster cylinder ④, the state of card type
indicator ② and measuring rod ① is similar to that shown in the figure,
and the clearance L is >0. At this time, it is necessary to push the card type
indicator ② along the measuring rod ① to contact the measuring rod seat
③, that is, initialization. Do not move the card type indicator ② during
normal use of the vehicle.
• After replacing the clutch driven plate, push the measuring rod ① to the
direction of the measuring rod seat ③ until it does not move (the thrust is
about 50 N, and the thrust is about 80 N after the card type indicator ②
contacts the measuring rod seat ③); If L>0, the card type indicator② needs
to be pushed along the measuring rod① to contact with the measuring rod
seat③, this is called initialization.
406
Clutch
Common faults and troubleshooting

Fault Possible causes Troubleshooting
Cleaning of oil stain on clutch pressure plate, driven

Oil stain on the friction plate
plate and flywheel.
Clutch slippage
The clutch lining has worn to the limit. Replace the driven plate
The clutch pressure plate assembly is damaged. Replace the pressure plate assembly
There's air in the clutch hydraulic system, and the effective

Incomplete clutch separation Expel the air from the hydraulic system
separation stroke gets smaller.
The clutch shudders when Release bearing and release pull ring are not fully assembled in
Reassemble the release bearing
starting place
The release bearing is not fully assembled in place or the release Reassemble the release bearing or replace the
Clutch not separated
pull ring is damaged and the release bearing comes out release pull ring assembly
Poor sinking and returning of Replace the clutch master cylinder, and change the
Expansion of the sealing ring of the clutch master cyclinder
clutch pedal brake fluid
407
Transmission
Transmission
HW transmission
Lubricating oil grade and drain period
The type, fuel charge and drain period of lubricating oil for HW series
1
transmissions are shown in attached Table 1.
When changing the lubricating oil for transmissions, first unscrew the drain plug
③, drain the original lubricating oil in the transmission (properly dispose of the
discharged waste oil), and clean the filter screen assembly. Then, fill the
lubricating oil of specified model from oil filler ① and tighten the drain plug.
Oil level height inspection
• Park the car on a level road.
• When the oil level is stable and the oil temperature is close to normal
temperature, unscrew the screw plug ② at the oil level observation port.
• If the oil level is lower than observation port ②, add the heavy-duty vehicle gear
2
oil in Schedule 1.
• Unscrew the screw plug ① at the oil filler, and add gear oil until the oil overflows
from the observation port ②.
• Tighten the screw plugs ① ②.
• The tightening torques for the screw plugs at the oil filling port, oil level
observation port and oil discharging port are all (40~50) Nm. 2
408
Transmission
Precautions
• Check the oil level every 10,000km. Due to the volume expansion of hot oil, in
order to prevent inaccurate measurement, the vehicle cannot be checked
immediately after driving. It can be checked only when the oil level is stable and
the oil temperature is close to normal temperature. The oil level should be flush
with the lower edge of the oil level observation port . Fill the gear oil until the oil
overflows from the hole. In order to prevent chemical reactions of different
models of lubricating oil, the lubricating oil supplemented shall be of the same
model as the original lubricating oil .
• When changing the lubricating oil, the original lubricating oil in the transmission
shall be completely drained first and then the filter screen assembly shall be
cleaned.
Warning!
SINOTRUK-specific transmission gear oil should be used,
otherwise the transmission will be damaged and the
SINOTRUK will only provide paid service.
409
Transmission
Schedule I Grade of transmission lubricating oil and drain period (conventional oil)
Refill capacity Quality grade Mileage or time
Assembly 1)/L (reference and viscidity Mileage or time for the first change between two oil Tips
value) grade changes
HW12706T(C) 12 1. The special

① over-the-road truck: after-sales gear
HW12710 9 1. Box-type transmission with an oil filter: ① oil specified by
over-the-road truck: change the filter element express (Average fuel
consumption less than the SINOTRUK
HW13709XST(C)(L) 9.5 after driving for 20,000 km at the first time but must be used,
do not change oil; Mileage or time of first oil 30 L/100 km) 240,000
km or 24 months; Light otherwise the
HW15710 (C) ( L) ( A) 12 change: express (Average fuel consumption transmission will
less than 30 L /100 km) 240,000 km or 24 load condition (Average
fuel consumption 30-40 be damaged,
HW16709XST(C)(L) 11 months; Light load condition (Average fuel and the
consumption 30-40 L/100 km) 200,000 km or L/100 km) 200,000 km
or 24 months; Medium SINOTRUK will
HW19710 (C) ( L) ( A) 12 24 months; Medium load condition (Average only provide
fuel consumption 40-50 L /100 km) 160,000 km load condition (Average
fuel consumption 40-50 paid service. 2.
HW19710T(C)L 17 or 24 months; Heavy load conditions (Average Special
Conventional oil: fuel consumption greater than 50 L /100 km) L/100 km) 160,000 km
or 24 months; Heavy transmission oils
HW19712(C)(L 13 SAE 80W-90 80,000 km or 12 months; Whichever comes of different
long-acting gear first. ② municipal vehicle/urban construction load condition (Average
fuel consumption more viscosity grades
HW20716 14 oil (comply with truck/dump truck/mixer truck: a. Change filter shall not be
J2360) than 50 L/100 km)
element after driving for 20,000 km but do not mixed. 3. The
80,000 km or 12 months;
HW transmission
HW21716XSTL 12.5 change oil; Mileage or time of first oil change: refill capacity in
Transmission
Whichever comes first.

40,000 km or 6 months; b. Change the table is the
HW23710 12 HW19712(C) (LHW19712(C) L oil change filter ② municipal
fuel charge of
element at the same time); Whichever comes vehicle/urban
the basic model,
HW25712XS 13 first under bad working condition (severe construction truck/dump
which is only for
overload, poor road condition and large dust) truck/mixer truck: 40,000
reference. It is
HW25712XS(C)L 12.5 for 20,000 km or 6 months. ③ Mine truck: km or 6 months; 20,000
recommended
km or 6 months under
10,000 km or 2 months or 500 hours of that the vehicle
HW25712XS(C)J 15 severe working
operation of the main engine, whichever should be in a
conditions (severe
comes first. 2. box-type transmission without horizontal state
HW25712XST(C)L 12.5 overload, poor road
oil filter 2000-5000 km when refilling
conditions and heavy
and the refill
HW25716XL(C)(A) 12.5 dust); whichever comes
capacity of the
first. ③ mine truck: lubricating oil
HW19710T(C) 18 10,000 km or 2 months should be
or 500 hours of judged by oil
operation of the main level sightglass.
SAE 80W-90 engine, Whichever The principle is
long-acting gear comes first. ④ When that the
2000-5000 km
oil (comply with changing the gear oil, lubricating oil
HW19712T(C)(L 17
J2360) the filter element of the liquid level is
filter must be replaced at flush with the
the same time. bottom of the oil
level sightglass.
410
Transmission
Note: 1) Accumulation of the fuel charge after installation of the power takeoff and retarder:
a. Add a right rear power takeoff: for HW13709XST transmissions, the fuel charge shall increase by 0.1 L, and for other box-type
transmissions, the fuel charge shall increase by 0.5 L;
b. Additional side power takeoff: transmission fuel charge is increased by 0.5 L;
c. Additional retarder: transmission fuel charge is increased by 1.5 L;
d. Adding one-shaft power takeoff: when adding one-shaft power takeoff, fill gear oil of the same model as in the transmission separately.
Serial Model of one-shaft Fuel charge of one-shaft power Applicable transmission
No. power takeoff takeoff /L
1 HW140Q 11.5 (with oil cooler), 6 (without oil HW12706T/ HW12706TC
cooler)
2 HW60Q 6
3 HW45Q 6 DC6J70T/DC6J95T
4 HW80Q-F300 6 DC6J95T
5 HW80Q/HW100Q 8 HW15710 / HW19710T / HW19710 / HW19712 / HW23710 /
HW21712
6 11.3 HW15710/HW19710/HW23710/HW19709XST/HW19712/HW21712
7 9.7 HW25712X
HW80QZ/HW100QZ
8 10.5 HW16709XST
9 10 HW13709XST
10 HW160QZ 12 (with an oil cooler) HW25 series
For example, 1) Reference fuel charge of HW19712 transmission with retarder and right rear power takeoff: 13+1.5+0.5=15 L. 2) For
transmissions with a filter screen, clean the filter screen when changing the gear oil.
3) For the HW13710 transmission, fill 8.5 L oil separately to the HW60Q one-shaft power takeoff, fill 0.5 L oil separately to the left upper
HW50 power takeoff, and fill 0.8 L oil separately to the left upper HW70 power takeoff.
411
Transmission
SmartShift Intelligent Automa○tic Mechanical Transmission

R
○
R
The SmartShift Intelli gent Automatic Mechanical Transmission belongs to AMT
(Automatic Mechanical Transmission) series transmissions made by SINOTRUK.
This series of transmissions are automatically shifted by the electric control
system (or the driver can manually send a shift request), which can greatly reduce
the driver's labor intensity and improve driving comfort.
Intelligent gearshift system
During the shift process, the AMT operation status is displayed on the dashboard.
The main information is as follows:
"A" or "M" in the figure: A automatic/M manual mode;
"C" in the figure: creeper gear;
"P" or "E" in the figure: P power/E economy mode;
"5" in the figure: indicating the current working gear of the transmission;
In the figure, “4”/“12” are the appropriate gears recommended by the control
system according to the current working conditions.
In the shift process, flashing "▲" indicates upshift, and flashing "▼" indicates
downshift.
Engine oil pressure (x0.1 MPa)
412
Transmission
Engine oil pressure (x0.1 MPa) Intelligent gearshift system

1 AMT warning lights are divided into red and yellow lights, with specific meanings
as follows:
The red parking signal warning light ① lights up, and there is an AMT fault
displayed on the instrument, which indicates that the AMT system has a serious
fault. Stop the vehicle immediately and do not drive until the fault is removed!
Brake pressure (x0.1 MPa)
The yellow alarm signal light ② lights up, and there is an AMT fault displayed on
2 the instrument, indicating that the AMT system is faulty, but the vehicle can still
drive safely, and inspection and maintenance should be carried out as soon as
possible.
The AMT series transmissions offer the following two modes of operation:
▼ Automatic mode (A), which is automatically shifted by the control system.
▼ Manual mode (M), shift directly controlled by the driver.
413
Transmission
A/M function selection

The driver can switch between manual and automatic functions through key ① on
the handle.
The display on the dashboard will display the current working mode of the
transmission in real-time.
The default operation mode is automatic.
The driver can switch the A/M function at any time during starting and driving.
Method for switching from manual function to automatic function:
Press the key ① of the gear shifting handle once, and the display screen shows
that the operation mode is "M", indicating that the switch is successful.
The operation method of switching the automatic function under the manual
1
function is the same as that of switching the manual function under the automatic
function.
Automatic function (A)
The automatic function is the default operation function of the system. Under the
automatic function, the driver only needs to select the starting gear (including Drive, Push the handle forward to engage drive
(press and hold the function but○
F ton) or
Reverse or Neutral) through the gear shifting handle. During driving, the system will
shift down
automatically select the most suitable gear according to the current vehicle
condition, and the driver can also intervene in the shift operation through the
handle.
Manual function (M) Function Neutral
button button
Under the manual function, any shift request is issued by the driver, and the driver
Pull the handle backward to engage the
decides the shift timing, but the clutch is still controlled by the system to reverse gear (press and hold the function
automatically complete the relevant actions. ○F button) or shift down
Button for switching between manual

function and automatic function
Creeping mode Button for switching between the economy

button mode <E> and power mode <P>
414
Transmission
Push the handle forward to engage drive

Vehicle starting
(press and hold the function but○
F ton) or • Select the appropriate starting gear (the control system only allows starting at
shift down
gears 1~8, and it is recommended to start at gears 1~4);
• Lightly step on the accelerator pedal to start the vehicle;
• Release the parking brake.
Function Neutral
button button When it is necessary to start in the medium idle mode, please keep the current
Pull the handle backward to engage the gear as neutral, then press the C button, and then
reverse gear (press and hold the function
○F button) or shift down engage the starting gear, step on the accelerator pedal, release the parking brake,
and then start driving. In this mode, it can only be operated in gears 1 to 4. When C
Button for switching between manual mode is not required, please press the C key again to exit.
function and automatic function
When it is necessary to engage the high idle mode to start, please keep the
current gear as neutral, then press the C button for more than 5 s, then shift to the
starting gear, step on the accelerator pedal to the bottom, and then start driving.
Creeping mode Button for switching between the economy After the vehicle starts normally, it automatically exits the high idle mode, without
button mode <E> and power mode <P>
needing to press the C key.
415
Transmission
Creep mode
The AMT system provides a creep mode that allows the vehicle to travel slowly
under certain operating conditions.
The driver switches to M mode by double-clicking the M/A key on the handle, step
on the brake pedal to engage the starting gear, release the brake pedal after the
gear is successfully engaged, and the vehicle moves slowly; Manual upshift is
allowed during creep (up to 5th gear). In the creep process, you can step on the
accelerator pedal to accelerate, release the accelerator pedal to continue the
creep mode; You can also step on the brake pedal to slow down or stop the car,
release the brake pedal to continue to drive in the creep mode. Creep mode
supports gears 1-5 and gear R1 and the driver can select the gear according to the
working condition. Pressing the accelerator pedal and changing the gear will not
exit the creep mode. Only manually switching to mode A can exit the creep mode.
Warning!
-Creep mode may cause clutch slipping. Please use with care;
-It is not allowed to use the creeping function on the up and
down ramps (>2%);
- Do not switch to the creep mode during driving.
416
Transmission
Operation in automatic mode of driving

Upshift and downshift
During driving, the control system will automatically upshift and downshift
according to the vehicle operating conditions.
Acceleration
To enable the vehicle to obtain the maximum accelerating ability, the accelerator
pedal can be pressed to the bottom. The specific operation steps are:
-Switch to P mode.
-Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The control system will keep on the current gear or select a lower gear to run. After
that, the vehicle will gain enough power and the speed will increase rapidly.
Deceleration
Depress the brake pedal or release the accelerator pedal, and the vehicle will slow
down.
417
Transmission
Manual shift in automatic mode

When the vehicle is running in automatic mode, the driver can intervene by handle
operation. In automatic mode, push handle ① forward for upshift, and push
handle ① backward for downshift.
Only when the operating environment of the vehicle meets the shift requirements, 1
the handle action in the automatic mode can realize the shift. Handle action in
automatic mode can affect the operation in automatic mode, but it will not release
automatic mode and will not switch the transmission operation mode to manual
mode.
418
Transmission
Operation in manual mode of driving

Under the manual mode, the shift action is issued by the driver, but the clutch is
automatically controlled by the system to complete relevant actions.
If the engine speed fails to reach the speed required by the target gear, the control
system will switch to a suitable gear according to the current speed, which is not
necessarily the target gear; If the current operating environment control system
1 does not allow shift, a warning sound will be issued to indicate that the driver's
request for shift is rejected.
Upshift
According to current traffic environment, do not change the current position of the
accelerator pedal when shifting without special circumstances.
When the driver pushes the handle forward and does not press the function key
①(round key F on the left side of the handle), the driver should make a shift
request to raise at least one gear; When the function key is pressed, a shift
request for moving up one gear is issued. The target gear stops flashing on the
display, indicating successful shift.
419
Transmission
Downshift
According to current traffic environment, do not change the current position of the
accelerator pedal when shifting without special circumstances.
When the driver pushes the handle backward and does not press the function key
① (round key F on the left side of the handle), the driver should make a shift
request to lower at least one gear; When the function key is pressed, a downshift 1
request to drop one gear is issued. The target gear stops flashing on the driver
display, indicating successful shift.
Shift can only be achieved if the operating environment of the vehicle meets the
shift requirements.
Shifting from neutral to the proper gear

When the vehicle is running, the gearbox is in the neutral, it can be changed to a
suitable gear through the gear shifting handle.
Change to a higher optimum gear:
Push the handle forward, when the driver's display shows target gear and the
target gear stops flashing, the shift process is completed.
Change to a lower optimum gear: Engine oil pressure (x0.1 MPa)
Pull the handle back, when the driver's display shows target gear and the target
gear stops flashing, the shift process is completed.
420
Transmission
Deceleration and stop

The vehicle slows down when the brake pedal is depressed and the control
system automatically downshifts when the brake pedal is released. Parking brake
shall be applied after the vehicle is stopped. After parking, the vehicle is still in a
gear, and if it stays in the gear for 90s and gives no other actions, it will
automatically return to the neutral gear.
Put the vehicle in neutral
If a long-time parking is required, the transmission shall be switched to the neutral
position so as to protect the clutch.
Press the neutral key ② (handle key N), and when the display shows the neutral
symbol "N", it means that the vehicle retuns to the neutral gear.
Caution!
When the temperature is lower than -15 ℃, place the transmission
○
i in neutral, start the engine to allow it to run at idle speed for a short
time until the engine runs smoothly, or drive with partial load to
allow the gearbox to reach normal operating temperature. It can be
driving normally thereafter.
421
Transmission
Engage the reverse gear

The vehicle can only be switched from neutral to reverse when it is parked. Please
follow the steps below:
- Switch the transmission to neutral first. 2
Press the function key ① ( handle key F) and push the handle ② backwards 1
The target gear stops flashing on the display, indicating successful shift. Pushing
the handle ② backward once is the reverse gear 1. If other gear reversing are
required, the shift operation mode is the same as the manual shift mode.
- Release the brake pedal, release the parking brake, and gently step on the
accelerator pedal to start reversing.
422
Transmission
Creeper gear mode (C)

The system provides the creeper gear mode to meet the needs of driving the
vehilcle at a low speed under some special working conditions.
Press the key ① on the handle to start the creeper gear mode, and press the key
① on the handle again to cancel the creeper gear mode.
1 The starting gear set in the creeper gear mode (C) (engage the starting gear in
Neutral when parking) is Gear 1, which can be switched between gears 1, 2, 3, 4
by handle operation.
When the vehicle is in motion, whether in manual mode or automatic mode, it can
only be switched between gears 1~4, that is, the maximum gear under the creeper
gear mode is limited to Gear 4. If the gear is higher than gear 4 while driving, the
control system does not allow the vehicle to enter creeper gear mode.
Economy / power mode (E/P)
Economic (E) mode: the control system selects the appropriate gear to make the
engine operate in the economic area.
Power (P) mode: the control system selects the appropriate gear to make the
vehicle obtain the maximum power.
The driver can switch between economy/power modes by pressing key ② on the
handle. The current operating mode of the vehicle will be displayed on the
instrument in real time. The default mode is the Economy (E) mode. Press the key
② once to switch to Power (P) mode, and then press it again to return to Economy
2 mode. The driver can switch between the economy and power modes at any time.
Economy/Power mode is valid only when the transmission is in automatic mode,
but is invalid in manual mode.
423
Transmission
Use of power takeoff

Press the power takeoff switch ① on the instrument directly. After the gear is
successfully engaged, the display will show that the power takeoff works. The
power takeoff can be engaged only in the parking state, and it is not allowed to
engage the power takeoff during driving. To take power during driving, the driver
can only stop the vehicle to engage the power takeoff, and then drive.
Parking and flameout

The driver must complete the following operations before shutting down the
engine through the key switch:
- Apply parking brake.
- Place the transmission in Neutral. The transmission does not fully return to the
neutral position until "N" is displayed on the display.
-The key switch is set to "0" gear, and the engine is shut down.
424
Transmission
Warning!
-To park the vehicle for a long time, press the key "N (neutral)" on
the handle and implement the parking brake.
- If the engine is directly shut down on a gear and the vehicle has
insufficient air pressure, the transmission cannot return to the
neutral gear, and the engine may not be started smoothly next time.
Therefore, be sure to engage the neutral gear before parking!
- Be sure that the air pressure in the air route is not less than 0.65
MPa (6.5 bar) to ensure the normal use of various functions of the
AMT system.
-If the air route of the vehicle leaks, the residual air pressure
cannot ensure the clutch action and correct shift for a long time,
and the vehicle should be moved to a safe area for service as soon
as possible (the vehicle cannot be started again)!
-If a transmission alarm or failure sign appears on the instrument
display, do not start the car until the fault is successfully
eliminated.
-It is not allowed that the engine speed is lower than the idle speed,
otherwise the clutch may be separated automatically!
- It is forbidden to use the small accelerator for a long time when
driving the vehicle, which easily causes clutch overload and
affects the service life.
425
Transmission
Operating temperature Caution!

The maximum temperature of the transmission during continuous -The revelant harness connectors and oil and
operation shall not exceed 120 ℃, and the minimum temperature
shall not be lower than -40 ℃ . If the operating temperature
○
i gas lines shall be checked regularly, which shall
be free of leakage, loosening, etc.
exceeds 120 ℃, it will bring decomposition of lubricating oil and - Transmissions within the “three guarantees”
shorten the service life of the transmission. In cold region, in order period are not allowed to be disassembled and
to ensure the shift performance at low temperature, the warm-up of assembled without permission.
the vehicle must be conducted at neutral gear in-site, and the
vehicle can only be driven after the engine water temperature
reaches above 45 degree.
Any of the following conditions can make the operating temperature
of the transmission exceed 120 ℃:
- Continuously work at a driving speed <32 km/h.
- High engine speed.
-High ambient temperature.
-Vortex surround transmission.
- The exhaust system is too close to the transmission.
-High-power overspeed operation.
Inclined angle of working
When the inclined angle of working of the transmission exceeds
15 °, the lubrication may be insufficient (inclined angle of working is
equal to the installation angle of the transmission on the chassis
plus the slope angle).
Towing
When the vehicle needs to be towed, it is workable to pull out the
semi-axis, or disconnect the transmission shaft, or lift the driving
wheel off the ground.
426
Transmission
ZF transmission
Type of oil and drain period
See ZF Transmission Oil and Drain Period Tables (I) and (II).
Caution!
○
i -Only the oils specified by the SINOTRUK or the special
purpose oil for ZF transmission --ZF-Ecofluid M 02E/02L
certified in the latest list of ZF lubricating oils TE-ML 02-can be
used.
- The list of lubricating oils of ZF can be obtained from any
after-sales service center or downloaded from the official
website of ZF: WWW.ZF.COM.
Fuel charge
The nameplate or technical parameters sheet on the transmission indicates
the reference fuel charge, and the operation shall be strictly in accordance with
the oil filling regulations to ensure the accurate fuel charge,
Warning!
Drain period of the transmission shall be strictly implemented,
otherwise the performance and reliability of the transmission will
be affected.
427
Transmission
ZF Transmission Oil and Drain Period Table (I)

Quality
Oil and
Oils grade
oil Mileage or time for the first Mileage or time between two oil
Assembly and Tips
quantity Name change changes
viscidity
1)
grade
1. The special
Over-the-road truck 2): after-sales
gear oil
High speed operating condition: specified by
100,000 km or 12 months; the
High speed operating condition /
General operating condition: 80,000 SINOTRUK
general operating condition: 160,000
km or 12 months; must be used,
MTF 85 km or 12 months; otherwise the
Heavy load condition: 40,000 km or
W-90 Heavy load condition: 80,000 km or transmission
MTF manual 6 months,
Q/ZZ 12 months; will be
16S2230 transmission
ZF 21045 or whichever comes first . ② damaged, and
Transmission 15.5L oil for the whichever comes first . ② Municipal
transmission 16S2530 MTF 80 Municipal vehicle, urban the
heavy-duty vehicle, urban construction truck,
W-90 construction truck, transport dump SINOTRUK
vehicle transport dump truck and mixer truck:
Q/ZZ truck and mixer truck: will only
21045 120,000 km or 12 months, whichever provide paid
40,000 km or 10 months, whichever
comes first. ③ Special vehicles service. 2.
comes first. ③ Special vehicles Special
such as mine trucks and in-situ
such as mine trucks and in-situ transmission
operation: the working time of the
operation: oils of different
main engine is 1,000 hours.
The working time of the main engine viscosity
is 1000 hours. grades shall
not be mixed.
428
Transmission
ZF Transmission Oil and Drain Period Table (II)

Quality grade Mileage or time
Oil and oil Oils Mileage or time for
Assembly and between two oil Tips
quantity 1) Name the first change
viscidity grade changes
25.5 L (first Over-the-road

replenishment) truck 2):
16S2231 18.5 L Over-the-road truck 2):
(replenishment High speed
16S2531 High speed operating
during operating condition:
300,000 km or 24 condition: 300,000 km or
maintenances)
months; General 24 months; General
operating condition: operating condition:
23.5 L (first
240,000 km or 24 240,000 km or 24
replenishment)
months; Heavy load months; Heavy load
19 L
12TX2621TD condition: 160,000 condition: 160,000 km or The original oil
(replenishment ZF km or 12 months; 12 months; whichever used for this
during
special-purpose whichever comes comes first . model of
maintenances)
oil: first . ② Municipal transmission is
List of ZF-Ecofluid oil ② Municipal vehicle, provided by ZF
ZF vehicle, urban urban construction truck,
Transmission lubricants of grade M construction truck, company, and
transmission transport dump truck and
TE-ML 02 02E/02L in the after-sale oil
transport dump truck mixer truck:
theTE-ML02 and mixer truck: is SINOPEC
lubricating oil 240,000 km or 20 GERATWALL
table 240,000 km or 20 months, whichever MTF 02 L 75 W
13.5 L (first months, whichever comes first. ③ Special - 80
replenishment)
comes first. ③ vehicles such as mine
12 L
12TX2620TD Special vehicles trucks and in-situ
(replenishment
such as mine trucks operation:
during
and in-situ operation:
maintenances) 5,000 hours or 12
5,000 hours or 12 months of main engine
months of main operation, whichever
engine operation, comes first.
whichever comes
first.
Note:(1) The oil and oil quantity in the table are only for reference, and the actual consumption shall prevail. (2) For over-the-road truck,
when its average fuel consumption is < 35 L/100 km, or when the load of vehicle is ≤ standard load, the drain period shall conform to
the high speed operating condition; When the average fuel consumption is 35 ~ 40 L/100 km or the vehicle overload is 10% or less,
the drain period shall be implemented according to the general operating condition; When the average fuel consumption is more than
40 L/100 km or the vehicle overload is more than 10%, the drain period shall be implemented according to the heavy load condition; If
any condition of fuel consumption or load in each working condition is met, the drain period for the most severe working condition
shall be followed. (3) For ZF transmissions equipped with NH1 power takeoff , the oil and refill capacity remain unchanged; Oil refill
capacity for transmissions equipped with NH4 power takeoff is increased by 0.5 L. (4) Under severe overload condition, check
whether the transmission lubricating oil deteriorates during engine maintenance. If it deteriorates, change the oil in time.
429
Transmission
Transmission oil change

Oil discharge
Caution!
-Lubricating oil and cleanout fluid must not flow into the soil,
○
i underground water and drainage system. The lubricating oil
shall be collected in suitable containers and treated in
accordance with the relevant regulations of the environmental
protection department.
-Under normal circumstances, the oil discharge should be
carried out after the vehicle has been driven for a period of time.
At this time, the transmission oil temperature is relatively high
and the viscosity is low.
1
• Unscrew the drain plug ① of the transmission and collect the drained oil in a
suitable container.
• Clean the magnetic drain plug ①, replace a new sealing ring for it and tighten
the sealing ring according to the specified torque.
DANGER!
Touching hot transmission and lubricating oil may cause
scalding, please take good protection.
430
Transmission
Oil filling
• Fill oil from oil filling ports ① and ②
• Fill oil until the oil level reaches the lower edge of oil filling ports ① and ② or
until the oil has overflowed from the oil filling port.
Inspection of oil level

Warning!
1 Too little fuel in the transmission can lead to danger of
transmission damage and accidents!
heck the transmission oil level regularly:

When checking the oil level, the vehicle shall be parked on a level ground with
engine flameout and the parking brake applied. Do not check the oil level
immediately after driving (the measurement result is wrong), but wait for the oil to
cool down.
• Unscrew the oil filling plugs ① and ② to check the oil level.
• If the oil level is found to be lower than the lower edge of the oil filling port, fill the
oil until it overflows from the oil filling port.
Caution!
Every time the oil level is checked, check the transmission for oil
2
○
i leakage at the same time.
431
Transmission
Oil filling and oil level inspection of transmission with clutch-controlled

power takeoff
The method for oil filling and for checking the oil level is the same as the previous
method, but the fuel charge will increase by about 0.5 L depending on the power
takeoff model.
Maintenance of transmissions with a heat exchanger
Oil discharge
Release drain plug on the heat exchanger if conditions permit.
Oil filling
• Fill the oil in until the oil overflows from oil filling port, and tighten the oil filling
plug with a tightening torque of 60 Nm.
• Run the engine at approximately 1200 rpm for 2-3 minutes to ensure that the
heat exchanger and coupling pipes are filled with oil.
• Engine flameout.
• Fill the transmission with oil again until the oil overflows.
Inspection of oil level
• The engine idles for approximately 3 minutes.
• Engine flameout.
• Check the oil level according to the above ordinary inspection method for
transmission oil level .
432
Transmission
Check the clutch

In order to ensure the service life and normal operation of the synchronizer, the
clutch shall be completely released.
The above clauses also apply to the operation of the clutch power takeoff.
Steps of checking for complete clutch release:
When the engine is at normal operating temperature and runs at idle speed,
depress the clutch pedal to the bottom.
Wait for about 20 s (depending on the flywheel quality and temperature), and then
slowly shift into the reverse gear.
If there is a rattling sound when engaging a gear, it indicates that the clutch needs
to be adjusted or checked.
433
Transmission
Adjustment of the relief valve at the clutch pedal

The clutch shall be completely separated before relief valve ⑤ controls half-gear
shifting.
Warning!
If the relief valve is not properly adjusted, it will cause damage
to the synchronizer during a half-gear shifting. 1 5
Check and adjust

Adjust the adjusting bolt on the clutch pedal so that the relief valve ⑤ only works
in the limiting position (c) of the clutch.
Small
clearance. 1 mm
4
Separation of clutch is completed when the clutch pedal is in position (B). At this
pedal, the gap between the relief valve ⑤ and the pedal stop bolt should be at 2 3
least 1 mm.
a The position of "complete engagement of clutch" ① The brake master cylinder
of hydraulic clutch operating system
b The position of "complete separation of clutch" ② To clutch cylinder
c The limiting position of clutch pedal ③ To half-gear group relay valve
d Clutch pedal limiting end ④ From the compressed air tank
⑤ Half-gear group relief valve
434
Transmission
Transmission exhaust
When the vehicle is driving, the increase of transmission oil temperature will cause
the increase of air pressure in the transmission. The transmission vent plug can
1 ensure the balance of air pressure inside and outside the transmission.
Caution!
Check the vent plug every time the vehicle is checked.
○
i
Vent plug
The vent plug ① shall be clean and free of covers to ensure that the breather
plug or ventilation hose functions normally. It is strictly prohibited to directly flush
the vent plug with high-pressure water (water will enter the transmission and
cause rusting).
Ventilation hose
For vehicles that need to be cleaned frequently, such as milk cars, concrete mixer
trucks, etc., ventilation hoses ② should be equipped. Ventilation hose ② shall
not be kinked and entangled, and its end shall be placed in a dry area.
435
Transmission
Maintenance of compressed air system

In order to prevent condensate water and other impurities in compressed air
cylinder entering the control valve or the shifting cylinder, the compressed air
system should be maintained regularly. It is recommended that the air cylinder be
emptied once a week (once a day in winter).
Transmission nameplate
The transmission nameplate is installed on the left side of the transmission (viewed
from the driving direction) and the main information of the transmission it includes
is as follows:
① Transmission assembly no.

② Transmission model
③ Production serial number of the transmission
1 3
436
Transmission
ZF-TraXon transmission
• Regular maintenance will improve the safety of transmission
operation.
• Carry out visual inspection for oil leakage during vehicle
inspection.
• All transmission maintenance must be carried out only when the
vehicle is parked horizontally and the engine is off.
• Note that the sealing rings shall be replaced before each
installation of all screw plugs.
Visual inspection for cables laying
• Check whether the laid cable is damaged within the scope of
vehicle inspection.
• Caution whether the plug position is correct, and the plug shall not
be pulled by force.
Maintenance of compressed air equipment
• The compressed air cylinder shall be emptied and cleaned every
week (every day in winter).
• The replacement period of drying chamber must be observed
for vehicles equipped with an air dryer.
Transmission ventilation
In the standard case, the transmission is equipped with a
breathable cap. The breathable cap is visible only when the
transmission control device has been removed. Bleed at the bottom
of the transmission.
437
Transmission
Oil change (without hydraulic retarder)

• Changing oil is allowed only when the vehicle is parked horizontally and the
engine is shut off.
• Each oil change shall be carried out after the vehicle has been driven for a period
of time, so that the transmission oil is still warm and liquid.
• Prepare a suitable container for collecting the oil.
Warning!
-If the transmission oil of the transmission to be repaired
contains water, replace all molybdenum-coated components
and parts such as simultaneous observation loop, shifting fork,
transmission brakes, etc. Otherwise, it may cause
unforeseeable consequences and even lead to serious
accidents during driving.
-Contacting with hot transmission or hot transmission oil may
cause scalding. It is recommended to wear appropriate
protection suit, protective gloves and goggles/face shield.
438
Transmission
Oil discharge
• Disassemble the screw plug on the oil drain hole of the transmission and the
screw plug on the oil filler hole ①, use a suitable container to collect the
transmission oil and dispose it environmentally.
• Clean the magnet on the screw plug and replace the sealing ring.
• Tighten the oil drain plug with a tightening torque of 60 nm.
Oil injection
• Fill oil through the oil filler hole ①.
• When the oil level reaches the lower edge of the oil filler hole, or the oil has spilt
from the oil filler hole, it indicates that the oil level is correct.
• Tighten the screw plug on the oil filler hole ① with a tightening torque of 60 Nm.
439
Transmission
Oil level check (without hydraulic retarder)

Warning!
Danger of accident!
Too little lubricating oil in the transmission can damage the
transmission.
Comply with prescribed service inspections.

Check the transmission oil level:
• The fuel level check can only be carried out when the vehicle is in a horizontal
position.
• Never check the oil level immediately after driving (the measurement result is
wrong). Check only after the variable speed oil tank has cooled down (<40 ℃). 1
• Remove the screw plug ① of the oil filler hole.
• If the oil level is below oil filler hole, the oil must be replenished.
• Replace the sealing ring of screw plug ① .
• Tighten the screw plug ① with a tightening torque of 60 Nm.
During every inspection, areas on the transmission that may not be tightly sealed
shall be checked.
440
Transmission
Oil change (with hydraulic retarder)

It is not allowed to re-operate the hydraulic retarder immediately before the vehicle
is stopped for oil change.
To ensure that the correct oil change quantity is set in the transmission.
• Changing oil is allowed only when the vehicle is parked horizontally and the
engine is shut off.
• Each oil change shall be carried out after the vehicle has been driven for a period
of time, so that the transmission oil is still warm and liquid.
• Prepare a suitable container for collecting the oil.
441
Transmission
① Transmission nameplate
② Transmission ventilation 1
③ Oil drain hole
④ Oil filler hole after maintenance
⑤ Oil filler hole or oil spilling hole
⑥ Nameplate of hydraulic retarder
⑦ Heat exchanger
⑧ Control unit
2 3
8
4
5 6 7
442
Transmission
Oil discharge
Warning!
-If the transmission oil of the transmission to be repaired contains
water, replace all molybdenum-coated components and parts such
as simultaneous observation loop, shifting fork, transmission
brakes, etc. Otherwise, it may cause unforeseeable consequences
and even lead to serious accidents during driving.
-Contacting with hot transmission or hot transmission oil may
cause scalding. It is recommended to wear appropriate protection
suit, protective gloves and goggles/face shield.
• Disassemble the screw plugs ③ and ⑤, use a suitable container to collect the
transmission oil, and dispose it correctly.
• Replace the oil filter.
443
Transmission
Oil filter replacement

Drain oil before replacement of the oil filter .
A new filter element shall be used for each oil change.
Warning!
9
Danger of burnung!
Contacting with hot transmission or hot transmission oil may
cause scalding. Appropriate protection suit, protective gloves
and goggles/face shield shall be worn. 10
• Remove the two bolts ⑩ on the filter ⑨.

The remaining oil is in the hydraulic retarder housing!
• Pull the filter ⑨ out of the hydraulic retarder housing.
• Apply lubricating grease to the O-ring (11) on the new filter ⑨.
• Put the new filter ⑨ into the hydraulic retarder housing.
9
• Use two bolts ⑩ to fix the filter ⑨. Tightening torque: 23 Nm.
11
444
Transmission
Oil filling
1 For transmissions with a hydraulic retarder, there is a difference between closing
the oil filler hole ④/ oil spilling hole ⑤ during the oil change or oil filling after the
transmission is repaired.
Fill oil during oil change
Refuelling is allowed only when the vehicle is parked horizontally and the engine is
shut off.
• Remove screw plug ⑤.
• Fill oil through the oil filler hole ⑤.
• When the oil level reaches the lower edge of the oil filler hole, or the oil has spilt
from the oil filler hole, it indicates that the oil level is correct.
• Screw in the screw plug ⑤ with the new sealing ring, and tighten it.
Tightening torque: 60 Nm.
2 3
8
4
5 6 7
445
Transmission
Test drive: 2- 5 km
Riding test: one short operation at the starting of the hydraulic retarder (level 6). 1
End of test drive: The vehicle is stationary.

Do not operate the hydraulic retarder!
• Remove screw plug ⑤.

• Check the oil level again and replenish oil if necessary until oil overflows.
• Change the sealing ring on the screw plug.
• Tighten the screw plug ⑤.
• Tightening torque: 60 Nm.
2 3
8
4
5 6 7
446
Transmission
Oil filling after transmission repair

1 Refuelling is allowed only when the vehicle is parked horizontally and the engine is
shut off.
• Remove the upper screw plugs of the oil filler hole ④ and the oil spilling hole
⑤.
• Fill oil through the oil filler hole ④.
• When the oil level reaches the lower edge of oil spilling hole ⑤, or the oil has
spilt from oil spilling hole ⑤, it indicates that the oil level is correct.
• Screw in and tighten the screw plug ④ ⑤ together with the new sealing ring.
Test drive: 2- 5 km
Riding test: one short operation at the starting of the hydraulic retarder (level 6).
End of test drive: The vehicle is stationary. Do not operate the hydraulic retarder!
2 3 • Remove screw plug ⑤.
8 • Check the oil level again and replenish oil if necessary until oil overflows.
4
• Replace the sealing ring on the screw plug ⑤ and tighten the screw plug.
5 6 7
447
Transmission
Oil level check (with hydraulic retarder)

Warning! • Caution that there may be a leak at:
Danger of accident! - Transmission
Too little lubricating oil in the transmission can - Hydraulic retarder
damage the transmission. -Oil/water heat exchanger,
-Cooling water pipe equipped.
Inspection
Comply with prescribed service inspections.
• Stop the vehicle without operating the hydraulic retarder.
To check the fuel level, do not re-operate the hydraulic retarder until
• Remove the screw plug of the oil filler hole.
the vehicle is stopped.
This ensures the correct quantity of oil is set in the transmission. • If the oil level is below oil filler hole, the oil must be replenished
(see section "Oil filling during oil change").
• The inspection on the fuel level shall meet the following
• Change the sealing ring on the screw plug.
conditions:
- The vehicle is in a horizontal position • Tighten the screw plug. Tightening torque: 60 Nm.
- Engine flameout Visual inspection
-Cool the transmission oil (<40°C) If it is determined that there is a serious oil leak on the gas-filling
valve of the oil storage tank, the entire oil storage tank shall be
• Check the oil level within the scope of vehicle inspection. replaced.
448
Retarder
Retarder • Check the transmission oil level regularly. When checking the oil
ZF-Intarder hydraulic retarder level, check the following parts for oil leakage at the same time:
Inspection of oil level - Transmission
Warning! - Retarder
Insufficient transmission oil will cause retarder failure, -Oil/water heat exchanger
reduced braking torque or failure. - Associated cooling pipeline
Please enable other auxiliary braking devices and Check the oil level
contact the SINOTRUK service station for handling.
• When the vehicle stops horizontally, apply the parking brake, be
careful not to use the retarder.
• Release the screw plug of the overflow port (see the picture in
the oil discharge part for the position of the screw plug).
• When checking the oil level, it is necessary to turn off the retarder • If the oil level is below the overflow port, continue refilling until the
before parking the vehicle, to ensure the correct oil level in the oil overflows.
transmission. • Replace the gasket with a new one and tighten the screw plug of
• Before checking the oil level of the transmission with the retarder, overflow port according to the specified torque.
the following operations shall be carried out:
The vehicle is parked horizontally.
- Engine flameout.
- The oil temperature of transmission drops below 40 °C.
449
Retarder
Nameplate
• Retarder nameplate
The nameplate is installed on the side of the retarder housing, and the nameplate
includes the following information: 1
① Retarder model ② Retarder assembly No.
③ Retarder S/N ④ Speed ratio 2 3
• Electronic control unit EST54 nameplate

⑤ Barcode, including ZF part number and S/N
6
⑥ EST54 ⑦ EST54 S/N 5
⑧ EST54 program number ⑨ Retarder S/N
The retarder S/N on the retarder nameplate and EST54 nameplate must 7
correspond
⑩ Certification No. (11) QR code 8 11
10
450
Retarder
Oil discharge
Warning!
Touching hot transmission or transmission oil may cause scalding,
please take protective measures!
Caution!
○
i When checking the oil level, it is necessary to turn off the retarder
before parking the vehicle, to ensure the correct oil level in the
transmission.
Preparations
- Prepare a suitable lubricating oil collection container (the discharged lubricating
oil shall be disposed of in accordance with environmental regulations).
- Please change oil after driving for a long distance. At this time, the temperature
of the oil is still high and the viscosity of the oil is low.
Oil discharge
- Park the vehicle horizontally, turn off the engine and apply parking brake.
- During oil discharge, loosen the transmission drain plug and retarder drain plug
(see figure on next page).
- After draining the oil, clean the drain plug (magnetic) and replace the sealing
gasket.
- Install the new filter element.
- Finally tighten the drain plug (for the tightening torque, refer to Chapter 7
"Technical Parameters").
451
Retarder
Screw plugs at the oil discharge, oil filling and oil spill ports
① Drain plug of transmission
4
② Drain plug of retarder
③ Oil suction filter element
④ Install filter element bolts
⑤ Oil spill port and oil change/oil filler port/oil filler after maintenance
⑥ Oil filler after maintenance/oil spill port and oil change/oil filler port
1
3
2
5
452
Retarder
Filter element replacement

Drain the oil first and then replace the filter element.
A new filter element shall be used for each oil change.
DANGER!
3 Touching hot transmission or transmission oil may cause scalding,
please take protective measures.
Ecosplit transmission
4 -Loosen the fixing bolt ④ of the oil suction filter element ③ .
Caution!
○
i There will be some residual oil in the retarder!
3
- Remove oil suction filter element ③.
- Lubricate the new O-ring (3.1) on the new filter element ③.
-Install the new filter element into the retarder housing.
3.1 -Fix the filter element ③ and tighten the bolt ④ (tightening torque: 23±2 Nm).
453
Retarder
Oil filling
Oil filling after a routine oil change
- Oil filling and oil level checking can be done only when the vehicle is parked
horizontally and the engine is shut off.
-For vehicles with transverse transmission, the transmission needs to be placed
horizontally before oil filling, otherwise, the amount of fuel charge will be
inaccurate.
- A new filter element shall be used for each oil change.
- Refer to the transmission section for oil grade and drain period.
-The specified fuel charge is for reference only, which may vary with different
models and installation angles of the transmission.
-For fuel charge and tightening torque, refer to Chapter 7 "Technical
Parameters". .
-If a power takeoff (PTO) is equipped, it should be taken into account for the fuel
charge.
- If the heat exchanger and retarder are installed separately, please consider the
oil quantity of the connecting line.
454
Retarder
- Loosen screw plug ⑥ of the oil spill port.

4
-Fill oil from the oil spill port until oil overflows.
-Install the sealing gasket and tighten the screw plug of the oil spill port.
- Test run the vehicle (run it at a speed of about 10 km/h for at least 1 minute),
briefly run the retarder (the highest gear) at the start, and then cancel it (turn it
6 back to the "0" position).
- Engine flameout.
- Loosen screw plug ⑤ of the oil spill port.
1 - Check the oil level and replenish it if necessary until it overflows.
3 -After replacing the new gasket, tighten the screw plug at the oil spill port (for the
2 tightening torque, refer to Chapter 7 "Technical Parameters").
5
Caution!
○
i Check the fuel level after driving to ensure accurate fuel charge; If
the vehicle is equipped with split-type heat exchanger, check after
the vehicle runs for 5 minutes to prevent the heat exchanger from
idling.
455
Retarder
Oil filling after maintenance

- Oil filling and oil level checking for the transmission can be done only when the 4
vehicle is parked horizontally and the engine is shut off.
-For vehicles with transverse transmission, the transmission needs to be placed
horizontally beforeoil filling.
-The oils and drain period should be the same as the aforementioned conventional
oil filling and oil change.
-The specified fuel charge is only a reference value, which may vary with different
models and installation angles of the transmission.
-The fuel charge and tightening torque should be the same as that described in the 1
aforementioned conventional oil filling and oil change. 3
-In addition, if a power takeoff (PTO) is equipped, it should be taken into account 2
for the fuel charge.
5
- If the heat exchanger and retarder are installed separately, please consider the
oil quantity of the connecting line.
- Loosen the oil filler screw plug ⑤.
-Fill oil from the injection port ⑤ until oil overflows.
-Install the sealing gasket and tighten the screw plug ⑤ of the oil spill port.
- Test run of the vehicle (run at a speed of about 10 km/h for at least 1 minute)
- Run the retarder (top gear) briefly when starting.
Warning!
Insufficient fuel in the transmission can lead to transmission
damage and create a risk of accident.
456
Retarder
Warning!
4 Insufficient oil in the retarder will cause the retarder to fail and the
braking torque to be reduced or to fail. Please enable other
auxiliary braking devices and contact SINOTRUK service station
for handling.
- Cancel the retarding function (turn back to the "0" position).

- Engine flameout.
1 - Loosen screw plug ⑥ of the oil spill port.
3 - Check the oil level and replenish it if necessary until it overflows.
2 - Please check the oil level at a temperature below 40°C.
5 -The correct oil level position is at the lowest end of the oil spill port, where the oil
just overflows.
- After replacing the gasket with a new one, tighten the screw plug of overflow port.
457
Retarder
Engine coolant
Low or no pressure in the cooling system will cause cavitation damage to the heat
exchanger (causing internal leakage)
The engine coolant shall be checked regularly and the coolant shall be changed in
time as required.
Drain the remaining coolant

Warning!
Touching hot transmission or engine coolant may cause
scalding, please take protective measures. 2
The residual coolant can only be drained when the temperature sensor is
removed.
1
-Unscrew the bolt ①
-Remove the temperature sensor ②
-After the coolant is drained, replace the temperature sensor with a new O-ring
and tighten the bolt (tightening torque: 9.5±1 Nm)
Retarder vent plug
The transmission vent plug is used to balance the internal and external air
pressure difference when the retarder is working.
The position of the vent plug may be different for different transmissions.
458
Retarder
Voith retarder
Retarder oil
• The initial filling is provided by Voith, and the filling volume is 6.8 L.
• The after-sales special oil is 10 W-40 (Voith Type B), which is a super long-acting
special oil for SINOTRUK National V engines, and the filling volume is 6.4 L.
Drain period
• The drain period of original oils and after-sales special-purpose oil for Voith
retarders are consistent with the recommended ones.
• The recommended tractor and cargo truck drain period is 90,000 km or 24
months, whichever comes first.
• The recommended dump truck drain period is 45,000 km or 12 months,
whichever comes first;
• It is recommended that the drain period of the mine hauler should be 500 hours
(based on the vehicle driving time).
Maintenance during each oil change
• Visually inspect the retarder for oil leakage before and after the oil change.
• Tighten the screw plugs of the retarder base parts and the heat exchanger
according to the prescribed tightening torque.
459
Retarder
Oil discharge
• Place a suitable container under the retarder.
Caution!
○
i - During the oil change, the vehicle shall be parked in a
horizontal position and parking brake shall be implemented.
- The oil temperature shall reach the operating temperature
(higher than 60 °C).
- Switch off the retarder
-Turn off the key switch.
Warning!
The flowing oil and screw plugs are all hot! It may cause
empyrosis. Please be careful and wear protective equipment
such as gloves if necessary.
460
Retarder
• Unscrew the screw plug ① and sealing gasket ②.
2 1
• Unscrew screw plug ③, sealing ring ④ and O-ring ⑤.

• Discharge the oil into the container and analyze it.
If the oil contains moisture, check the heat exchanger. If there are particles (debris)
in the oil, contact Voith.
4
5
3
461
Retarder
• Apply the silicon-free and non-corrosive lubricating grease to the new O-ring ⑤,
and then install the O-ring on the screw plug ③.
• Apply the silicon-free and non-corrosive lubricating grease to the new sealing
gasket ④.
• Screw in drain plug ③ and sealing gasket ④ (with the tightening torque of 30
Nm).
4
5
3
Oil filling
• Fill 4 L of oil slowly (>2 minutes) via the hole of the screw plug ① to ensure that
the retarder can be exhausted through the oiling filling port.
• Wait for about 2 minutes.
• Slowly fill 2.4 L oil (2 minutes) via the screw plug hole to ensure that the retarder
can be exhausted through the oil filling port. 2 1
• Apply the silicon-free and non-corrosive lubricating grease to the new sealing
ring ②.
• Screw in the drain plug① and sealing ring② (with a tightening torque of 130
Nm).
462
Retarder
At the arrow in the figure there is the oil filler.
Warning!
- Only oil, lubricant and accessories approved by the SINOTRUK
shall be used to ensure vehicle safety and the function of the
retarder
- SINOTRUK only provides paid service for damage caused by
changing the retarder or the oil and lubricant used, or using
accessories, attachments, additional devices or special-purpose
equipment not approved by SINOTRUK.
463
Steering system
Steering system
The steering fluid for steering gear box is: ATF Ⅲ automatic steering fluid produced by CNPC, and it does not need to be changed in the first
maintenance. The recommended oil drain intervals under different working conditions are shown in the following table:
Quality
grade Oil and
Oils Mileage or time for the first Mileage or time between two oil
Assembly and oil Remarks
Name change changes
viscidity quantity
grade
Single-steering-axle The special

5L
model ① Over-the-road truck: ① Over-the-road truck: after-sales
steering fluid
Dual-steering-axle 100,000 km or 10 months, 100,000 km or 10 months, specified by
6.5L
model whichever comes first. whichever comes first. the
② Municipal vehicle, urban ② Municipal vehicle, urban SINOTRUK
ATF Ⅲ construction truck, transport construction truck, transport must be used,
Steering
Steering Automatic dump truck and mixer truck: dump truck and mixer truck: otherwise, the
gear
fluid steering steering gear
box 80,000 km or 10 months, 80,000 km or 10 months,
fluid box will be
Rear-lifting-axle whichever comes first. whichever comes first. damaged and
7L
model ③ Mine truck: ③ Mine truck: the
SINOTRUK
20,000 km or 4 months, 20,000 km or 4 months, will only
whichever comes first. whichever comes first. provide paid
service.
The hydraulic oil liquid level shall be checked once a month and fill oil as necessary. The fuel quantity in the table is the reference value, and
the actual fuel charge shall prevail.
464
Steering system
Oil change method:

• Put the front axle up.
• Open the tank cap and unscrew the oil return pipe on the steering gear (be
cautious in preventing dirt and foreign matter from entering the oil line
system).
• Start the engine and keep it idling for about 10 s, and turn the steering wheel to
the left and right limiting ends for several times to drain all the oil in the oil tank,
booster pump and steering gear (collect and treat the drained oil correctly).
• Re-tighten the oil return pipe and clean the oil tank, oil filling filter, and filter
element. It is recommended to replace the filter element with a new one for each
oil change.
• After the oil tank is filled with hydraulic oil, run the engine at idle speed, rotate
the steering wheel repeatedly left and right, and continue to supplement the
hydraulic oil until the oil level in the oil tank no longer drops and no bubble is
generated. The oil level height shall be between MIN and MAX marks.
Caution!
○
i -The clearance between each rotating part shall be checked for the
first maintenance and periodical maintenance, such as the
steering horizontal and straight tie rod ball. If the clearance is too
large, replace the rotating parts involved.
-Lubricating grease shall be filled at each position in each
periodical maintenance.
465
Driven axle
Driven axle
Overview of Structure
• H653, VGD70, VGD71, VGD75 and VGD95 drum front axles adopt forged
I-beam, integral steering knuckle, drum brake, friction plate wear limit alarm,
antilock brake system (ABS).
• H653 K front drum axle shall be matched with oil-lubricated hub bearing based
on the above configuration.
• VGD70 S, VGD71 S and VGD75 S front drum axle shall be matched with the
wheel bearing units based on the above configuration.
• VPD71D, VPD75D, VPD95D and VPD95E disc front axles adopt forged I-beam,
integral steering knuckle, disc brake, brake shoe wear limit alarm, antilock brake
system (ABS).
• VPD71 DS and VPD75 ES shall be matched with wheel bearing units based on
the above configuration.
466
Driven axle
1094 front axles adopt forged I-beam, integral forging steering knuckle, drum
brake, friction plate wear limit alarm, brake clearance automatic adjusting arm,
antilock brake system (ABS).
467
Driven axle
Operation maintenance
Driven axle of the drum brake
• Before driving the new vehicle, fill sufficient 2# lithium base grease at each
grease fitting.
• For a new car, apply the brake in situ for 30~50 times to adjust the brake
clearance to normal working clearance. Try to avoid emergency brake before
driving for 50 km.
• After 1500 km run-in, the new car shall be checked whether the brake clearance
meets the requirements and whether the fasteners of each part are tightened
before officially putting the new car into use.
• Fill each grease fitting (except the automatic clearance adjuster) with 2# lithium
base grease every 5,000 km.
• To the highway vehicles, the automatic clearance adjuster shall be filled with 2#
lithium base grease every 30,000 km or 6 months (whichever comes first); To
the off-highway vehicles, the automatic clearance adjuster shall be filled with 2#
lithium base grease every 15,000 km or 6 months (whichever comes first).
• The adjustment range of the brake clearance for brakes equipped with an
automatic clearance adjuster: 0.6-0.9 mm (the set clearance of the automatic
clearance adjuster varies slightly from supplier to supplier), and the clearance
difference between the left and right sides of the whole axle shall not be greater
than 0.3 mm.
• Check tightening of the wheel nut and tie rod ball tight nut before driving.
• For the front axle assembly with electronic wear alarm device, when the
electronic wear alarm device lamp in the cab is on during driving, check and
replace the friction plate and electronic wear alarm device.
468
Driven axle
• Driving for every 8,000~10,000 km:

- For the front axle assembly without electronic wear alarm device, check the
brake lining for wear and replace the friction plate immediately if it is worn beyond
the limit pit;
-Check the fastening of the brake backing plate;
-Check the looseness of the hub bearing;
- Check whether the brake clearance meets the requirements;
-Check the fit between the adapter sleeve and the fixing dowel on the automatic
clearance adjuster, and replace the adapter sleeve if it is loose;
-Check the fit between the adapter ring and the adjusting arm on the automatic
clearance adjuster, and replace the automatic clearance adjuster if there is relative
rotation between the two.
• When weak brake is felt, it is recommended to detect the counterclockwise
torque of the hexagon head of the automatic clearance adjuster after other
reasons are excluded. If the measured minimum torque is less than 18 Nm after
rotation once, it indicates that the automatic clearance adjuster is damaged, and
the automatic clearance adjuster assembly shall be replaced in time.
• During the maintenance and replacement, the automatic clearance adjusters on
the left and right sides of each axle shall be equipped with the products from the
same supplier. If only the automatic clearance adjuster on one side fails and
there is no product of the same supplier for replacement, the left and right
automatic clearance adjusters of the axle shall be replaced at the same time.
469
Driven axle
Driven axle of the disc brake

• Before driving the new vehicle, fill sufficient 2# lithium base grease at each grease fitting.
• For a new car, apply the brake in situ for 30~50 times to adjust the brake clearance to normal working clearance. Try to avoid emergency
brake before driving for 50 km.
• After 1500 km run-in, the new car shall be checked whether the brake clearance meets the requirements and whether the fasteners of each
part are tightened before officially putting the new car into use.
• Each grease fitting shall be filled with 2# lithium base grease every 5,000 km.
• Check tightening of the wheel nut and tie rod ball tight nut before driving.
• For the front axle assembly with electronic wear alarm device, when the electronic wear alarm device lamp in the cab is on during driving,
check and replace the friction plate and electronic wear alarm device.
• For front axle assembly without electronic wear alarm device, the wear of the brake shoe and brake disc can be visually inspected without
disassembling the tire every 5000 km. If it is found that there is more wear, it is necessary to disassemble the tire to measure the thickness
of the brake shoe and brake disc, when the thickness of the brake disc reaches 37 mm, replace the brake disc immediately, and the
allowable maximum wear on each side of the brake disc is 4 mm. When replacing the brake shoes, the brake shoes on left and right sides
of the whole axle should be replaced at the same time.
• Every 6 months, remove the tire and check whether the sliding pin cover, sliding pin protective cover, piston protective sleeve and other
rubber parts are abnormal; Whether the tong body can slide normally on the sliding pin (the sliding resistance is no more than 100 N);
Check whether the brake clearance is normal.
-Check the looseness of the hub bearing;
470
Driven axle
Lubricating grease usage and period:

At the master pin
• After traveling for every 5000 km, fill 2# lithium base grease from the grease
nipple assemblies at the upper and lower ends of the master pin until it is full (the
upper end is full when there is oil overflow at the adjusting shim, and the lower
end is full when there is oil overflow at the thrust bearing).
It is full when grease overflows at

two places.
471
Driven axle
At the hub bearing

Recommended replacement intervals of lubricating grease and lubricating oil for driven axle
Lubricating grease / Quality grade
and Mileage or time for the Mileage or time between two
Assembly use of lubricating oil Oil name Tips
first change oil changes
1) viscidity grade
H653
VGD70
VGD71 1. The special
VGD75 after-sales lubricating
① Over-the-road truck 2):
VPD71D grease specified by the
Light load condition Over-the-road truck 2): SINOTRUK must be
VPD75D HP-R extreme 100,000 km or 12 months; Light load condition 100,000 used, otherwise the
VPD95D The minimum refill pressure km or 12 months; hub bearing will be
Automotive Medium load condition
capacity on one side is compound lithium damaged, and the
VPD95E grease 80,000 km or 12 months; Medium load condition 80,000
620 g grease SINOTRUK will only
Heavy load condition km or 12 months;
VGD95 provide paid service.
Q/ZZ 21038
40,000 km or 6 months; Heavy load condition 40,000
6.5 t 2. This special
Whichever comes first km or 6 months;
supporting lubricating grease shall
axle Whichever comes first not be mixed with other
② Municipal vehicle,
lubricating grease.
10 t rear urban construction truck, ② Municipal vehicle, urban
supporting dump truck and mixer construction truck, dump truck
Driven
axle truck: and mixer truck:
axle
40,000 km (severe working 40,000 km (severe working
Hub 1. The special
condition 3) 20,000 km) or condition 3) 20,000 km) or 6
bearing after-sales gear oil
6 months, whichever months, whichever comes first.
Conventional oil: comes first. specified by the
③ Mine truck: SINOTRUK must be
GL-5 85W-90 ③ Mine truck: used, otherwise the
10,000 km or 2 months or 500
Q/ZZ 21040 hub bearing will be
The refill capacity on 10,000 km or 2 months or hours of main engine
H653K4) Gear oil 500 hours of main engine damaged, and the
one side is 500 mL Oil for cold areas operation, whichever comes
SINOTRUK will only
in winter: operation, whichever first.
comes first. provide paid service.
GL-5 75W-90
2. Special gear oils of
Q/ZZ 21040 different viscosity
grades shall not be
mixed.
2# General lithium
The minimum refill base grease for
Automotive 5,000 km or 6 months, 20,000 km or 6 months,
10945) capacity on one side is automobiles
grease whichever comes first whichever comes first.
450 g
Q/ZZ 21038
472
Driven axle
1) The amount of lubricating grease/lubricating oil in the table is only for reference,
and the specific amount shall be subject to the actual situations.
2) For over-the-road trucks, when the average fuel consumption is less than 32
L/100 km, the drain period for the light load condition shall be followed; When the
average fuel consumption is 32 ~ 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the medium
load condition shall be followed; When the average fuel consumption is greater
than 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the heavy load condition shall be followed.
3) Severe working condition refers to severe overload, poor road condition and
large dust during vehicle operation.
4) H653 K front axle assembly is oil-lubricated hub bearing. Before each trip, check
the lubricating oil condition through the observation hole on end cover of the hub. If
the lubricating oil color turns white or black, it means it has deteriorated. You need
to change the lubricating oil and check the sealing structure on the hub bearing;
Check the height of the lubricating oil through the scale at the observation port. If
there is little lubricating oil, add lubricating oil into the hub and check whether there
is any oil leakage.
5) For the purchased axles, the specific replacement cycle shall be adjusted
according to the manufacturer's regulations
473
Drive axle
Drive axle
MCJ/MCY series drive axle
In terms of structure type, MCY/ MCJ series drive axles adopt central single
reduction final drive, press-welding axle housing and fine forging differential gear,
and are equipped with an oil filter; MCY11/ MCY12/ MCY13 axles are equipped
with free-regulation wheel bearing units; MCJ/ MCY16ZG/ MCY17ZG axles are
equipped with double-row tapered roller bearings at the wheel rim.
474
Drive axle
Axle maintenance
• The recommended gear oil change periods under different working conditions are shown in the following table:
Quality
Oil grade Mileage or time for the first Mileage or time between two
Assembly Oil and oil quantity 1) Tips
name and viscidity change oil changes
grade
MCJ09BG 10 L (MCJ09BG oil 1. The

① Over-the-road truck:
Rear axle lubricated axle 10 L ① Over-the-road truck: special
MCY09BGS Express delivery (average
+ 2*1 L (wheel rim)) Express delivery (average fuel after-sales
fuel consumption less than 30
consumption less than 30 gear oil
L/100 km) 240,000 km or 24
17.5 L (MCJ11BG L/100 km) 240,000 km or 24 specified
months; Light load conditions
Intermediate oil lubricated axle months; Light load conditions by the
(average fuel consumption of
MCY11BGS axle 17.5 L + 2*1 L (average fuel consumption of SINOTRUK
30-40 L/100 km) 200,000 km
(wheel rim)) 30-40 L/100 km) 200,000 km must be
MCY11BES or 24 months; Medium load
or 24 months; Medium load used,
MCJ11BG condition (average fuel
12 L (MCJ11BG oil Conventional condition (average fuel otherwise
consumption of 40-50 L/100
Rear axle lubricated axle 12 L oil: consumption of 40-50 L/100 the drive
km) 160,000 km or 24
+ 2*1 L (wheel rim)) Tooth km) 160,000 km or 24 months; axle will be
SAE 80W-90 months; Heavy load condition
Drive Heavy load condition (average damaged,
MCY12BGK Intermediate 18L +2*1L (wheel Wheel long-acting (average fuel consumption
axle fuel consumption greater than and the
axle rim) gear oil greater than 50 L/100 km)
MCY12JGK Oil 50 L/100 km) 80,000 km or 12 SINOTRUK
(comply with 80,000 km or 12 months;
months; whichever comes first. will only
MCY12BEK J2360) whichever comes first. ②
13L+2*1L (wheel ② Municipal vehicle/urban provide
Rear axle Municipal vehicle/urban
MCJ12JG rim) construction truck/dump paid
construction truck/dump service. 2.
truck/mixer truck: 40,000 km or
truck/mixer truck: 40,000 km Special
Intermediate 6 months; Bad working
18L or 6 months; Bad working gear oils of
axle conditions (heavily
MCY12BGS conditions (heavily different
overloaded, poor and dusty
overloaded, poor and dusty viscosity
MCY12BESMCY12JGS road conditions) 20,000 km or
road conditions) 20,000 km or grades
6 months; whichever comes
MCJ12BG Rear axle 13L 6 months; whichever comes
first. shall not be
first. mixed.
475
Drive axle
Quality grade
Oil Mileage or time for the first Mileage or time between two
Assembly Oil and oil quantity 1) and viscidity Tips
name change oil changes
grade
MCY13BGS Intermediate 1. The

18L Over-the-road truck: Express Over-the-road truck: Express
MCY13JGS axle special
delivery (average fuel delivery (average fuel
after-sales
MCY13BES consumption less than 30 L/100 consumption less than 30 L/100
gear oil
Rear axle 14.5L km) 240,000 km or 24 months; km) 240,000 km or 24 months;
MCY13JES specified by
Light load conditions (average Light load conditions (average
the
Intermediate fuel consumption of 30-40 L/100 fuel consumption of 30-40 L/100
18L +2*1L (wheel rim) SINOTRUK
km) 200,000 km or 24 months; km) 200,000 km or 24 months;
MCJ13BG axle must be
Conventional Medium load condition (average Medium load condition (average
used,
MCJ13JG 14.5L+2*1L (wheel oil: fuel consumption of 40-50 L/100 fuel consumption of 40-50 L/100
Rear axle otherwise the
rim) Tooth km) 160,000 km or 24 months; km) 160,000 km or 24 months;
SAE 80W-90 drive axle will
Drive Heavy load condition (average Heavy load condition (average
Wheel long-acting be damaged,
axle Intermediate fuel consumption greater than 50 fuel consumption greater than 50
21L+2*1L (wheel rim) gear oil and the
axle Oil L/100 km) 80,000 km or 12 L/100 km) 80,000 km or 12
(comply with SINOTRUK
months; whichever comes first. months; whichever comes first.
J2360) will only
② Municipal vehicle/urban ② Municipal vehicle/urban
provide paid
construction truck/dump construction truck/dump
MCY16ZG service. 2.
truck/mixer truck: 40,000 km or 6 truck/mixer truck: 40,000 km or 6 Special gear
MCY17ZG 17.5L+2*1L (wheel months; Bad working conditions months; Bad working conditions
Rear axle oils of
rim) (heavily overloaded, poor and (heavily overloaded, poor and different
dusty road conditions) 20,000 km dusty road conditions) 20,000 viscosity
or 6 months; whichever comes km or 6 months; whichever grades shall
first. comes first. not be mixed.
Note:
1) The oil and oil quantity in the table are only for reference, and the actual consumption shall prevail;
476
Drive axle
Quality
Oil grade Mileage or time for the first Mileage or time between two
name and viscidity change oil changes
grade
MCJ09BG 10 L (MCJ09BG oil 1. The

Rear axle lubricated axle 10 L ① Over-the-road truck 2): special
MCY09BGS + 2*1 L (wheel rim)) ① Over-the-road truck 2): after-sales
Light load condition 100,000 gear oil
km or 12 months; Light load condition: 100,000
17.5 L (MCJ11BG km or 12 mouths; specified
Intermediate oil lubricated axle Medium load condition by the
MCY11BGS axle 17.5 L + 2*1 L 80,000 km or 12 months; Medium load condition 80,000 SINOTRUK
(wheel rim)) km or 12 months; must be
MCY11BES Heavy load condition: 40,000
Heavy load condition 40,000 used,
MCJ11BG km or 12 months;
12 L (MCJ11BG oil km or 6 months; otherwise
Rear axle lubricated axle 12 L Oil for cold Whichever comes first the drive
+ 2*1 L (wheel rim)) Tooth areas in Whichever comes first axle will be
② Municipal vehicle, urban
Drive winter: ② Municipal vehicle, urban damaged,
MCY12BGK Intermediate 18L +2*1L (wheel Wheel construction truck, dump
axle construction truck, dump truck and the
axle rim) GL-5 75W-90 truck and mixer truck:
MCY12JGK Oil and mixer truck: SINOTRUK
Q/ZZ 21040 40,000 km (severe working will only
MCY12BEK 13L+2*1L (wheel condition 3) 20,000 km) or 6 40,000 km (severe working provide
Rear axle months, whichever comes condition 3) 20,000 km) or 6
MCJ12JG rim) paid
first. months, whichever comes first. service. 2.
③ Mine truck: Special
Intermediate ③ Mine truck:
18L gear oils of
axle 10,000 km or 2 months or 500
MCY12BGS 10,000 km or 2 months or different
hours of main engine
MCY12BESMCY12JGS 500 hours of main engine operation, whichever comes viscosity
operation, whichever comes first. grades
MCJ12BG Rear axle 13L first. shall not be
mixed.
477
Drive axle
Quality grade
Oil Mileage or time for the first Mileage or time between two
Assembly Oil and oil quantity 1) and viscidity Tips
name change oil changes
grade
MCY13BGS Intermediate 1. The

MCY13JGS axle
18L ① Over-the-road truck 2): ① Over-the-road truck 2): special
Light load condition 100,000 km Light load condition: 100,000 km after-sales
MCY13BES
or 12 months; or 12 mouths; gear oil
Rear axle 14.5L
MCY13JES specified by
Medium load condition 80,000 Medium load condition 80,000 the
Intermediate km or 12 months; km or 12 months;
18L +2*1L (wheel rim) SINOTRUK
MCJ13BG axle Heavy load condition: 40,000 km Heavy load condition 40,000 km must be
or 12 months; or 6 months; used,
MCJ13JG 14.5L+2*1L (wheel otherwise the
Rear axle Oil for cold Whichever comes first
rim) Tooth Whichever comes first
areas in winter: drive axle will
Drive
Wheel ② Municipal vehicle, urban ② Municipal vehicle, urban be damaged,
axle Intermediate GL-5 75W-90
21L+2*1L (wheel rim) construction truck, dump truck construction truck, dump truck and the
axle Oil
Q/ZZ 21040 and mixer truck: and mixer truck: SINOTRUK
will only
40,000 km (severe working 40,000 km (severe working provide paid
condition 3) 20,000 km) or 6 condition 3) 20,000 km) or 6
MCY16ZG service. 2.
months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Special gear
MCY17ZG 17.5L+2*1L (wheel ③ Mine truck: ③ Mine truck: oils of
Rear axle
rim) 10,000 km or 2 months or 500 different
10,000 km or 2 months or 500
hours of main engine operation, viscosity
hours of main engine operation,
whichever comes first. grades shall
not be mixed.
Note:
1) The oil and oil quantity in the table are only for reference, and the actual consumption shall prevail;
2) For over-the-road trucks, when the average fuel consumption is less than 32 L/100 km, the drain period for the light load condition shall be
followed; When the average fuel consumption is 32 ~ 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the medium load condition shall be followed; When the
average fuel consumption is greater than 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the heavy load condition shall be followed.
3) Severe working condition refers to severe overload, poor road condition and large dust during vehicle operation.
478
Drive axle
• After the new axle is used, the vehicle shall be re-checked for fasteners (except
for bolts applied with adhesive) after running-in and then they can be officially put
into service.
• Check the oil level once per 5,000 km or a month.
• Change the lubricating grease at the camshaft bush every 80000km or every
year.
• The soil and dust on the breather plug of the rear axle housing shall be checked
and removed frequently, and the oil filler plug and oil drain plug shall be checked.
If any oil seepage or oil leakage is found, the screw plug shall be tightened or
replaced in time.
• As the semi-axle flange transmits a large torque and generates impact load, the
fastening of the axle shaft bolt shall be checked frequently to prevent the axle
shaft bolt from breaking caused by loosenness the bolt.
Maintenance of grease-lubricated hub bearings (non-maintenance-free)
• Remove the wheel and the hub drum brake assembly, clean the hub bearing and
the dirty and deteriorated lubricating grease in the hub inner cavity, fill the gap
between the bearing inner race and the retained roller with new lubricating
grease, and apply a thin layer of the grease on the inner and outer surfaces of
the bearing to assemble.
479
Drive axle
Recommended lubricating greases for drive axle hub bearing and the recommended drain periods
Quality grade
Use of and Mileage or time for the first Mileage or time between two oil
Assembly lubricating Oil name Tips
viscidity change changes
grease 1)
grade
① Over-the-road truck 2): ① Over-the-road truck 2):

1. The special
Light load condition 100,000 km or Light load condition 100,000 km or after-sales
12 months; 12 months; lubricating
Medium load condition 80,000 km or Medium load condition 80,000 km or grease specified
12 months; 12 months; by the
SINOTRUK must
Heavy load condition 40,000 km or Heavy load condition 40,000 km or be used,
6 months; 6 months; otherwise the
The HP-R extreme
Drive minimum Whichever comes first Whichever comes first hub bearing will
pressure
axle MCJ09BGMCJ11BG refill Automotive be damaged,
compound ② Municipal vehicle, urban ② Municipal vehicle, urban
capacity on grease and the
Hub MCJ12BG lithium grease construction truck, transport dump construction truck, transport dump
one side is SINOTRUK will
bearing truck and mixer truck: truck and mixer truck:
1500 g Q/ZZ 21038 only provide paid
40,000 km (severe working 40,000 km (severe working service.
condition 3) 20,000 km) or 6 condition 3) 20,000 km) or 6 2. This special
months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. lubricating
③ Mine truck: ③ Mine truck: grease shall not
be mixed with
10,000 km or 2 months or 500 hours 10,000 km or 2 months or 500 hours other lubricating
of main engine operation, whichever of main engine operation, whichever grease.
comes first. comes first.
Note: 1) The amount of lubricating grease in the table is only for reference, and the specific amount is subject to the actual situations.
2) For over-the-road trucks, when the average fuel consumption is less than 32 L/100 km, the drain period for the light load condition
shall be followed; When the average fuel consumption is 32 ~ 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the medium load condition shall be
followed; When the average fuel consumption is greater than 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the heavy load condition shall be
followed.
3) Severe working condition refers to severe overload, poor road condition and much dust during vehicle operation.
480
Drive axle
Drum brake
driving for 50 km.
• For highway vehicles, the automatic clearance adjuster shall be filled with 2#
lithium base grease every 30, 000 km or 6 months (whichever comes first); and
for off-highway vehicles, the automatic clearance adjuster shall be filled with 2#
lithium base grease every 15, 000 km or 6 months (whichever comes first).
• The adjustment range of the brake clearance for brakes equipped with the
automatic clearance adjuster is 0.6-0.9 mm (the set clearance of the automatic
than 0.3 mm.
• For the drum brake with electronic wear alarm device, when the electronic wear
alarm device lamp in the cab is on during driving, check and replace the friction
plate and electronic wear alarm device.
- For drive axle assembly without electronic wear alarm device, check the brake
lining for wear and replace the friction plate immediately if it is worn beyond the
limit pit;
481
Drive axle
482
Drive axle
Disc brake
driving for 50 km.
• For the drive axle assembly with electronic wear alarm device, when the
electronic wear alarm device lamp in the cab is on during driving, check and
• For drive axle assembly without electronic wear alarm device, the wear of brake
shoe and brake disc can be visually inspected every 5000 km without removing
the tire. If it is found that there is more wear, it is necessary to disassemble the
tire to measure the thickness of the brake shoe and brake disc, when the
thickness of the brake disc reaches 37 mm, replace the brake disc immediately,
and the allowable maximum wear on each side of the brake disc is 4 mm. When
replacing the brake shoes, the brake shoes on left and right sides of the whole
axle should be replaced at the same time.
• Every 6 months, remove the tire and check whether the sliding pin cover, sliding
pin protective cover, piston protective sleeve and other rubber parts are
abnormal; Whether the tong body can slide normally on the sliding pin (the
sliding resistance is no more than 100 N); Check whether the brake clearance is
normal.
Warning!
The special drive axle gear oil specified by SINOTRUK must be used
for the drive axle, otherwise it will cause damage to the drive axle, and
SINOTRUK will only provide paid service!
483
Drive axle
Inspection and maintenance

Inspection and maintenance cycle
(Mileage and time, whichever comes first.)
Inspection and maintenance items
Regular inspection and
First inspection
maintenance
Every 15,000 Every 60,000

After 1500 km Every 120,000
km km
Periodic inspection items After the first km
Every three Every six
month Every year
months months
Inspection for wear, sealing and damage of moving parts, wear of brake lining,
quick return of camshaft, function of adjusting arm, function and sealing of brake ○ ○ ○ ○
chamber
Safety inspection (daily)
Check for proper brake adjustment ○ ○ ○ ○
Check for brake work of brakes ○ ○ ○ ○
Bolts should be tightened again according to the specified torque. ○ ○
Cleaning the brake ○
Apply anti-seize to the brake shoe anchor and roller ○
Check the rotation of the hub bearing and adjust or replace the hub bearing if
○ ○
necessary.
Caution!
○
i When the car is running under severe working conditions, the maintenance cycle needs to be shortened accordingly.
484
Drive axle
MCP series drive axle

The MCP series drive axles include MCP16 ZG drive axle and MCP23 ZG drive
axle, which are the two-stage drive axles featuring central level deceleration plus
wheel planetary deceleration. It is equipped with cast axle housing,
inter-axle/inter-wheel differential and differential locks, ,drum brake,
double-diaphragm brake chamber, automatic clearance adjuster, and ABS.
485
Drive axle
Axle maintenance
Quality
Oil grade and Mileage or time for the Mileage or time between
grade
Intermediate 17.4L+2*2.8L ① Over-the-road truck:

① Over-the-road truck:
axle (wheel rim) Express delivery (average
MCP16ZG Express delivery (average 1. The
fuel consumption less
15.4L+2*2.8L fuel consumption less special
Rear axle than 30 L/100 km)
(wheel rim) than 30 L/100 km) after-sales
240,000 km or 24 months; gear oil
Light load conditions
Intermediate 17.4L+2*2.8L Light load conditions specified by
(average fuel
axle (wheel rim) (average fuel the
consumption of 30-40
consumption of 30-40 SINOTRUK
L/100 km) 200,000 km or
L/100 km) 200,000 km or must be
24 months; Medium load
24 months; Medium load used,
Conventional condition (average fuel
condition (average fuel otherwise
oil: consumption of 40-50
consumption of 40-50 the drive
L/100 km) 160,000 km or
SAE 80W-90 L/100 km) 160,000 km or axle will be
24 months; Heavy load
Drive Gear long-acting 24 months; Heavy load damaged,
condition (average fuel
axle oil gear oil condition (average fuel and the
consumption greater than
(comply with consumption greater than SINOTRUK
50 L/100 km) 80,000 km
MCP23ZG J2360) 50 L/100 km) 80,000 km will only
or 12 months; whichever
15.4L+2*2.8L or 12 months; whichever provide paid
Rear axle comes first. ② Municipal
(wheel rim) comes first. ② Municipal service.
vehicle/urban
vehicle/urban construction
construction truck/dump 2. Special
truck/dump truck/mixer
truck/mixer truck: 40,000 gear oils of
truck: 40,000 km or 6
km or 6 months; Bad different
months; Bad working
working conditions viscosity
conditions (heavily
(heavily overloaded, poor grades shall
overloaded, poor and
and dusty road not be
dusty road conditions)
conditions) 20,000 km or mixed.
6 months; whichever
comes first.
486
Drive axle
Axle maintenance
Quality
grade
Intermediate 17.4L+2*2.8L 1. The

① Over-the-road truck 2):
axle (wheel rim) special
MCP16ZG Light load condition after-sales
15.4L+2*2.8L 100,000 km or 12 months; gear oil
Rear axle
(wheel rim) specified by
Medium load condition
80,000 km or 12 months; the
Intermediate 17.4L+2*2.8L SINOTRUK
axle (wheel rim) Heavy load condition must be
40,000 km or 6 months; used,
Oil for cold Whichever comes first otherwise
areas in the drive
② Municipal vehicle,
winter: axle will be
Drive Gear urban construction truck, damaged,
2000-5000 km
axle oil GL-5 dump truck and mixer and the
75W-90 truck: SINOTRUK
MCP23ZG Q/ZZ 21040 40,000 km (severe will only
15.4L+2*2.8L working condition 3) provide paid
Rear axle
(wheel rim) 20,000 km) or 6 months, service.
whichever comes first. 2. Special
③ Mine truck: gear oils of
different
10,000 km or 2 months or
viscosity
500 hours of main engine
grades shall
operation, whichever
not be
comes first.
mixed.
Note: 1) The oil and oil quantity in the table are only for reference, and the specific amount is subject to the actual situations.
2) For over-the-road trucks, when the average fuel consumption is less than 32 L/100 km, the drain period for the light load condition shall be followed; When the
average fuel consumption is 32 ~ 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the medium load condition shall be followed; When the average fuel consumption is greater
487
Drive axle
driving for 50 km.
• After the new axle is used, the whole vehicle shall be run-in for 1500 km, and the
fasteners (including but not limited to transmission shaft and flange connecting
bolt, wheel bolt, main reducer and axle housing junction surface bolt, U-bolt and
so on, except for glued bolts) shall be rechecked before it can be officially put
into use.
• During the driving of the vehicle, the temperature of the drive axle and wheel rim
reducer (not 70 ℃ higher than the ambient temperature ) and the connection of
each component (transmission shaft and flange connecting bolt, wheel bolt,
bolts on the junction surface of the main reducer and axle housing) shall be
checked regularly. The inspection shall be carried out every 2000 km and the
bolts should be retightened if necessary.
• Check the oil level once per 5,000 km or a month. During the oil change, drain
the old gear oil in the middle rear axle first, and then fill new gear oil. The oil
filling shall be sufficient. Fill 2.8-L gear oil into each wheel rim respectively, and
then fill the gear oil into the middle section of axle housing. After oil filling, the
vehicle will stop for 5 km and check the oil level again. The standard oil level
should be that the oil level reaches the oil level limit on the axle housing (see the
figure) and the oil starts dripping. If the oil level is low than that, add oil again.
Oil level limit
488
Drive axle
• After oil change, or after checking the oil level, when tightening the refuelling/drain plug, precoat the thread with removable fastening glue,
such as "Loctite 200" or "WD 200".
• Regularly check the refuelling/drain plugs of the wheel rim, main reducer and axle housing, and retighten them if necessary. The tightening
torque of the main reducer and axle housing refuelling/drain tapered plug is 70±10 Nm, and the tightening torque of the wheel rim
refuelling/drain plug is 95 Nm. Do not disassemble and assemble repeatedly to prevent damage to the screw plug thread, but replace the
screw plug in time.
• Fill the adjusting arm, camshaft support and braking plate zerk with 2# lithium base grease every 80000 km or every year (20000 km or 4
months under severe working conditions). Fill the automatic clearance adjuster with 2# lithium base grease every 20,000 km.
• Check and clean the breather plug regularly to keep the air breather well-ventilated.
• Regularly check the working condition of the differential lock. If it is in poor condition, find the cause and repair it in time.
• The adjustment range of the brake clearance for brakes equipped with an automatic clearance adjuster: 0.6-0.9 mm (the set clearance of
the automatic clearance adjuster varies slightly from supplier to supplier), and the clearance difference between the left and right sides of
the whole axle shall not be greater than 0.3 mm.
• For the drum brake with electronic wear alarm device, when the electronic wear alarm device lamp in the cab is on during driving, check and
- For drive axle assembly without electronic wear alarm device, check the brake lining for wear and replace the friction plate immediately if it
is worn beyond the limit pit;
-Check the fit between the adapter sleeve and the fixing dowel on the automatic clearance adjuster, and replace the adapter sleeve if it is
loose;
-Check the fit between the adapter ring and the adjusting arm on the automatic clearance adjuster, and replace the automatic clearance
adjuster if there is relative rotation between the two.
489
Drive axle

Warning!
SINOTRUK-specific drive axle gear oil shall be used for the
drive axle, otherwise drive axle damage will be caused,
490
Drive axle

Inspection and maintenance items (Mileage and time, whichever comes first.)
First inspection Regular inspection and maintenance
After 1500 km Every 15,000 km

Every 60,000 km Every 120,000 km
Periodic inspection items After the first Every three
Every six months Every year
month months
Inspection for wear, sealing and damage of moving parts, wear of brake
lining, quick return of camshaft, function of adjusting arm, function and ○ ○ ○ ○
sealing of brake chamber
Tighten the bolt again according to the specified torque ○ ○
Cleaning the drum brake ○
Check the rotation of the hub bearing and adjust or replace the hub
○ ○
bearing if necessary.
• When the car is running under severe working conditions, the maintenance cycle needs to be shortened accordingly.
• After newly installing or replacing the wheel, tighten the wheel nut according to the specified torque after driving for 50 km; After 150 km,
tighten the wheel nuts again according to the specified torque until the nuts are tightened.
• When the wheel is newly installed or replaced, be cautious about the drum brake to prevent the drum brake from falling off.
491
Drive axle
MAT16 drive axle

The MAT16 ZG drive axle is a two-stage drive axle featuring central first-stage
deceleration plus wheel planetary reductor, which is divided into double drive axle
and single drive axle (rear). It is equipped with cast axle housing,
inter-axle/inter-wheel differential and differential locks, ,drum brake,
double-diaphragm brake chamber, automatic clearance adjuster, and ABS.
492
Drive axle
Axle maintenance
Quality
Oil grade and Mileage or time for the first Mileage or time between two oil
name viscidity change changes
grade
Intermediate 20.3L+2*2L 1. The

axle (wheel rim) special
① Over-the-road truck: Express after-sales
① Over-the-road truck: Express delivery (average fuel gear oil
delivery (average fuel consumption consumption less than 30 L/100 specified
less than 30 L/100 km) 240,000 km km) 240,000 km or 24 months; by the
or 24 months; Light load conditions Light load conditions (average SINOTRUK
(average fuel consumption of 30-40 fuel consumption of 30-40 L/100 must be
L/100 km) 200,000 km or 24 km) 200,000 km or 24 months; used,
Conventional months; Medium load condition Medium load condition (average otherwise
oil: (average fuel consumption of 40-50 fuel consumption of 40-50 L/100 the drive
Tooth SAE 80W-90 L/100 km) 160,000 km or 24 km) 160,000 km or 24 months; axle will be
MAT16ZG long-acting months; Heavy load condition Heavy load condition (average damaged,
Wheel
16.5L+2*2L gear oil (average fuel consumption greater fuel consumption greater than 50 and the
Rear axle Oil (comply with than 50 L/100 km) 80,000 km or 12 L/100 km) 80,000 km or 12 SINOTRUK
(wheel rim)
J2360) months; whichever comes first. ② months; whichever comes first. will only
Municipal vehicle/urban ② Municipal vehicle/urban provide
construction truck/dump truck/mixer construction truck/dump paid
truck: 40,000 km or 6 months; Bad truck/mixer truck: 40,000 km or 6 service. 2.
working conditions (heavily months; Bad working conditions Special
overloaded, poor and dusty road (heavily overloaded, poor and gear oils of
conditions) 20,000 km or 6 months; dusty road conditions) 20,000 km different
whichever comes first. or 6 months; whichever comes viscosity
first. grades
shall not be
mixed.
493
Drive axle
Quality
Oil grade and Mileage or time for the Mileage or time between two
name viscidity first change oil changes
grade
Intermediate 20.3L+2*2L ① Over-the-road truck 2):

axle (wheel rim) 1. The special
Light load condition 100,000 km after-sales
or 12 months; gear oil
Medium load condition 80,000 specified by
km or 12 months; the
SINOTRUK
Heavy load condition 40,000 km
must be used,
Oil for cold or 6 months;
otherwise the
areas in Whichever comes first drive axle will
Tooth
MAT16ZG winter: be damaged,
Wheel 2000-5000 km ② Municipal vehicle, urban
16.5L+2*2L GL-5 and the
Rear axle Oil construction truck, dump truck
(wheel rim) 75W-90 SINOTRUK
and mixer truck:
Q/ZZ 21040 will only
40,000 km (severe working provide paid
condition 3) 20,000 km) or 6 service. 2.
months, whichever comes first. Special gear
③ Mine truck: oils of different
viscosity
10,000 km or 2 months or 500 grades shall
hours of main engine operation, not be mixed.
Note:
1) The oil and oil quantity in the table are only for reference, and the specific amount is subject to the actual situations.
2) For over-the-road trucks, when the average fuel consumption is less than 32 L/100 km, the drain period for the light load condition shall be
followed; When the average fuel consumption is 32 ~ 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the medium load condition shall be followed; When the
average fuel consumption is greater than 50 L/100 km, the drain period for the heavy load condition shall be followed.
494
Drive axle
• For a new car, apply the brake in situ for 30~50 times to adjust the brake clearance to normal working clearance. Try to avoid emergency
brake before driving for 50 km.
• After 1500 km run-in, the new car shall be checked whether the brake clearance meets the requirements and whether the fasteners of each
part are tightened before officially putting the new car into use.
• When conducting the initial maintenance for a new car and change the lubricating oil of the wheel rim retarder, the wheel should be turned
so that the drain plug is located at the bottom, and then open the drain plug when the oil filling plug is above the other half to drain the used
oil (the discharged lubricating oil should be properly handled), then tighten the drain plug with a tightening torque of 70±10 Nm, and open
the oil filling plug to fill the lubricating oil to the high liquid level, and screw in the oil filling plug finally. Rotate the wheel several times, turn
the wheel until the oil level indicator line of the oil filling plug is in the horizontal position, open the oil filling plug to let the excess
lubricating oil flow out until the liquid level remains in the oil filling plug position, and tighten the oil filling plug with a tightening torque of
70±10 Nm.
• The oil quantity of wheel rim reducer and main reducer shall be checked frequently during use.
• Oil starvation of the drive axle will cause early wear of the moving part and even ablation in the serious situation; Excessive lubricating oil
can also cause high temperature and even oil leakage.
• There are two screw plugs on the rear axle housing: there is a drain plug at the bottom of the axle housing, and an oil filling plug at the
height near the middle of the axle housing. The normal liquid level should always be kept at the oil filling plug height.
• After oil change, or after checking the oil level, when tightening the refuelling/drain plug, precoat the thread with removable fastening glue,
such as "Loctite 200" or "WD 200".
• For highway vehicles, the automatic clearance adjuster shall be filled with 2# lithium base grease every 30, 000 km or 6 months (whichever
comes first); and for off-highway vehicles, the automatic clearance adjuster shall be filled with 2# lithium base grease every 15, 000 km or 6
months (whichever comes first).
• The adjustment range of the brake clearance for brakes equipped with the automatic clearance adjuster is 0.6-0.9 mm (the set clearance of
the automatic clearance adjuster varies slightly from supplier to supplier), and the clearance difference between the left and right sides of
the whole axle shall not be greater than 0.3 mm.
• For the drum brake with electronic wear alarm device, when the electronic wear alarm device lamp in the cab is on during driving, check and
495
Drive axle

limit pit;
clearance adjuster, and replace the automatic clearance adjuster if there is
relative rotation between the two.
rotation once, it indicates that the automatic clearance adjuster is damaged,
and the automatic clearance adjuster assembly shall be replaced in time.
Warning!
SINOTRUK-specific drive axle gear oil shall be used for the
drive axle, otherwise drive axle damage will be caused,
496
Drive axle
Inspection and maintenance items (Mileage and time, whichever comes first.)
First inspection Regular inspection and maintenance
After 1500 km Every 15,000 km

Every 60,000 km Every 120,000 km
Periodic inspection items After the first Every three
Every six months Every year
month months
Inspection for wear, sealing and damage of moving parts, wear of brake
lining, quick return of camshaft, function of adjusting arm, function and ○ ○ ○ ○
sealing of brake chamber
Tighten the bolt again according to the specified torque ○ ○
Cleaning the drum brake ○
Check the rotation of the hub bearing and adjust or replace the hub
○ ○
bearing if necessary.
• When the car is running under severe working conditions, the maintenance cycle needs to be shortened accordingly.
• After newly installing or replacing the wheel, tighten the wheel nut according to the specified torque after driving for 50 km; After 150 km,
tighten the wheel nuts again according to the specified torque until the nuts are tightened.
• When the wheel is newly installed or replaced, be cautious about the drum brake to prevent the drum brake from falling off.
497
Drive axle
440 series drive axle

In terms of structure type, the 440 series drive axles adopt central single reduction
final drive, press-welding axle housing; the 440 series axles are equipped with
maintenance-free hub bearing unit; the 440B series axles are equipped with
double-row tapered roller bearing and oil lubrication at the wheel rim.
498
Drive axle
Axle maintenance
Quality grade
and Mileage or time
Oil Mileage or time between
Assembly Oil and oil quantity 1) for the first Tips
name viscidity two oil changes
change
grade
Intermediate 16 L (Qingte) 14 L ① Over-the-road truck 2):

4404) axle (Pengxiang) 1. The special
Light load condition 100,000
after-sales
Rear axle 12L km or 12 months;
gear oil
Medium load condition specified by
Intermediate 14 L (Pengxiang) + 80,000 km or 12 months; the
axle 2*0.7 L (wheel rim) SINOTRUK
Heavy load condition 40,000
Conventional must be used,
km or 6 months;
oil: otherwise the
Whichever comes first drive axle will
GL-5 85W-90
Q/ZZ 21040 ② Municipal vehicle, urban be damaged,
Drive Gear and the
5000 km construction truck, dump
axle oil Oil for cold SINOTRUK
truck and mixer truck:
areas in winter: will only
440B4) 40,000 km (severe working
GL-5 75W-90 provide paid
12L+2*0.7L (wheel condition 3) 20,000 km) or 6
Rear axle service.
rim) Q/ZZ 21040 months, whichever comes
first. 2. Special
gear oils of
③ Mine truck: different
10,000 km or 2 months or viscosity
500 hours of main engine grades shall
operation, whichever comes not be mixed.
first.
4) For the purchased axles, the specific replacement cycle shall be adjusted according to the manufacturer's regulations.
499
Drive axle
for bolts applied with adhesive) after running-in and then they can be officially
put into service.
year.
replaced in time.
500
Drive axle
Drum brake
driving for 50 km.
lithium base grease every 30, 000 km or 6 months (whichever comes first); and
for off-highway vehicles, the automatic clearance adjuster shall be filled with 2#
lithium base grease every 15, 000 km or 6 months (whichever comes first).
automatic clearance adjuster is 0.6-0.9 mm (the set clearance of the automatic
than 0.3 mm.
• For the drum brake with electronic wear alarm device, when the electronic wear
alarm device lamp in the cab is on during driving, check and replace the friction
plate and electronic wear alarm device.
limit pit;
501
Drive axle
502
Drive axle
First inspection
maintenance

km km
month Every year
months months
chamber
○ ○
necessary.
Caution!
○
503
Drive axle
425 series drive axle

In terms of structural type, 425 series drive axles adopt central single reduction
final drive, press-welding axle housing; 425 series drive axles are equipped with
maintenance-free hub bearing unit.
504
Drive axle
Axle maintenance
Quality
grade
1. The
Intermediate ① Over-the-road truck 2): ① Over-the-road truck 2): special
axle 14L
Light load condition after-sales
100,000 km or 12 months; gear oil
100,000 km or 12 mouths;
specified by
Medium load condition Medium load condition the
80,000 km or 12 months; 80,000 km or 12 months; SINOTRUK
Conventional
Heavy load condition: Heavy load condition or Shaanxi
oil:
40,000 km or 12 months; 40,000 km or 6 months; Hande
GL-5 HD-R03
Whichever comes first Whichever comes first
85W-90 gear oil must
② Municipal vehicle, ② Municipal vehicle, be used,
Q/ZZ 21040
Drive Gear urban construction truck, urban construction truck, otherwise
4254) Oil for cold
axle oil dump truck and mixer dump truck and mixer the drive
areas in truck: axle will be
truck:
Rear axle 11.5L winter: damaged,
40,000 km (severe 40,000 km (severe
GL-5 working condition 3) SINOTRUK
working condition 3)
75W-90 20,000 km) or 6 months, only provide
20,000 km) or 6 months,
whichever comes first. paid service.
Q/ZZ 21040 whichever comes first. ③ 2. Special
③ Mine truck: Mine truck: gear oils of
10,000 km or 2 months or 10,000 km or 2 months or different
500 hours of main engine 500 hours of main engine viscosity
operation, whichever operation, whichever grades shall
comes first. comes first. not be
mixed.
505
Drive axle
4) For the purchased axles, the specific replacement cycle shall be adjusted according to the
for bolts applied with adhesive) after running-in and then they can be officially
put into service.
year.
replaced in time.
506
Drive axle
Drum brake
clearance to normal working clearance. Try to avoid emergency brake
before driving for 50 km.
• After 1500 km run-in, the new car shall be checked whether the brake
clearance meets the requirements and whether the fasteners of each part
are tightened before officially putting the new car into use.
lithium base grease every 30, 000 km or 6 months (whichever comes first);
and for off-highway vehicles, the automatic clearance adjuster shall be filled
with 2# lithium base grease every 15, 000 km or 6 months (whichever comes
first).
automatic clearance adjuster is 0.6-0.9 mm (the set clearance of the
automatic clearance adjuster varies slightly from supplier to supplier), and
the clearance difference between the left and right sides of the whole axle
shall not be greater than 0.3 mm.
• For the drum brake with electronic wear alarm device, when the electronic
wear alarm device lamp in the cab is on during driving, check and replace the
friction plate and electronic wear alarm device.
- For drive axle assembly without electronic wear alarm device, check the
brake lining for wear and replace the friction plate immediately if it is worn
beyond the limit pit;
507
Drive axle
508
Drive axle
First inspection
maintenance

km km
month Every year
months months
chamber
Check for proper brake adjustment and brake work of brakes ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○
necessary.
Caution!
○
Correspondence between gear oil viscidity grade and operating ambient temperature
viscidity grade Kinematic viscosity at 100℃ (m㎡/s) Suitable for ambient temperature (℃
80W-90 13.5～<18.5 -30～49
Note: it is recommended to secect gear oil with appropriate viscidity grade according to its correspondence with the ambient temperature as shown in the table.
509
Transmission shaft
Transmission shaft
The transmission shaft assembly includes universal joint bearing, intermediate
support bearing and telescopic spline. In order to ensure normal operation of
the transmission shaft assembly, periodical maintenance shall be carried out.
Caution!
The maintenance period of transmission shaft used in harsh
○
i environments with mud, dust and ozone, or at high and low
temperature shall be shortened.
Universal joint bearing (maintenance type)

• Fill the lubricating grease regularly. It is recommended that the highway
vehicle be filled once every 30,000 km, and the off-highway vehicle highway
vehicle and concrete mixer be filled once every 5,000 km..
• The lubricating grease grade is: Derunbao WGC-2 universal-joint-specific
lubricating grease, and 2 # lithium base grease and multi-purpose complex
lithium grease can also be used, with the requirements of high and low
temperature resistance of the grease being -30℃ ~ 120℃.
• Filling method of lubricating grease: fill lubricating grease from the zerk ①
of the universal joint until fresh lubricating grease overflows from the axle
bowl mouth of one universal joint. For mine trunks and engineering vehicles
under poor road conditions, the time for filling lubricating grease or the
mileage shall be shortened.
510
Transmission shaft
Intermediate support bearing

• The intermediate support bearing of the transverse tooth flanged transmission
shaft is maintenance-free bearing and does not require periodic filling of grease.
• For transmission shafts connected with flat plate flange, the intermediate support
bearing needs to be filled with lubricating grease regularly. It is recommended
that the highway vehicle shall be filled once every 30,000 km, and the
off-highway vehicle and concrete mixer shall be filled once every 5,000 km.
Lubricating grease grade is: 2# lithium base grease. Filling method of lubricating
grease: fill lubricating grease from the zerk ① of the spline connecting disk until
lubricating grease overflows from the mouth of the intermediate support.
Telescopic spline
• Fill the telescopic spline with lubricating grease regularly. It is recommended that 1
the highway vehicle be filled once every 30,000 km, and the off-highway vehicle
highway vehicle and concrete mixer be filled once every 5,000 km.. Lubricating
grease grade is: 2# lithium base grease. Filling method of lubricating grease : fill
lubricating grease from the zerk ② of the spline shaft protecting sleeve until
lubricating grease overflows from the mouth of the protecting sleeve oil seal.
• For mine trunks and engineering vehicles under poor road conditions, the time
for filling lubricating grease or the mileage shall be shortened.
511
Transmission shaft
The transmission shaft assembly shall be assembled according to the

1 following steps during disassembly, inspection and maintenance
• When reassembling the intermediate drive shaft assembly after disassembly
and inspection, the transmission shaft connected by transverse tooth flange
shall ensure that the four holes of the spline connecting disk are assembled
correspondingly to the four holes of the terminal pad (the phase is the same);
For transmission shafts connected with flat plate flange, ensure that the
nozzle on the spline connecting disk is installed corresponding to the oil
groove on the spline connector. Clean the rubber powder and oil stain on the
surface of the connecting bolt, nut and the connector thread on the
intermediate spline connector , apply LT271 thread lock adhesive to the
thread part ① and then screw it in and lock it. The tightening torque is 650
2 3 Nm, and it can be put into operation after 24 hours.
• When installing the intermediate driving shaft, first install the hanger on the
beam, and then simply fix the intermediate drive shaft on the gearbox and
hanger (do not tighten). When tightening the gearbox end, fine-tune the long
hole position of the intermediate support to ensure that the intermediate
support assembly is installed accurately in the front and rear and left and
right directions, ensure that the intermediate support buffer disc is not
subject to axial force, and ensure that the intermediate support ② is
5 5 perpendicular to the axis of the transmission shaft ③; Adjust the hanger
plate angle if necessary.
• For a transmission shaft assembly with telescopic spline, after disassembly
and assembly, it shall be ensured that the paint mark arrow ⑤ (or steel
lettered arrow) on the spline connector of the transmission shaft and the
paint mark arrow ⑤ (or steel lettered arrow) on the splined hub are installed
correspondingly, and the axises of the universal-joint cross trunnion④ of the
terminal pad on both ends are on the same surface.
4 4
512
Transmission shaft
• When the transmission shaft assembly is loaded, it is necessary to ensure

that universal-joint cross trunnion axis of the intermediate driving shaft
terminal pad is coplanar with the universal-joint cross trunnion axis of the
telescopic joint transmission shaft terminal pad.
• When disassembling and assembling the intermediate support, it is
necessary to ensure that the rubber buffer disc is located in the center of the
U-shaped hanger, and that the rubber buffer disc is perpendicular to the
intermediate driving shaft assembly axis and then locked to it.
• When disassembling and assembling the universal joint bearing, it shall be
ensured that the universal joint bearing be pulled by hand without jamming or
obvious axial clearance. For transmission shaft with elastic bearing washer,
it shall be ensured that the retainer ring falls into the circlip during
installation.
• When loading the transmission shaft assembly, the locking bolt and nut shall
all be new parts, and use a torque wrench to calibrate the tightening torque
when tightening. Torque reference values are as follows:
The Tightening torque of M12 × 1.25——120 Nm;
The Tightening torque of M14 × 1.5——185 Nm
The Tightening torque of M16 × 1.5——280 Nm
513
Suspension
Suspension
Steel plate spring suspension
• Overload and bad road conditions may easily damage the flat-leaf spring and
clip, so they should be replaced in time, otherwise it will accelerate the
damage.
• The plate spring connecting pin shall be regularly checked and filled with the
lubricating grease to ensure the normal operation of the suspension system.
• The U-bolt should be retightened regularly according to the prescribed
torque.
• If it is found that the shock absorber leaks, the rubber bushing is damaged or
the flying ring weld joint cracks, etc ., it should be replaced in time, otherwise
it will cause accelerated damage to related parts.
• Check the balancing axle case of metal bearing for oil leakage or sludge, and
replace it in time if there is oil leakage or sludge.
• The stabilizer bar is related to the driving posture of the vehicle. The damage
of it is liable to cause rolling or even roll-over accidents. It should be
regularly checked whether the fittings are loose or worn, and whether the
member bar is bent or broken.
• If the limit block is damaged or lost, timely replacement shall be carried out.
Otherwise, when driving on the rugged road, it will cause the excessive
runout of the axle, which will accelerate the fracture of the flat-leaf spring.
Warning!
- It is forbidden to change the quantity of flat-leaf springs,
replace the flat-leaf spring with a one of different thickness,
and change the suspension structure without permission.
- It is forbidden to use non-company components and parts
and modify or replace components and parts, otherwise it
may result in damage to the parts and loss of control of the vehicle,
resulting in personal injury or property damage!
514
Suspension
• Overload and bad road conditions may easily damage the flat-leaf spring, so
it should be replaced in time, otherwise it will accelerate the damage.
• The plate spring connecting pin shall be checked and lubricated regularly to
ensure the normal operation of the suspension system.
• The U-bolt and leaf spring center bolt should be retightened regularly
according to the prescribed torque.
• If it is found that the shock absorber leaks, the rubber bushing is damaged or
the flying ring weld joint cracks, etc ., it should be replaced in time, otherwise
it will cause accelerated damage to related parts.
• The stabilizer bar is related to the driving posture of the vehicle. The damage
of it is liable to cause rolling or even roll-over accidents. It should be
regularly checked whether the fittings are loose or worn, and whether the
member bar is bent or broken.
• If the limit block is damaged or lost, timely replacement shall be carried out.
Otherwise, when driving on the rugged road, it will cause the excessive
runout of the axle, which will accelerate the fracture of the flat-leaf spring.
• The slide rest is a quick-wear part, and the inspection shall be carried out
every 30,000 km, and the replacement shall be carried out after the wear Tightening
exceeds 6 mm. torque: 795 Nm Tightening
torque: 695 Nm
• See the figure for the tightening torque when performing maintenance and
replacement.
Tightenin
Tightening g torque:
torque: 290 Nm
1050 Nm
515
Suspension
Air suspension Regular safety inspection

Requirements for operation • Safety inspections shall be conducted regularly.
Vehicle overload is not allowed. • During the inspection, the vehicle shall be parked on a clean flat
No lubricating oil and grease shall be used on any part of the air ground, preferably on a service trench, and parking brake should
suspension system, especially on rubber parts. be implemented to fix the vehicle (this shall also be followed for
the inspection maintenance described below).
Maintenance shall be carried out as required.
• Safety inspection items:
Daily routine inspection and maintenance
- All fasteners shall be free from looseness, the tightening torque
• Routine inspection shall be carried out every day or before each
shall meet the specified requirements, and there shall be no dirt,
trip. rust or metal abrasion caused by looseness around the bolt
• Contents of routine inspection: head and nut.
- Visually inspect whether the airbag inflation is sufficient and - At a supply pressure of more than 6 bar, the airbags are
balanced. inflated normally, the firmness of the airbags on both sides of
- Whether the height of the suspension is normal and whether the the same axle is consistent, and the airbags are checked for no
suspension system leaks. wear, damage and abnormal bulge and there is a clearance
space of more than 25 mm around the airbags.
• Simple inspection method: when receiving a new vehicle, park the
vehicle on the level ground, measure the distance between the -Whether the shock absorber has oil leakage and damage, and
center of the wheel and the fixed point on the body that is easy to whether it works normally (if the shock absorber is hot after
mark above the wheel, and record the value. After this inspection, driving, it indicates that it works normally. Caution: shock
every time when conducting the same inspection, you just need absorber can be hot!).
to park the vehicle on the level ground and check whether the -All parts and weld joints shall be free of cracks.
value has changed. If there is no obvious change of this value, it • See the section of "vehicle maintenance" for other maintenance
means that the suspension height is normal and there is no air contents.
leakage in the system. Otherwise, it is necessary to find the
cause and eliminate the fault.
516
Suspension
Rubber suspension Lifting eye of Lifting eye and Variable stiffness Spacers
frame subplate of the spring (PROG) Easy-to-replace
Warning! frame PROG
Do not operate the vehicle when the frame lifting eye is
cracked, broken or seriously rusted, otherwise the Shear spring
components may be separated, resulting in loss of control of
the vehicle and personal injury or property damage!
Spring Mount
• Check rubber spring edges for signs of cracking or tearing (at least once a
year).
• Check all fasteners for tightness every 2,000 km.
Triangular
• No accessory fasteners and rubber elements can be removed. supporting seat Equalizing bar Tiler
• No lubricating oil or grease shall be used on any part of the rubber

suspension, especially on rubber parts.
Warning!
-Insufficient tightening torque can cause early wear and
damage to the axle bracket, holes and/or connecting parts at
the equalizing bar end.
-Do not screw back the nut to install the cotter pin, otherwise
the tightening torque will be reduced below the specified value.
517
Bolster
Bolster
Bolster maintenance 1
• Before the tractor and semitrailer are joined, be sure to clean the upper surface
of the fifth wheel and the oil groove ①, and make sure to fill the oil groove ①
2
with heavy-duty grease (such as 2# lithium base grease) and evenly apply the
heavy-duty grease to the upper surface of fifth wheel. 6
• Remove the lubricating grease on the upper surface of the fifth wheel and on the
latch hook ③ and the U-shape opening ② every 5,000 km. After thorough 3
cleaning, evenly apply the new heavy-duty grease to the upper surface of the
fifth wheel and the mating surface of the latch hook ③, the U-shape opening ②
and the traction pin.
• Adjust and check the following places every 5,000 km. 5
In order to compensate for the wear of the traction pin and latch hook ③ and 4
prevent the pin block ④ from being too tight during engagement to avoid a failure
to pull out the handle. When the tractor is engaged with the semitrailer, the
adjusting bolt ⑤ can be screwed out, then screwed in until it is loaded, and then
screwed in for another one turn. After the adjustment is completed, the nut ⑥ can
be tightened.
518
Vehicle maintenance
Vehicle maintenance
The first maintenance is the first maintenance conducted at the service station specified in the warranty manual according to the SINOTRUK
maintenance regulations, hereinafter referred to as "first maintenance". The periodical maintenance is the periodical maintenance conducted
at the service station specified in the warranty manual according to the SINOTRUK maintenance regulations, hereinafter referred to as the
"periodical maintenance".
Highway vehicles refer to the tractors, flat cars, stake trucks, oil tank trucks and other vehicles that are often used on the classified highway.
Off-highway vehicles refer to the vehicles for construction site, mining vehicles, dump trucks, side dumpers and other vehicles frequently
used on the non-classified highway.
Engine maintenance items
First maintenance Periodical maintenance
Periodical maintenance mileage (km)

Category Maintenance items
First maintenance
mileage (km) Off-highway vehicle,
Road vehicles
concrete mixer
1. Check the engine harness plugging for looseness, interference Every

2000～5000 Every 5,000km
and rubbing 15,000km
Every
2. Check the pipeline for looseness, interference and rubbing 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
3. Check for oil leakage 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
4. Check the scale where the oil level of the fuel coarse filter is Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
located (if this function is available) 15,000km
MC05/MC07 Every
5. Check and clean the oil float filter screen in the oil tank 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
Engine 15,000km
6. Check whether the engine oil and coolant liquid level are on the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
allowable scale 15,000km
7. Change the engine oil See "Engine Maintenance"
8. Replace the oil filter element Replace it when chaning the engine oil.
9. Check and clean the filter element of air filter and check whether Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
the air filter alarm sensor is effective 15,000km
10. Change the coolant See "Engine Maintenance"
519
Vehicle maintenance

Category Maintenance items
First maintenance
mileage (km) Off-highway vehicle, concrete
Road vehicles
mixer
11. Check the connecting bolts of the fan; Whether the fan is interfered
2000～5000 Every 15,000km Every 5,000km
with the fan shield and the possibility of interference
12. Check the tensioner to ensure the belt tension 2000～5000 Every 15,000km Every 5,000km
13. Inspect whether the connecting bolt of the suspensions of the engine
2000～5000 Every 15,000km Every 5,000km
are loose.
MC05/MC07 14. Check whether the engine support rubber pad is damaged 2000～5000 Every 15,000km Every 5,000km
Engine 15. Check whether the engine oil pressure and water temperature are
2000～5000 Every 15,000km Every 5,000km
normal
When changing the engine oil, replace the fuel filter element at the same
16. Replace the fuel precision filter element
time
The longest mileage interval shall be no more than 60,000 km, and the valve
17. Check the valve clearance and adjust if necessary clearance can be checked synchronously when changing the engine oil or
performing the periodical maintenance.
EOL tool
18. Read the engine fault code and check whether there is any fault 2000～5000 Every 15,000km Every 5,000km
check
520
Vehicle maintenance

Category First maintenance item First maintenance
mileage (km) Off-highway vehicle,
Road vehicles
concrete mixer
19. Check the engine harness plugging for looseness, interference and
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
rubbing
20. Check the pipeline for looseness, interference and rubbing 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
21. Check for oil leakage 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
22. Check the scale where the oil level of the fuel coarse filter is located (if
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
this function is available)
23. Check and clean the oil float filter screen in the oil tank 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
24. Check whether the engine oil level and coolant liquid level are within
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
the normal scale range
25. Change the engine oil See "Engine Maintenance"
26. Replace the oil filter element Replace it when chaning the engine oil.
27. Replace the fuel fine filter element Replace it when changing the engine oil
MC11/MC13
28. Check and clean the filter element of air filter and check whether the
Engine 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
air filter alarm sensor is effective
29. Change the coolant See "Engine Maintenance"
30. Check the connecting bolts of the fan; Whether the fan is interfered
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
with the fan shield and the possibility of interference
31. Check the tensioner to ensure the belt tension 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
32. Inspect whether the connecting bolts of the suspensions of the engine
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
are loose.
33. Check whether the engine support rubber pad is damaged 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
34. Check whether the engine oil pressure and water temperature are
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
normal
No more than 120,000 km, and the valve clearance can be checked
35. Check the valve clearance and adjust if necessary synchronously when changing the engine oil or performing the periodical
maintenance.
EOL tool check 36. Read the engine fault code and check whether there is any fault 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
521
Vehicle maintenance
7 Maintenance items for the platform chassis

Category (7th Periodical maintenance mileage (km)
Maintenance items First maintenance
platform) Road Off-highway vehicle,
mileage (km)
vehicles concrete mixer
1. Check whether the clutch is released fully and engaged steadily Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
without slippage 30,000km
2. Check the hydraulic oil (brake fluid) level of the clutch, and fill it Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
when it is insufficient 30,000km
3. Check whether the air vent of the clutch booster cylinder is Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
blocked or the exhaust is not smooth 30,000km
Clutch Every
4. Lubricate the clutch pedal shaft 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
5. Check the free stroke of the clutch pedal to ensure the clearance Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
of the release bearing 30,000km
Every
6. Lubricate the sliding sleeve of the release bearing 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
7. Change the clutch oil See Maintenance of Clutch
8. Check the transmission lubricating oil surface and supplement it Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
if necessary; Cleaning the filter screen 30,000km
9. Change the lubricating oil of the transmission See "Transmission maintenance"
Every
10. Lubricate the clutch fork shaft 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
11. Check and clean the pressure reducing valve of air filter
Every
(HW13710) 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
5555(HW13710)
12. Lubricate the transmission gearshift mechanism and check the Every
Gearbox 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
connecting bolts of the transmission. 30,000km
Every
13. Check and clean the air breather of the transmission 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
14. Check whether the transmission control mechanism is working Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
normally 30,000km
Every
15. Check whether the power takeoff is under normal service 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
Every
16. Check for oil and air leakage 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
522
Vehicle maintenance

Category
(The 7th Maintenance items First maintenance
platform) Road Off-highway vehicle,
mileage (km)
Every
17. Check for abnormal sound 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
Gearbox
Every
18. Inspect whether connecting bolts on the engine are loose. 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
Every
19. Check whether the retarder is normal 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
Retarder 30,000km
20. Change the retarder oil and replace the filter element (if any) See "Retarder Maintenance"
21. Change the gear oil of the drive axle main reducer and wheel
See "Drive Axle Maintenance"
rim reducer
Every
22. Check whether the brake return is normal 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
Every
23. Check whether the differential lock works normally 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
Every
Drive axle 24. Check the air breather 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
25. Check the clearance between brake shoe and drum Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
brake/wear of brake shoe of disc brake 30,000km
Every
26. Check the hub bearings for oil leakage 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
Every
27. Lubricate the brake clearance adjusting arm and camshaft 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
28. Check and lubricate the front hub See "Driven Axle Maintenance"
29. Lubricate the front steering master pin, brake adjusting arm Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
and camshaft 30,000km
Front
30. Check and adjust the tightness of the toe-in of front wheel and Every
steering 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
of wheel 30,000km
axle
31. Check whether the steering tie rod clamp, bolts and linkage ball Every
and 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
are loose 30,000km
steering
gear 32. Check whether the clamps, bolts and linkage ball of the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
steering drag link are loose 30,000km
33. Check whether the vertical arm of the steering gear box is Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
loose 30,000km
523
Vehicle maintenance
First
Periodical maintenance
maintenance
Category
Maintenance items First Periodical maintenance mileage (km)
(The 7th platform)
maintenance Road Off-highway vehicle,
mileage (km) vehicles concrete mixer
34. Check whether the middle vertical arm of the dual-steering Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
is loose 30,000km
Every
35. Whether the steering linkage has abnormal wear 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
36. Check and adjust the synchronous working condition of the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
double front axles 30,000km
37. Check whether the oil level of the steering gear is normal, Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
and clean the filter element if necessary. 30,000km
Front steering axle
38. Check the power steering pipeline for aging and oil Every
and steering gear 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
leakage 30,000km
Every
39. Check the oil and gas pipeline for interference and wear 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
Every
30,000km
42. Change the steering hydraulic oil Refer to "steering system maintenance"
43. Lubricate drive shaft cross shaft, telescopic sleeve and Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
intermediate support bearing of transmission shaft 30,000km
44. Fasten the intermediate supporting fixing bolt of the Every
Transmission shaft 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
transmission shaft 30,000km
Every
45. Fasten the connecting bolt of the transmission shaft 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
46. Lubricate all the leaf spring pins and bushings of the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
vehicle 30,000km
Every
47. Fasten the front and rear U-bolts 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
Chassis
48. Connecting bolt of the fastening leaf spring bracket lifting Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
eye 30,000km
Every
49. Check the validity of the plate spring limit block 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
524
Vehicle maintenance

Category
platform) mileage (km) Road Off-highway vehicle,
Every
50. Check the mounting bolts of the frame tubular beam 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
Every
51. Tighten the V-shaped thrust rod and lower thrust rod bolts. 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
52. Check the clearance between the balance suspension leaf Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
spring and the sliding plate and lubricate the sliding plate 30,000km
53. Check the gear oil in the balancing axle. See "Suspension parameters"
Every
54. Tighten the bolts connecting the balancing axle with the frame 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
Chassis 30,000km
Every
55. Fasten the wheel nut 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
56. Check oil leakage, gas leakage and liquid leakage in various Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
parts 30,000km
Every
57. Check the circuit for wear and possible wear 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
58. Check whether there is interference or possible damage on Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
water pipeline 30,000km
59. Check air route tightness in the driving and parking brake Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
conditions 30,000km
60. Inspect whether the brake pressure of the whole vehicle Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
reaches the specified value 30,000km
Every
Braking 61. Drain water from the air reservoir 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
system
Every
62. Check whether the brake is normal 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
Every
63. Check whether the brake line ages, wears and is damaged 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
30,000km
64. Replace the air drying tank See "Braking system"
525
Vehicle maintenance

Category
platform) mileage (km) Off-highway vehicle,
Road vehicles
concrete mixer
65. Check whether all lights work normally 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
66. Check whether the instrument works normally 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
67. Check whether the electric generator charging is normal 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
68. Inspect fastening of the power cable and bonding strap of the
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
battery;
69. Check the harnesses of each part for interference and make sure
Electrical 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
that they are away from heat sources and sharp objects.
appliances
and 70. Check the connection of harness and power consumer connectors 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
electric
control 71. Check whether the wiper system works normally and whether the
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
washing fluid needs to be added
system
72. Check the fuse and its specification 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
73. Check or replace the air conditioner filter element and add
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
refrigerant if it is insufficient.
74. Check whether the heater system (including the independent heat
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
source) and air conditioner are working properly.
75. Check whether MP5 is under normal service 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
76. Check and tighten the turnover mechanism bolts 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
77. Check whether the door control mechanism is working normally 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
Cab 78. Inspect and lubricate the cab locking mechanism 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
79. Check whether the seat adjustment mechanism and the safety belt
work normally, and add lithium-based lubricating oil to the sliding chute 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
of the seat adjusting mechanism
526
Vehicle maintenance
First
maintenance
Category
(The 7th Maintenance items First Periodical maintenance mileage (km)
platform) maintenance Road Off-highway vehicle,
80. Check whether the steering wheel and steering linkage are working Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
normally 30,000km
81. Check whether the body suspension airbag, height adjustment and Every
Cab 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
shock absorber work normally 30,000km
82. Check the amount of hydraulic oil in the lifting pump and add it if Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
insufficient. 30,000km
83. Clean the adblue tank vent valve See "Engine Maintenance"
SCR
system 84. Replace the adblue pump filter element See "Engine Maintenance"
527
Vehicle maintenance
5 Maintenance items of the platform chassis

Category
1. Check whether the clutch is released fully and engaged steadily Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
without slippage 15,000km
2. Check the hydraulic oil (brake fluid) level of the clutch, and fill it Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
when it is insufficient 15,000km
3. Check whether the air vent of the clutch booster cylinder is blocked Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
or the exhaust is not smooth 15,000km
Clutch Every
4. Lubricate the clutch pedal shaft 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
5. Check the free stroke of the clutch pedal to ensure the clearance Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
of the release bearing 15,000km
Every
6. Lubricate the sliding sleeve of the release bearing 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
7. Change the clutch oil See Maintenance of Clutch
528
Vehicle maintenance

Category
8. Check the transmission lubricating oil surface and supplement it Every

2000～5000 Every 5,000km
if necessary; Cleaning the filter screen 15,000km
9. Change the lubricating oil of the transmission See "Transmission maintenance"
Every
10. Lubricate the clutch fork shaft 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
11. Check and clean the pressure reducing valve of air filter Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
(HW13710) 15,000km
12. Lubricate the transmission gearshift mechanism and check the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
connecting bolts of the transmission. 15,000km
Every
13. Check and clean the air breather of the transmission 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
Gearbox 15,000km
14. Check whether the transmission control mechanism is working Every

2000～5000 Every 5,000km
normally 15,000km
Every
15. Check whether the power takeoff is under normal service 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
16. Check for oil and air leakage 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
17. Check for abnormal sound 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
18. Inspect whether connecting bolts on the engine are loose. 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
19. Check whether the retarder is normal 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
Retarder 15,000km
20. Change the retarder oil and replace the filter element (if any) See "Retarder Maintenance"
529
Vehicle maintenance

Category
21. Change the gear oil of the drive axle main reducer and
See "Drive Axle Maintenance"
wheel rim reducer
Every
15,000km
Every
23. Check whether the differential lock works normally 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
Drive axle 24. Check the air breather 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
Every
26. Check the hub bearings for oil leakage 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
27. Lubricate the brake clearance adjusting arm and camshaft 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
28. Check and lubricate the front hub See "Driven Axle Maintenance"
29. Lubricate the front steering master pin, brake adjusting arm Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
and camshaft 15,000km
30. Check and adjust the tightness of the toe-in of front wheel Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
and of wheel 15,000km
Driven axle and
steering gear 31. Check whether the steering tie rod clamp, bolts and linkage Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
ball are loose 15,000km
32. Check whether the clamps, bolts and linkage ball of the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
steering drag link are loose 15,000km
33. Check whether the vertical arm of the steering gear box is Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
loose 15,000km
530
Vehicle maintenance
First
maintenance
Category
Maintenance items First Periodical maintenance mileage (km)
(The 5th platform)
maintenance Road Off-highway vehicle,
34. Check whether the middle vertical arm of the dual-steering Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
is loose 15,000km
Every
35. Whether the steering linkage has abnormal wear 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
36. Check and adjust the synchronous working condition of the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
double front axles 15,000km
37. Check whether the oil level of the steering gear is normal, Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
and clean the filter element if necessary. 15,000km
Driven axle and
38. Check the power steering pipeline for aging and oil Every
steering gear 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
leakage 15,000km
Every
39. Check the oil and gas pipeline for interference and wear 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
Every
15,000km
42. Change the steering hydraulic oil Refer to "steering system maintenance"
43. Lubricate drive shaft cross shaft, telescopic sleeve and Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
intermediate support bearing of transmission shaft 15,000km
44. Fasten the intermediate supporting fixing bolt of the Every

Transmission shaft 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
transmission shaft 15,000km
Every
45. Fasten the connecting bolt of the transmission shaft 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
531
Vehicle maintenance

Category
46. Lubricate all the leaf spring pins and bushings of the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
vehicle 15,000km
Every
47. Fasten the front and rear U-bolts 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
48. Connecting bolt of the fastening leaf spring bracket lifting Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
eye 15,000km
Every
49. Check the validity of the plate spring limit block 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
50. Check the mounting bolts of the frame tubular beam 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
51. Tighten the V-shaped thrust rod and lower thrust rod Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
bolts. 15,000km
Chassis 52. Check the clearance between the balance suspension Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
leaf spring and the sliding plate and lubricate the sliding plate 15,000km
53. Check the gear oil in the balancing axle. See "Suspension maintenance"
54. Tighten the bolts connecting the balancing axle with the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
frame 15,000km
Every
55. Fasten the wheel nut 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
56. Check oil leakage, gas leakage and liquid leakage in Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
various parts 15,000km
Every
57. Check the circuit for wear and possible wear 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
58. Check whether there is interference or possible damage Every

2000～5000 Every 5,000km
on water pipeline 15,000km
532
Vehicle maintenance

Category
59. Check air route tightness in the driving and parking brake Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
conditions 15,000km
Every
60. Check whether the brake line ages, wears and is damaged 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
61. Inspect whether the brake pressure of the whole vehicle reaches Every
Braking 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
the specified value 15,000km
system
Every
62. Drain water from the air cylinder 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
63. Check whether the brake is normal 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
64. Replace the air drying tank See "Braking system"
Every
65. Check whether all lights work normally 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
66. Check whether the instrument works normally 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
Electrical 67. Check whether the electric generator charging is normal 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
appliances
and 68. Inspect fastening of the power cable and bonding strap of the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
electric battery; 15,000km
control
system 69. Check the harnesses of each part for interference and make sure Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
that they are away from heat sources and sharp objects. 15,000km
Every
70. Check the connection of harness and power consumer connectors 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
71. Check whether the wiper system works normally and whether the Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
washing fluid needs to be added 15,000km
533
Vehicle maintenance
First
maintenance
Category
Every
72. Check the fuse and its specification 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Electrical 73. Check or replace the air conditioner filter element and add refrigerant if it Every
appliances 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
is insufficient. 15,000km
and electric
control 74. Check whether the heater system (including the independent heat source) Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
system and air conditioner are working properly. 15,000km
Every
75. Check whether MP5 is under normal service 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
76. Check and tighten the turnover mechanism bolts 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
77. Check whether the door control mechanism is working normally 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
Every
78. Inspect and lubricate the cab locking mechanism 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
79. Check whether the seat adjustment mechanism and the safety belt work
Every
Cab normally, and add lithium-based lubricating oil to the sliding chute of the seat 2000～5000 Every 5,000km
15,000km
adjusting mechanism
80. Check whether the steering wheel and steering linkage are working Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
normally 15,000km
81. Check whether the body suspension airbag, height adjustment and shock Every
2000～5000 Every 5,000km
absorber work normally 15,000km
82. Check the amount of hydraulic oil in the lifting pump and add it if
Refer to "Cab tilting mechanism"
insufficient.
534
Vehicle maintenance
First
maintenance
Category
83. Clean the adblue tank vent valve See "Engine Maintenance"
SCR system
84. Replace the adblue pump filter element See "Engine Maintenance"
535
Vehicle maintenance
The connecting bolt ① at the round girder under the off-highway vehicle and
concrete mixer shall be retightened every 5000 Km. 1
536
Chapter VI Safety and Environmental Protection
537
Safety instruction
Safety instruction
General precautions related to safety
Plastic hose, rubber hose and wiring harness
Caution!
○
Welding or drilling shall not be carried out near plastic hose,
i rubber hose and wiring harness.
Fasten the wheel nut again

• For new vehicles or vehicles with the wheels replaced, the wheel nut shall be
re-tightened after 50 km of driving, see "Replacing tires".
538
Safety instruction
Traction recommendations result in brake damage.

See "traction and traction start".
To prevent damage to electrical system, see "electrical system".
Accessories and part
For your benefit, we recommend that you use only SINOTRUK
“relatives" accessories. These accessories and parts are
specifically certified for reliability, safety and suitability. Although we
have been observing the market, we still can't judge the
performance of other products in the market. Even if they are
approved by an official agency, we would not be responsible for
them.
Safety device and driver's tool
Check whether the following equipment is complete
Modified parts and additional device
The installation shall be carried out in accordance with the
provisions of the modification manual for relevant vehicle types
specified by the SINOTRUK.
The user shall obtain the written approval of the upperstructure
manufacturer.
Any changes that are inconsistent with the SINOTRUK vehicle
structure shall be subject to the express written approval of the
SINOTRUK designated department. Including the additional device
of the vehicle, such as air conditioning system, back shield, retarder,
etc.
Overload protection for the braking system/energy storage
gas chamber
Service braking (foot brake) is not allowed if the parking brake is in
working condition. Otherwise, it will result in brake force
superposition of parking brake and service braking, which may
Jack, jack rocker, driver's tool, reflective vest, parking wedge, warning triangle.
539
Safety instruction
Use of battery
Caution!
○
-Avoid using automobile electrical appliances for a long time
i when the automobile engine is not working, such as interior
light, cassette radio etc. It is to prevent deep discharge of the
battery, failure to start the vehicle and shortening the service
life of the battery.
- The natural electric leakage generated by the vehicle load
cannot be avoided. Therefore, if the vehicle is parked for more
than 10 days, the negative wire of the battery shall be removed
to avoid load electric leakage and prevent the deep discharge
of the battery.
- The battery has been used for more than 2 years, regardless
of whether the battery fails or not, it is recommended to replace
the battery to prevent the battery from being unable to start due
to natural failure.
540
Safety instruction
Some battery are installed with electric eye. The color of the electric eye ②
on the status display should be observed according to the instructions on the 2
label ① on the battery to determine if the battery needs to be charged or
replaced.
1
1
Safety protection of the battery
- Protective goggles shall be worn during battery operation and installation.
- Avoid the fact that the metal tools and conductors contact the positive and
negative poles at the same time, so as to prevent short circuit.
- During charging, handling or vibration of the battery, explosive gas will be
generated and discharged from the gas vent. If the hydrogen concentration in
the environment exceeds 4%, it will explode in case of open flame. The
environment shall be kept ventilated, open flame and smoking are strictly
prohibited. When the battery is charging, it is strictly forbidden to move the
battery without disconnecting the power supply. The battery that has just been
charged shall be kept still for 10 minutes, and it is forbidden to have an open
flame nearby and impact or drop the battery.
541
Safety instruction
Safety protection of the battery -Connect the battery to the terminal stud of the vehicle (positive
- The liquid in the battery is dilute sulphuric acid, which shall be before negative).
handled carefully and placed vertically to prevent sulfuric acid from -The battery shall be prevented from failure due to excessive
overflowing. If the skin is in contact with sulfuric acid, take off the storage time, which may cause unnecessary losses.
contaminated clothes immediately and rinse with plenty of water; If -Check the battery regularly. If the voltage is less than 12.3 V,
the eyes are in contact with sulfuric acid, rinse with clean water for charge it.
at least 2 minutes and then seek medical attention immediately;
Drink plenty of water and milk immediately and seek medical Warning!
attention if you accidentally swallow sulfuric acid. -During the installation of the battery, accidental
Transportation of battery short circuit of the positive and negative poles shall
be prevented;
- Avoid excessive bumps and impacts during transportation.
-It is strictly forbidden to connect the positive and
- High temperatures (not more than 45 °C) should be avoided for negative poles reversely, otherwise the vehicle
the transportation environment. electrical equipment will be damaged!
- The battery cannot be placed upside down or tilted.
- Avoid tilting the battery more than 40°when handling to prevent
acid liquor from flowing out of the gas vent.
Storage of battery
- Batteries shall be stored in a cool, well-ventilated place.
Battery replacement process

-Turn off all power consumers on the engine and the vehicle and
turn off the main battery switch.
- Disconnect the negative electrode of the battery first, and then
disconnect the positive electrode.
- Remove the battery.
-Confirm that the performance of the new battery is consistent with
that of the old battery. Use the multimeter to confirm that the
polarity of the battery is correct, and the charge state is normal
(the voltage is higher than 12.5 V).
-Clean the battery terminal and the terminal stud of vehicle.
-Mount and fix the battery.
542
Safety instruction
Battery charging
-Select appropriate charging equipment, read the equipment manual carefully
before operation, and operate it as required.
-When the charging device is turned off, connect the battery terminal.
The positive terminal (usually red) of the charger output is connected to the
positive terminal of the battery, and the negative terminal (blue or black wire) of
the output terminal is connected to the negative terminal of the battery, and
confirm that the connection is firm.
- Turn on the charging switch of the charger and slowly adjust the charging
voltage or current from small to large through the charger regulator until the
required setting range is reached. After charging for 2 to 3 hours, pay attention
to timely observe and adjust the charging current to prevent accidents.
-Judge the charging time and conditions for ending charging according to the
type of charger.
-At the end of charging, turn off the power switch of charger first, and then
disconnect the battery charging cable (do not remove the charging cable
without disconnecting the power supply during charging).
Caution!
○
i -Do not charge a battery with broken shell and solidified
electrolyte or a battery that needs to be replaced.
--Battery charging shall be carried out in a well-ventilated
environment.
-During the charging process, if the battery temperature
exceeds 45 ℃, the charging voltage shall be appropriately
reduced or the charging shall be stopped; If acid liquor
overflows from the gas vent of the battery, stop charging
immediately.
543
Safety instruction
Compressed air reservoir

• Air reservoir is an air storage device for vehicle braking system and auxiliary
equipment.
• The air reservoir housing is marked with product model and supplier ID.
• When installing the fastening belt, pay attention not to contact the welding
point of the air reservoir to prevent the air reservoir from yielding under
tension and impairing the safety.
• Only use the non-alkaline cleaner for cleaning.
• In order to prevent the air reservoir from ponding, it shall be fully drained
frequently. The water drain valve is located at the bottom of the air reservoir.
• Avoid welding, heat treatment or other treatment that may damage the safety
of the air reservoir (air reservoir housing, base, thread and accessories).
544
Safety instruction
Air conditioning system and refrigeration element

Caution!
○
i Refrigerant and the vapor it volatilizes are harmful to human
health!
• Avoid the contact with refrigerant and the vapor it volatilizes.

• Wear gloves and goggles! If the refrigerant is accidentally splashed on the
skin or in the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.
• Gaseous refrigerants shall not be deflated in a closed room, as this may
cause suffocation!
• Pump out the refrigerant with a special disposal system.
• Do not perform operations such as welding on the refrigerating system part
or near the refrigerating system part. This kind of operation is not allowed
even when the refrigerant is emptied. Danger of explosion and poisoning !
• Do not use steam cleaner to clean the parts of refrigerating system.
• The refrigerating system shall be serviced at the SINOTRUK service station.
• It is forbidden to use propane or butane refrigerant on vehicles manufactured
by SINOTRUK.
• The fluoride-free R134a refrigerant is filled in the air conditioning system.
• Never mix fluoride-free R134a refrigerant with R12 (containing fluoride)
refrigerant in the refrigerating system.
• Never change to fill R12 refrigerant in systems using R134a refrigerant.
545
Safety instruction
Used oil
• Prolonged or frequent contact with engine oil will remove grease from the
skin and cause dry, allergic or reddish skin.
• Experiments on animal skin have shown that the used oil contains
cancerogenic substances. But used oil is not a hazardous goods if it is
handled in accordance with basic safety and hygiene procedures.
Health protection warning
• Prevent prolonged, excessive or frequent contact with used oil.
• Protect the skin with a suitable protective agent or protective gloves.
• Fully clean the skin in contact with engine oil with soap and water or special
cleaner, and do not wash with gasoline, diesel, kerosene, diluent or solvent.
• Apply skin care grease after washing.
• Replace clothes and shoes contaminated with engine oil.
• Never put a rag stained with engine oil in your pocket.
546
Safety instruction
Be careful when handling cleaner, coolant, engine oil, fuel, etc:

• Keep out of the reach of children.
• Keep away from fire sources and do not smoking.
• Immediately remove the clothing contaminated by or soaked in these
chemicals.
• Do not allow these chemicals to flow into the sewer.
Beware of danger when handling cleaner, coolant, engine oil, fuel, etc!
• Flammable.
• It is toxic when being inhaled, swallowed or in contact with skin.
• Long-term treatment of cleaner, coolant, engine oil, fuel, etc. may harm your
health and lead to complications.
• Carcinogenic (for fuel only).
547
Safety instruction
Side and rear protection of the wagon

• Side protective device ①: prevent personnel from getting dragged in from
the side.
• Rear protective device ②: it has the ability to block the motor vehicle in
rear-end accident to prevent drill-type collisions.
2
1
Warning triangle
When a vehicle needs to stop temporarily in case of a traffic accident,
breakdown, etc., the traffic regulations must be observed. The warning triangle
③ shall be placed as required to ensure that the vehicle drivers behind can
easily find it.
Place it at the positions

specified in the traffic rules
548
Safety instruction
Basic requirements for side protective device

• The side guard rail consists of vertical brace and cross bar. The vertical
brace can be formed by bending and welding steel pipe or angle steel, and
fixed to the side of the auxiliary frame with bolts.
• The cross bar is made of M-shaped steel or C-shaped steel and welded on
the vertical brace.
Sectional dimension and materials of cross bar
• Sectional dimension: 120 mm × 25 mm × 3 mm
• Material: Q235
549
Safety instruction
Front guard
• Prevent people in front of the vehicle from getting involved in the underbody
• Sectional dimension: 120 mm × 50 mm × 2 mm
• Material: Q345
550
Safety instruction
Basic requirements for rear underrun protection device of shop truck

• The rear guard rail of shop truck is composed of guard rail bracket, diagonal
brace and cross bar.
• The guard rail bracket is made of bent U-steel or angle steel and the inside
of the bracket is reinforced with diagonal braces made of U-steel or angle
steel. The cross bar is welded to the guard rail bracket and the guard rail
bracket is welded to the tail of the frame (see the figure).
• The rear underrun protective device should be rectangular steel pipes with
the dimensions of 100mm×50mm×4.0mm or 120 mm×60mm×4.0mm, which
are made of material Q235.
551
Environmental Protection
Environmental Protection
Used oil (engine oil, transmission gear oil, etc.)
Warning!
Used engine oil will damage the quality of underground water
and should be properly treated.
• Used oil must not be dumped on the ground, in water or in sewer and drain-pipe,
or you may be accused.
• Used oil shall be collected and disposed of in accordance with relevant local laws
and regulations.
Filter cartridge, filter element, filter and drying chamber
• Used filtering element, cartridge and filter (engine oil and fuel filters, drying
chamber of the air dryer) shall be classified as hazardous waste and shall be
properly disposed of in accordance with relevant local laws and regulations.
Coolant
• Undiluted coolants are hazardous goods.
• When handling used coolant, local regulations shall be followed.
552
Chapter VII Technical Parameters
553
Engine parameters
Engine parameters
MC07 Diesel Engine Parameter Table
Model MC07.25-60 MC07.27-60 MC07.29-60 MC07.31-60 MC07.33-60 MC07.34-60
Type Straight-six engine, water-cooling, four-stroke, supercharge inter-cooler, high-pressure common rail
Emission level National VI
Cylinder bore × stroke (mm×mm) 108×125
Displacement (L) 6.87
Compression ratio 16.5:1
Rated power/speed (kW/r/min) 188/2200 202/2200 213/2200 228/2200 240/2200 251/2200
Maximum net power/speed (kW/r/min) 185/2200 199/200 210/2200 225/2200 237/2200 248/2200
Maximum torque/speed (Nm/r/min) 930/1200-1800 1060/1200-1800 1200/1200-1700 1230/1200-1800 1250/1200-1800 1250/1200-1800
Idle speed (r/min) 600
Ignition order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Crankshaft rotation direction Clockwise (towards the free end)
554
Engine parameters
MC11/MC13 Diesel Engine Parameter Table

MC11.36 MC11.40 MC11.44 MC13.48 MC13.50 MC11.40 MC11.43- MC11.46 MC13.50 MC13.54
Model
-60 -60 -60 -60 -60 -61 61 -61 -61 -61
Straight-six engine, water-cooling, four-stroke, supercharge Straight-six engine, water-cooling, four-stroke, supercharge
Type
inter-cooler, high-pressure common rail, EGR inter-cooler, high-pressure common rail
Emission level National VI National VI
Cylinder bore × stroke 126×166

120×155 126×166 120×155
(mm×mm)
Displacement (L) 10.518 12.419 10.518 12.419
Rated power/speed
268/1900 297/1900 327/1900 356/1800 371/1800 297/1900 319/1900 341/1900 371/1800 400/1800
(kW/r/min)
Maximum net
power/speed 265/1900 294/1900 324/1900 353/1800 367/1800 294/1900 316/1900 338/1900 368/1800 397/1800
(kW/r/min)
1800/ 1900/ 2100/ 2300/ 2400/ 1900/ 2100/ 2200/ 2400/ 2500/
Maximum torque/speed
1000-140 1000-140 1000-140 1000-140 1000-140 1000-140 1000-140 1000-140 1000-140 1000-140
(Nm/r/min)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ignition order 1－5－3－6－2－4
Crankshaft rotation
Clockwise (viewed from the free end)
direction
Post-processing device DOC+DPF+SCR+ASC
555
Engine parameters
MT07 Gas Engine Parameter Table

Model MT07.26-60 MT07.29-60
Type Straight-six engine, water-cooling, four-stroke, supercharge inter-cooler, high-pressure common rail
Compression ratio 11.5:1
Rated power/speed (kW/r/min) 194/2200 216/2200
Maximum net power/speed (kW/r/min) 191/2200 213/2200
Maximum torque/speed (Nm/r/min) 1030/1100-1600 1150/1100-1600
Idle speed (r/min) 550±50
Ignition order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Crankshaft rotation direction Clockwise (towards the free end)
556
Engine parameters
MT13 Gas Engine Parameter Table

Model MT13.52-60 MT13.48-60 MT13.44-60 MT13.40T-60 MT13.40-60 MT13.36-60
In line, water-cooling, four-stroke, supercharge inter-cooler, electronically controlled gas system, spark plug ignition,
Type
equivalence ratio combustion
Rated power/speed (kW/r/min) 385/1800 356/1800 327/1800 297/1800 297/1800 268/1800
Maximum net power/speed (kW/r/min) 382/1800 353/1800 324/1800 294/1800 294/1800 265/1800
Maximum torque/speed (Nm/r/min) 2400/1000-1400 2200/1000-1400 2100/1000-1400 2000/1000-1400 1800/1000-1400 1800/1000-1400
Ignition order 1－5－3－6－2－4
Crankshaft rotation direction Clockwise (viewed from the free end)
557
Engine parameters
WP4.6N Engine Parameter Table

Item Unit Model
Type - Supercharge inter-cooler
Crankshaft rotation direction - Clockwise (viewed from the free end)
Cylinder bore mm 108
Stroke mm 125
Power range kW 125,140,162
Minimum specific fuel consumption g/(kW·h) ≤195
Oil/fuel consumption ratio % ≤0.1
Displacement L 4.58
Emission level - National VI
558
Engine parameters
WP6H Engine Parameter Table

Model
Item Unit
WP6H245E61/E68 WP6H270E61/E68
Four-stroke water-cooling, electronically-controlled high-pressure common

Type -
rail, direct injection, supercharge inter-cooler
Cylinder bore mm 104 104
Stroke mm 122 122
Rated power kW 180 199
Fuel consumption rate under rated condition g/(kW·h) ≤218
Displacement L 6.22
559
Engine parameters
WP7.300E61 Engine Parameter Table

Item Unit Model
Stroke mm 136
Power range kW 220
Displacement L 7.47
560
Engine parameters
WP8.350E61 Engine Parameter Table

Item Unit Model
Stroke mm 136
Power range kW 250
Displacement L 7.8
561
Engine parameters
WP9H/WP10H/WP10.5H Engine Parameter Table

Model
Item Unit
WP9H350E62 WP10H400E62 WP10.5H430E62
Four-stroke water-cooling, electronically-controlled high-pressure common rail, direct injection, supercharge

Type -
inter-cooler
Crankshaft rotation
- Clockwise (viewed from the free end)
direction
Cylinder bore mm 116 116 122
Stroke mm 139 150 150
Power range kW 290～350 375～400 400～430
Minimum specific fuel

g/(kW·h) ≤185
consumption
Oil/fuel consumption
% ＜0.1
ratio
Displacement L 8.8 9.5 10.52
562
Engine parameters
WP12/WP13 Engine Parameter Table

Model
Item Unit
WP12.4900E62 WP13.510E62 WP13.550E62
Four-stroke water-cooling, electronically-controlled high-pressure common rail, direct injection, supercharge

Type -
inter-cooler
Crankshaft rotation
- Clockwise (viewed from the free end)
direction
Cylinder bore mm 126 127 127
Stroke mm 155 165 165
Rated power kW 360 375 405
Minimum specific fuel

g/(kW·h) ≤194
consumption
Oil/fuel consumption
% ＜0.2
ratio
Displacement L 11.596 12.54 12.54
563
Transmission parameters
ZF transmission parameter table
Model 16S2230TO 16S2530TO 16S2231TO 16S2531TO 12TX2620TD 12TX2621TD
Input torque (Nm) 2200 2500 2200 2500 2600 2600
Gear 16 16 16 16 12 12
1 13.8 13.8 13.8 13.8 16.688 16.688
2 11.54 11.54 11.54 11.54 12.924 12.924
3 9.49 9.49 9.49 9.49 9.926 9.926
4 7.93 7.93 7.93 7.93 7.668 7.668
5 6.53 6.53 6.53 6.53 5.895 5.895
6 5.46 5.46 5.46 5.46 4.565 4.565
7 4.57 4.57 4.57 4.57 3.655 3.655
8 3.82 3.82 3.82 3.82 2.831 2.831
Speed ratio 9 3.02 3.02 3.02 3.02 2.174 2.174
of gears 10 2.53 2.53 2.53 2.53 1.684 1.684
11 2.08 2.08 2.08 2.08 1.291 1.291
12 1.74 1.74 1.74 1.74 1 1
13 1.43 1.43 1.43 1.43
14 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
15 1 1 1 1
16 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84
R1 12.92 12.92 12.92 12.92 15.537 15.537
R2 10.8 10.8 10.8 10.8 12.033 12.033
347 (equipped with
Weight (kg) 314 314 379 379 265
retarder)
564
HW transmission parameter table

Model HW19712C HW19712L HW25712XSCJ HW25712XSCL HW25712XSJ HW25712XSL HW25712XSTCL HW25716XSTCL HW25716XACL
Input torque
(Nm) 2100 1900 2500 2500 2500 2500 2700 2700 2700
Gear 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 16
1 11.795 15.012 11.697(11.796) 11.697(11.796) 14.941(15.012) 14.941(15.012) 11.697(11.796) 12.960(13.125) 12.960(13.125)
2 9.167 11.667 9.091(9.167) 9.091(9.167) 11.611(11.667) 11.611(11.667) 9.091(9.167) 10.800(11.053) 10.800(11.053)
3 7.095 9.03 7.038(7.095) 7.038(7.095) 8.986(9.030) 8.986(9.030) 7.038(7.095) 9.000(9.167) 9.000(9.167)
4 5.615 7.146 5.467(5.615) 5.467(5.615) 6.987(7.146) 6.987(7.146) 5.467(5.615) 7.500(7.719) 7.500(7.719)
5 4.375 5.568 4.318(4.375) 4.318(4.375) 5.514(5.568) 5.514(5.568) 4.318(4.375) 6.210(6.300) 6.210(6.300)
6 3.438 4.375 3.381(3.438) 3.381(3.438) 4.318(4.375) 4.318(4.375) 3.381(3.438) 5.175(5.305) 5.175(5.305)
7 2.696 3.431 2.709(2.696) 2.709(2.696) 3.46(3.431) 3.46(3.431) 2.709(2.696) 4.318(4.375) 4.318(4.375)
8 2.095 2.667 2.105(2.095) 2.105(2.095) 2.689(2.667) 2.689(2.667) 2.105(2.095) 3.600(3.684) 3.600(3.684)
Speed
ratio 9 1.622 2.064 1.630(1.622) 1.630(1.622) 2.081(2.064) 2.081(2.064) 1.630(1.622) 3.000(3.000) 3.000(3.000)
of 10 1.283 1.633 1.266(1.283) 1.266(1.283) 1.618(1.633) 1.618(1.633) 1.266(1.283) 2.500(2.526) 2.500(2.526)
gears
11 1.000 1.273 1.000(1.000) 1.000(1.000) 1.277(1.273) 1.277(1.273) 1.000(1.000) 2.083(2.095) 2.083(2.095)
12 0.786 1.000 0.783(0.786) 0.783(0.786) 1.000(1.000) 1.000(1.000) 0.783(0.786) 1.736(1.764) 1.736(1.764)
13 1.438(1.440) 1.438(1.440)
14 1.198(1.213) 1.198(1.213)
15 1.000(1.000) 1.000(1.000)
16 0.833(0.842) 0.833(0.842)
R1 10.852 13.811 10.294(10.852) 10.294(10.852) 13.148(13.811) 13.148(13.811) 10.294(10.852) 11.515(12.031) 11.515(12.031)
R2 2.480 3.157 2.384(2.480) 2.384(2.480) 3.045(3.157) 3.045(3.157) 2.384(2.480) 9.596(10.132) 9.596(10.132)
Weight (kg) 379 292 428 310 428 310 330 318 312
565
Fast transmission parameter table

Model 8JS118A 8JS85E-C 9JS119TA 10JSD160 12JSD200TA 12JSDX240T
Input torque (Nm) 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600 2600
Gear 8 8 9 10 12 12
1 9.32 10.36 11.02 14.86 12.10 13.15
2 6.09 6.30 6.55 11.02 9.41 10.35
3 4.06 4.32 4.64 8.09 7.31 8.22
4 3.10 3.43 3.36 6.02 5.71 6.52
5 2.30 2.41 2.46 4.46 4.46 5.13
6 1.50 1.46 1.95 3.33 3.48 4.10
7 1.00 1.00 1.38 2.47 2.71 3.21
8 0.76 0.79 1.00 1.81 2.11 2.53
Speed ratio 9 0.73 1.35 1.64 2.01
of gears 10 1.00 1.28 1.59
11 1.00 1.25
12 0.78 1.00
13
14
15
16
R1 9.28 10.53 11.52 14.24 11.56 12.58
R2 2.44 3.19 2.59 3.07
Weight (kg) 260 180 280 325/285 (aluminum) 397/288 (aluminum) 397/292 (aluminum)
566
Retarder parameters
Retarder parameters
ZF-Intard retarder parameter table
Fuel charge Tightening torque (Nm)
Part
Lubricating
Matching Retarder Repair number
Retarder Transmission oil
transmission During Transmission the screw Install the of the
After Filter grade/drain
model oil Drain Oil overflow plug at temperature filter
maintenance Drain plug element period
change plug plug the rear sensor bolt element
bolt oil filler
16 S 2231TD/TO See
0501
18.5L 25.5L 60 ±6 60 ±6 23 ±2 60 ±6 60 ±6 9.5 ±1 "Transmission
215 163
16 S2531TO maintenance"
0501 See
12TX2621TD 23.5L 19L 60 60 23 60 60 9.5 "Transmission
215 163 maintenance"
0501 See
12TX2620TD 13.5L 12L 60 60 23 60 60 9.5 "Transmission
215 163 maintenance"
567
Retarder parameters
Retarder parameter table

Fuel charge (L) Tightening torque (Nm) Lubricating
oil
Model Oil change plug Oil change plug Pressure control valve Coolant release screw
Initial maintenance grade/drain
M30 M20 screw plug M30 plug M14 period
See
Voith VR115 CN 6.8 6.4 100 55 130 28 "Retarder
Maintenance"
568
Driven axle parameters

Driven axle parameter table
Model VPD75ES VPD95D VGD75S VGD95 H653K H653
Maximum steering
angle (°) of the inner 43 43 43 43 42 45 42 45
wheel
Maximum steering
angle (°) of the outer 31 31 31 31 32 35 32 35
wheel
Highway vehicle Highway vehicle Highway vehicle

Caster angle (°) of the Highway vehicle Highway vehicle 3 ° Highway vehicle 3 °
3° 3° 3°
master pin 3° Shop truck 2 ° Shop truck 2 °
Shop truck 2 ° Shop truck 2 ° Shop truck 2 °
Leaning angle (°) of

6 6 6 6 7 7
the master pin
Outside camber angle

1 1 1 1 1 1
(°) of the wheel
Radial
Toe-in 2.5±0.5mm/m 2.5±0.5mm/m 2.5±0.5mm/m 2.5±0.5mm/m 2±0.5mm/m 2±0.5mm/m
tire
Brake type 22"disc 20"disc Φ410 × 160 drum Φ410 × 160 drum Φ400 × 150 drum Φ400 × 150 drum
Applicable minimum
22.5 20 20 20 20 20
rim (inch)
569
Driven axle parameter table

Model VPD75D VPD71D VGD75 VGD71 1094
Maximum steering angle

43 43 43 43 42
(°) of the inner wheel
Maximum steering angle

31 31 31 29 33
(°) of the outer wheel
Caster angle (°) of the Highway vehicle 3 ° Highway vehicle 3 ° Highway vehicle 3 °
Highway vehicle 3 ° Highway vehicle 3 °
master pin Shop truck 2 ° Shop truck 2 ° Shop truck 2 °
Leaning angle (°) of the

6 6 6 6 6
master pin
Outside camber angle (°)

1 1 1 1 1
of the wheel
Toe-in Radial tire 2.5±0.5mm/m 2.5±0.5mm/m 2.5±0.5mm/m 2.5±0.5mm/m -1~1 mm
Brake type 20"disc 20"disc Φ410 × 160 drum Φ410 × 150 drum Φ400 × 130 drum
Applicable minimum rim

20 20 20 20 20
(inch)
570
Suspension parameters
Front suspension parameter table
Front suspension
Less-leaf spring Multi-leaf spring

Drive type Vehicle type Front axle model
Leaf spring specifications Leaf spring specifications
Traction HR7/HF7/H153 2×29、3×24 9×14、9×16

4×2
Carrying cargo HR7/HF7/H153 4×18、4×20 9×13、9×16
Traction HR7/HF7/H153 2×29、3×24 9×14、9×16
Carrying cargo HR7/HF7/H153 4×25 10×14、10×16、10×17

6×4
Special operation HR7/HF7/HR9/HF9/H153 4×25 10×14、10×16、10×17
Dump HR7/HF7/HR9/HF9/H153 4×25 10×14、10×16、10×17
11×13、2×16+9×14
Carrying cargo HR7/HF7/H153 3×22、4×20
2×16+9×15
11×13、2×16+9×14
8×4 Special operation HR7/HF7/HR9/HF9/H153 3×22、4×20
2×16+9×15
11×13、2×16+9×14
Dump HR7/HF7/HR9/HF9/H153 3×22、4×20、4×22
2×16+9×15
Traction HR7/HF7/H153 4×16、4×20

6×2 (dual-steering)
Carrying cargo HR7/HF7/H153 3×22、4×16 9×13
8X2 (intermediate axle

Carrying cargo H153 4x16 9×13
airbag lifting)
571
Rear suspension parameter table

Rear suspension
Vehicle Less-leaf spring Multi-leaf spring

Drive type Rear axle model
type Leaf spring specifications Leaf spring specifications
Traction 440/HT457/MCY11/MCY13 3×29+2×30、2×33+2×30 9×14+6×16

4×2
Carrying
440/HT457/MCY11/MCY13 5×30 9×16+6×16
cargo
Traction 440/HT457/MCY11/MCY13/ST16/HC16 3×25+2×34、 2×34+1×41、3×31+2×41 12×20、12×22
Carrying
440/HT457/MCY11/MCY13/ST16/HC16 5×32 12×20、12×22、4×22+8×25
cargo
6×4
Special
440/HT457/MCY11/MCY13/ST16/HC16 5×32 12×20、12×22、4×22+8×25
operation
Dump MCY11/MCY13/ST16/HC16 5×32 12×20、12×22、4×22+8×25
Carrying
440/HT457/MCY11/MCY13/ST16/HC16 5×32 12×20、12×22、4×22+8×25
cargo
8×4 Special 440/HT457/MCY11/MCY13/ST16/HC16 5×32 12×20、12×22、4×22+8×25
Dump MCY11/MCY13/ST16/HC16 5×32 12×20、12×22、4×22+8×25
6×2
Traction 440/HT457/MCY11/MCY13 3×29+2×30 9×14+6×16
(dual-steering)
6×2 Carrying
440/HT457/MCY11/MCY13 5×30 9×16+6×16
(dual-steering) cargo
572
List of parameters for balancing axle maintenance

Quality grade and viscidity Maintenance mileage
Assembly Oil name Quantity
grade and maintenance items
Leaf spring pin Lubricating grease 2# Lithium base grease 350 g
Single side 0.35-0.4 L (highway

vehicle) Not change
Metal balancing axle Gear oil GL-5 85W-90 Q/ZZ21040
Single side 0.9-1 L (version 5 tractor
and shop truck)
Balancing axle of rubber Maintenance-free and

None None None
bearing regular inspection
573
Tire parameters
Tire parameters
Wheel parameter table
Model 7.00T-20 7.50V-20 8.00V-20 8.5-20 22.5×8.25 22.5×9.00
Rim type Two-piece Two-piece Two-piece Two-piece One-piece One-piece
12R22.5
11R22.5 295/80R22.5
Tire specification 9.00R20 10.00R20 11.00R20 12.00R20 275/70R22.5 315/60R22.5
275/80R22.5 315/70R22.5
315/80R22.5
574
Tire parameters
Tire pressure parameter table

Tire model Air pressure (kPa)
11.00R20 (18 levels) 900
10.00R20 (16 levels) 830
11.00R20 (18 levels) 930
12.00R20 (18 levels) 830
11R22.5 (16 levels) 830
12R22.5 (16 levels) 830
12R22.5 (18 levels) 930
315/80R22.5 (18 levels) 830
315/70R22.5 (16 levels) 760
315/70R22.5 (18 levels) 830
315/60R22.5 (18 levels) 830
295/80R22.5 (16 levels) 830
295/80R22.5 (18 levels) 900
275/70R22.5 (16 levels) 830
275/70R22.5 (18 levels) 900
275/80R22.5 (16 levels) 830
575
Tire parameters
Dynamic balancing requirements for wheel tire assembly

Tire model Amount of unbalance of wheel-tire assembly (g.cm)
11.00R20 (18 levels) ≤5000
10.00R20 (16 levels) ≤5000
11.00R20 (18 levels) ≤8000
12.00R20 (18 levels) ≤8000
11R22.5 (16 levels) ≤5000
12R22.5 (16 levels) ≤5000
12R22.5 (18 levels) ≤5000
315/80R22.5 (18 levels) ≤5000
315/70R22.5 (16 levels) ≤5000
315/70R22.5 (18 levels) ≤5000
315/60R22.5 (18 levels) ≤5000
295/80R22.5 (16 levels) ≤5000
295/80R22.5 (18 levels) ≤5000
275/70R22.5 (16 levels) ≤3000
275/70R22.5 (18 levels) ≤3000
275/80R22.5 (16 levels) ≤3000
576
Vehicle parameters
Vehicle parameters
ZZ1317V446KF1 ZZ4187V391KF1 ZZ4187V501KF1L
Vehicle type
(Truck) (Towing Vehicle) (Towing Vehicle)
Drive form 8×4 4×2 4×2
Curb weight (kg) 11780,12800 6800 6800,7300
Front
Distribution 3240,3520 4420 4420,4750
axle
of axle load
Rear
(kg)
Quality parameters
3360/5180,3650/5630 (two-axle group) 2380 2380,2550

axle
Full mass (kg) 31000 18000 18000
Front
Distribution 6500/7000 6500 6500
axle
of axle load
Rear
(kg) 17500 (two-axle group) 11500 11500
axle
Authorized total towed
35000 35000,34500
mass (kg)
(on fifth wheel)
Maximum authorized 11070,11005 11070,11005,10570,10505
laden mass (kg)
Total length (mm) 12000 6090,6390 6690,6890,7490
Dimensional parameters
Total width (mm) 2550 2530 2530

Total height (mm) 3360,3740,3880,3930 3270,3820,3650,3790 3270,3820,3650,3790
Wheelbase (mm) 1950+4450+1350,1950+4425+1400,2300+4300+1350,2300+4275+1400 3600,3900 4200,4400,5000
Front
1996/1996,2022/2022,2041/2041 1996,2022,2041,2060 1996,2022,2041,2060
wheel
Track (mm)
Rear
1830/1830,1860/1860 1830,1860 1830,1860
wheel
Front suspension
1465 1465 1465
(mm)
Rear suspension (mm) 2785,2760,2585,2560 1025 1025
Maximum speed
89,102 89,102 89,102
(km/h)
Performance
parameters
Maximum gradeability
35 34 34
(%)
Minimum turning
24 14,15 15.7,16.5,17.7
diameter (m)
Fuel consumption
37.0 35.0
(L/100 km)
577
Vehicle parameters
ZZ4257V344KF1W ZZ4257V424KF1LW
ZZ4257V344KF1 ZZ4257V424KF1L
Vehicle type (Hazardous goods towing (Hazardous goods towing
(Towing Vehicle) (Towing Vehicle)
vehicle) vehicle)
Drive form 6×4 6×4 6×4 6×4
Curb weight (kg) 8800,9600 8800,9600 8800,9600 8800,9600
Front
4930,5370 4930,5370 4930,5370 4930,5370
Distribution of axle axle
load (kg) Rear
3870/4230 (two-axle group) 3870/4230 (two-axle group) 3870/4230 (two-axle group) 3870/4230 (two-axle group)
Quality parameters
axle
Full mass (kg) 25000 25000 25000 25000
Front
7000 7000 7000 7000
load (kg) Rear
18000 (two-axle group) 18000 (two-axle group) 18000 (two-axle group) 18000 (two-axle group)
axle
Authorized total towed mass
40000,39200 40000,39200 40000,39200 40000,39200
(kg)
(on fifth wheel) Maximum
16070,16005,15270,15205 16070,16005,15270,15205 16070,16005,15270,15205 16070,16005,15270,15205
authorized laden mass (kg)
Total length (mm) 7015,7215 7015,7215 7615,7990 7615,7990
Total width (mm) 2530 2530 2530 2530
Total height (mm) 3270,3820,3650,3790 3510,3750,3800 3270,3820,3650,3790 3510,3750,3800

Wheelbase (mm) 3225+1350,3200+1400,3425+1350,3400+1400 3825+1350,3800+1400,4200+1350,4175+1400
Front
1996,2022,2041,2060 1996,2022,2041,2060 1996,2022,2041,2060 1996,2022,2041,2060
wheel
Track (mm)
Rear
1830/1830,1860/1860 1830/1830,1860/1860 1830/1830,1860/1860 1830/1830,1860/1860
wheel
Front suspension (mm) 1465 1465 1465 1465
Rear suspension (mm) 975,950 975,950 975,950 975,950
Performance
Maximum speed (km/h) 89,102 79 89,102 79

parameters
Maximum gradeability (%) 34 34 34 34

Minimum turning diameter (m) 15,14.9,15.7,15.6 15,14.9,15.7,15.6 17.1,17,18.5,18.4 17.1,17,18.5,18.4
Fuel consumption (L/100 km) 39.5 39.5
578
Vehicle parameters
ZZ5317XXYV446KF1 ZZ5317CCYV446KF1 ZZ5317XLCV446KF1

Vehicle type
(Transport van) (Stake truck) (Refrigerator truck)
Drive form 8×4 8×4 8×4
Curb weight (kg) 12180,13080 12080,13100 12700,13700
Front
3350/3470,3600/3730 3350/3470,3600/3730 3490/3620,3770/3900
load (kg) Rear
5360,5750 (two-axle group) 5360,5750 (two-axle group) 5590,6030 (two-axle group)
Quality parameters
axle
Full mass (kg) 31000 31000 31000
Front
6500/7000 6500/7000 6500/7000
load (kg) Rear
17500 (two-axle group) 17500 (two-axle group) 17500 (two-axle group)
axle
Authorized total towed mass
(kg)
(on fifth wheel) Maximum
authorized laden mass (kg)
Total length (mm) 12000 12000 12000
Total width (mm) 2550 2550 2600
Total height (mm) 3980 3830,3930,3980 3980

Wheelbase (mm) 1950+4450+1350,1950+4425+1400,2300+4300+1350,2300+4275+1400
Front
1996/1996,2022/2022,2041/2041
wheel
Track (mm)
Rear
1830/1830,1860/1860 1830/1830,1860/1860 1830/1830,1860/1860
wheel
Front suspension (mm) 1465 1465 1465
Rear suspension (mm) 2785,2760,2585,2560 2785,2760,2585,2560 2785,2760,2585,2560
Performance
Maximum speed (km/h) 89,102 89,102 89,102

parameters
Maximum gradeability (%) 35 35 35

Minimum turning diameter (m) 24 24 24
Fuel consumption (L/100 km) 37.0 37.0 37.0
579

Howo Max

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Howo Max

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HOWO MAX series cars (national VI)

Sinotruk Jining Commercial Vehicle Corporation

Caution: suggestive additional explanatory information.

China National Heavy Duty Truck Group Co., Ltd.

MC11/MC11H/MC13/MC13H/MT13 engine nameplate ② is located on the

MT07/MT07H engine nameplate ③ is located on the upper surface of the

WP7/WP8 Weichai engine nameplate ④ is installed on the cylinder head

WP9/WP10/WP10.5/WP12/WP13 Weichai engine nameplate ⑤ is located

WP4.6N Weichai engine nameplate ⑥ is installed on the cylinder head cover.

WP6H Weichai engine nameplate ⑦ is located and installed on the cylinder

Operation f door (from outside)

Operation of door (from inside)

Open the door (driver's side, door locked)

Lock the door (driver's side)

Open the door (copilot's side)

Power window (driver side)

Power window (copilot side)

Key bar code

Remote control window glass

Power window (berth control switch)

Rearview mirror adjustment

Rearview mirror adjustment (electric)

Turn on the rearview mirror heating device

• Turn on the key switch.

Axle wire of front windshield

Right side of front windshield

• Middle and front passenger side: storage area:

Solar protection device

Retraction of the sun visor

Removal and installation of curtain

Flow guide system

Adjustment of flow guide system

Open the skylight (cocked)

Close the skylight

① Three-point height adjustable seat belt ② Forward and backward

Three-point height adjustable seat belt

Seat height adjustment

Light weight seat

① Seat backrest angle adjustment

Seat backrest angle adjustment

Seat backrest angle adjustment range

Steering wheel adjustment

Please fasten the safety belt.

Safety belt height adjustment

• The middle support plate ① of sleeping berth cannot be removed.

Upper berth (raised roof driving cab)

Upper berth laid down

Overview of the inside of the cab

Instrument panel (LNG)

Instrument panel (CNG)

Oil pressure gauge

Rocker switch and buttons

13 Rocker switch for DPF parking regeneration/ DPF parking regeneration

16 Diagnosis connector: a special diagnostic tool for heavy trucks can be

1 Low fuel level alarm 17 Left tur n signal lamp of trailer

2 ECS 18 Hig h beam

3 Safet y belt not fastened alarm 19 Low beam

4 Over speed warning light 20 Front fog lamp

5 Left steering indicator of main vehicle

6 Par king brake

8 Seri ous warning light (red)

9 Batter y charging and discharging indicator

10 Main r ight steering working indicator